Home

Model DX102P/DX104P/DX106P/DX112P

1. Volt uV Numerical value Temperature unit Application Type of process Trend clear Memory Data Display Event Sample 125 ms 250 ms 500 ms 1s 125 ms 250 ms and 500 ms are rate 25 5s 10s 30s for DX102P and DX104P only 60s 120s 300 s 600 s Data length 3 min to 31 days Up to other parameters set Memory and Meas CH Math CH Math CH trend First CH Up to model types Last CH On Off On of Memory Timeup type off Hour Day Week timeup Month Date Numerical value Day of SUN MON TUE WED the week THU FRI SAT Time hour Numerical value Admin tool Login settings Batch system settings Auto Of 1min 2 min Logout 10 min Display On eae Sign record Sign Not settings record gt 3 2 Admin tool Number 3 a Admin settings Login method Key Com User name Character strings User ID Password 222 gt r oan nnn Only default password can be entered Password expire 3 month 6 month IM 04L05A01 01E App 5 Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings Parameters Menu Notes Admin tool User settings User Number 61 to 90 Password Number Jto30 fa to 60 6 1 to 90 Login method lof o Key Com Key Com User name Character strings User ID Only default password can be entered Password expire 3 month 6
2. Operation Log Operation Ref section Login Logging in 6 1 Logout Logging out 6 1 UserLocked The user is invalidated 6 1 6 3 MemStart Memory Start 6 2 MemStop Memory Stop 6 2 AlarmACK Releasing the alarm indication and output relay 7 3 8 11 Message Writing a message 8 2 Manual Manual sampling 8 3 MathStart Starting the computation 8 4 MathStop Stopping the computation 8 4 MathReset Resetting the computation 8 4 MathACK Clearing the comoutation dropout display 8 4 Snapshot Saving the screen image 8 5 MailStart Starting the e mail transmission IMO4L05A01 17E MailStop Stopping the e mail transmission IMO04L05A01 17E DispSave Saving the display data 8 6 EventSave Saving the event data 8 6 DispLoad Loading the display data 8 7 EventLoad Loading the event data 8 7 NewTime Newly set time when data acquisition is stopped 5 15 TimeChg Setting the date and time using operation keys 5 15 TimeAdj Adjusting the internal clock via the remote control function 1 9 TimeDST Time changed according to DST before change 1 10 TRevStart Starting time adjustment while data acquisition is in progress 1 10 TRevEnd Ending time adjustment 1 10 SNTPtimeset Adjusting the time at once using SNTP IMO4L05A01 17E Clear1 Executing Clear 1 Initialization 4 13 Clear2 Executing Clear 2 Initialization 4 13 Clear3 Executing Clear 3 Initialization 4 13
3. For the DX106P and DX112P RTD input terminals A and B are isolated on each channel Terminal b is shorted internally across all channels However for options N1 Cu10 Cu25 RTD input 3 terminal isolated RTD and N2 3 terminal isolated RTD input b is isolated for each channel 2 10 IM 04L05A01 01E 2 4 Input Signal Wiring e Wiring Diagram DC Voltage and DI Input DC voltage input B g rr Resistance Temperature Detector Input I Leadwire resistance 10 Q max wire The resistance of the three wires should be approximately equal Thermocouple Input A Extension leadwire DC Current Input DC current input Shunt resistor NOTE For a 4 to 20 mA input use a shunt resistor of 250 Q 0 1 IM 04L05A01 01E dOOLXG eu Bursn 310429 2 5 Alarm Output Wiring AR1 AR2 A3 Option A WARNING e To prevent electric shock ensure the main power supply is turned OFF e lf a voltage of more than 30 VAC or 60 VDC is to be applied to the alarm output terminal use ring tongue crimp on lugs with insulation sleeves on all terminals to prevent the wires from slipping out when the screws become loose Furthermore use double insulated wires dielectric strength of 2300 VAC or more for the signal w
4. Soft key Settings in the engineering mode Ref Title Item section 7 Option 7 1 Remote R1 Action assignment to remote terminals 4 5 7 2 Report M1 Report types 4 6 Date Time of creation Report channel assignments Sum scale 7 3 Timer TLOG Timer mode absolute time relative time 4 7 M1 Interval Reference time for the absolute timer Turn On Off reset at each interval Turn On Off data storage 7 4 System relay F1 Action assignment to system relays 4 8 8 Communications 8 1 Ethernet IP_Address 8 2 Ethernet DNS 8 3 FTP transfer file 8 4 FTP connection 8 5 Control Timeout Keep alive 8 6 Serial Memory out 8 7 Modbus master BASIC 8 8 Modbus master DOMMAND 9 Web E Mail 9 1 Web 9 2 Basic E Mail settings 9 3 Alarm E Mail settings 9 4 Scheduled E Mail settings 9 5 System E Mail settings 9 6 Report E Mail settings 10 Active storage change Set the time set the user registration set the 4 14 calibration correction and turn ON OFF the calibration correction change message 11 Date amp Time Time deviation limit for allowing the gradual 4 15 correction of the time Time Zone Time deviation from GMT 4 10 12 SNTP 12 1 Basic settings 12 2 SNTP synched to start End End End the system mode 3 5 See the DX100P DX200P Communication Interface User s Manual
5. The resistance of three lead wires must be equal Input terminals Decade resistance box Model 2793 01 from Yokogawa M amp C Temperature Measurement Using the TC Example for the DX112P Thermocouple wires Copper wires or TC extension wires Power supply terminals ejej e a pl gt ermocouple os DC voltage standard wires ai SES i Input terminals 0 C standard temperature device Model ZC 114 ZA 10 from Coper Electronics Co Ltd Reference Junction Compensation for the Thermocouple Input As the measurement terminal of the DX100P is generally at room temperature the actual output of the thermocouple is different from the values given on the thermoelectromotive force table based on 0 C The DX100P measures the temperature of the terminal and makes adjustments by calculation Therefore when the measurement terminals are shorted equivalent to 0 C at the det
6. 3 ys Input processing 8 Input value 5 oO 2 Y4 Moving average Filter Square root computation H Scaling FE x 3 Y3 Calibration correction o Y2 8 Y E Y1 Difference computation XT X2 X3 X4 X5 i Measured value measured value before correction Displayed on the screen When measuring temperature using a thermocouple and the thermocouple burns out you can specify the measurement result to be set to positive over range or negative over range Burnout can be set on each measurement channel For the setting procedure see section 4 2 Positive over range is a condition in which the input signal is over the upper limit of the measurable range The measured value is indicated as xxxXxXx Negative over range is a condition in which the input signal is below the lower limit of the measurable range The measured value is indicated as kxXxxx Note ____ When the alarm is set to detect positive or negative over range the occurrence of burnout of thermocouple can be displayed as an alarm Turn the burnout function OFF when connecting the input wires in parallel with other devices Reference Junction Compensation RJC When measuring the temperature using a thermocouple the reference junction compensation can be used You can select whether to use the reference junction compensation provided by the DX100P or external reference junction compensation If you are using external reference
7. Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 150 This action is not possible because sampling is in progress Execute Memory Stop if the action is necessary 151 This action is not possible during sampling or calculating Execute Memory Stop or stop computation if the action is necessary 152 This action is not possible because saving is in progress Wait till the saving ends 153 This action is not possible because formatting is in progress 155 The message is not written while sampling is stopped Messages can be written after Memory Start 157 This function is not possible at this time 158 Exceeds time deviation setting Set a time within the deviation time See section 4 15 170 End process can t proceed because setting file is not saved Check the external storage medium to Media See section 3 5 171 The selected configuration file is not compatible with this system Select other configuration file 172 Data save is not possible in the current operating mode Save engineering mode settings first See section 5 24 173 Data save is not possible because of insufficient media capacity Use another storage medium See section 5 24 9 2 IM 04L05A01 01E 9 1 A List of Messages Operation Errors e Errors Related to External Storage Medium Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 200 Operation aborted because an error was found on
8. E E E E E E EE 1 6 SE fis nef ESE Ee Shoe E BAe i2 BeF E 6E E BF E E E et Bt ae at U Bou Bou B o aak aw E D E E bopo b EE PE Fea E E E a4 Pci E E r EEE E E 1 0 EE E E2 EE Ly pte ae 1 2 1 E E Fiat E E 1 eae EE EE EE EEEE E2 o2 02 0 2 02 0 2 0 2 2 2 02 0 Note Scale marks The scale can be divided into 4 to 12 sections using the main scale marks When the scale is divided into 4 or 5 section the area between the main scale marks is divided further into 10 sections using small and medium marks When the scale is divided into 6 to 12 sections the area between the main scale marks is divided further into 5 sections using small marks However small marks are not displayed for the following cases When the measurement computation range resolution is smaller than the total number of sections created by small marks When zone display is used When partial expanded display is used Scale values The scale values are displayed at all main scale marks when the scale is divided into 4 to 7 4 to 6 for trend vertical display sections using the main scale marks When the scale is divided into 8 to 12 7 to 12 for trend vertical display sections the scale values are displayed at every other main scale mark In addition the upper or lower limit of the scale is displayed at the end of the scale Rule 1 Up to 3 digits excluding the minus sign can be displayed for the scale values
9. Note1 Panel mount type models Desktop type models with P1 Note2 Desktop type models without P1 Desktop Type 1 Power terminals and a protective ground terminal Connect the power cord and the protective ground cord 2 Ethernet port Connect the Ethernet cable 10Base T 3 Serial interface port C2 C3 option RS 232 port or RS 422A 485 port depending on the specification Connect the interface cable 4 Input terminals Connect the input signal cable of the item being measured 5 Option terminals AR1 AR2 A3 F1 R1 TPS2 TPS4 option Connect optional input output signal cables 6 Functional ground terminal Note ____ See the DX100P DX200P Communication interface user s manual IM 04L05A01 17E to use Ethernet port and the serial interface port 1 Carrying handle 2 Foot four and folding stand two IM 04L05A01 01E 2 5 dOOLXG eu Bursn 310499 2 3 Installing the DX100P Installation Location Install the DX100P indoors in a location that meets the following conditions See also the normal operating conditions described in section 11 8 General Specifications Instrument panel The DX100P is designed for panel mounting Well ventilated location To prevent overheating install the DX100P in a well ventilated location For the pan
10. The waveforms of all the channels set to display the trend are displayed 2 17 TI 002 FI 001 FI 002 Auto Switching of Groups When AUTO SCROLL ON is selected the displayed group on the trend digital and bar graph displays can be automatically switched at a specified interval In each display the displayed group rotates from group 1 to group 6 You can select 5 s 10 s 20 s 30 s and 1 min for the switch interval For the procedure related to setting the switch interval scroll time see section 5 13 Displaying Messages You can switch between the two message display formats as shown below by selecting MESSAGE DISP 1 or MESSAGE DISP 2 Message display 1 Message display 2 Cll A eae PO Message display 4 Messages are collectively displayed al 60 Efi 2AA on ANAN F K p J 00 14 Mater ila 2 08 13 Hater ila 00 11 START a oa e ENERE Fa AEE TAi ie Po KAE EE PTE i dik HEA FI 0 1 BECEN The number of lines that can be displayed varies depending on the trend display direction and the number of scales displayed Vertical 6 lines max horizontal 3 lines horizontal type 2 2 lines 7 4 IM 04L05A01 01E 7 2 Using the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens Digital Screen Procedure Changing the Display 1 Press the DISP ENTER key to display the screen menu Press the right arrow key
11. Displayed Information The following Information can be displayed Information Description All channel display Waveforms of all channels that were set to display the trend are displayed on one trend screen gt Sections 4 3 and 7 2 Message writing Specified messages can be written at arbitrary points in time Messages are written to the internal memory and displayed on the waveform display section See the explanation on next page Sections 5 16 and 8 2 Display direction of waveforms The waveform can be displayed vertically or horizontally Section 5 13 Displayed color of waveforms The displayed color of waveforms can be specified for each channel The color also applies to the bar graph Section 5 10 Thickness of waveform lines You can select from 1 2 or 3 dots The specified thickness of waveform lines applies to all channels Section 5 13 Trip line display Displays a line to indicate a particular value of interest trip line for each group You can select the thickness of the displayed line from 1 2 or 3 dots Up to four trip lines can be displayed on a single group gt Sections 5 9 and 5 13 Scale display A scale appropriate for the measured item can be displayed for each channel The number of divisions of the scale created by the main scale marks can be set to a value in the range 4 to 12 div also applies to the bar graph Medium
12. eccceecceeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseneeseeeeeaeess 3 24 Configuration in the System Mode Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function ecceecceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseaeeseaeseaeetiaeeeeeteaten 4 1 Setting the A D Integration Time Scan Interval Burnout Reference Junction Compensation and Temperature Unit ecccceeceeeceeeneeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeed 4 3 Setting the Method of the Display Event Data Acquisition and Saving cceeeeeee 4 5 Registering Users and Setting the Login Function and Electronic Signature Function 4 9 Assigning Actions to the Remote Control Terminals R1 Option cceseeeeeeeeeees 4 16 Setting the Report Function 0 cceeeceeseeeseesseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeeseeeeaeensaee 4 17 Setting the Timer for TLOG Data Acquisition and TLOG Computation eeeeee 4 19 Setting System Relays F1 Option eecceeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeeseeseeeeseeeeeeeesaaes 4 21 Setting the Auxiliary Functions 0 ecceeeceeeseeeneeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeeeaeesaaeseaeeseeesaeeseaeesieeenaeeeaaes 4 22 Settinig the Time ZOMe EE cscutascesbasezdehsashcpaces essa E TE 4 24 IM 04L05A01 01E Contents Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 4 11 Saving Loading Setup Data eceecceceeeeeeeeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseaeenieeseaeeneeeeeatens 4 25 4 12 Loading the Login Information 00 cece eeseeeeneeee
13. 81 All space or quit string cannot be specified See section 4 4 83 Duplicate used combination of user ID and password See section 4 4 85 The login password is incorrect See section 6 1 86 The key lock release password is incorrect 87 This key is locked See section 4 4 88 This function is locked See section 4 4 89 Press FUNC key to login See section 6 1 90 No permission to enter to the SETUP mode 91 Password is incorrect Enter correct password See sections 6 1 and 6 3 IM 04L05A01 01E Bunooyselqnol el 9 1 A List of Messages Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 92 Press ESC key to change to the operation mode Press the ESC key 93 String including space or all space cannot be specified Spaces are not allowed in the Web user name and password 94 More than one address cannot be specified Multiple addresses cannot be specified Only a single sender is allowed 95 This function is locked Unlock the function See section 4 4 100 IP address doesn t belong to class A B or C See section 2 3 Communication Interface Manual 101 The result of the masked IP address is all Os or 1s See section 2 3 Communication Interface Manual 102 SUBNET mask is incorrect See section 2 3 Communication Interface Manual 103 The net part of de
14. bith area A ict RD 43 6 piritisistiriitiiis e Unit The unit is displayed near the center of the scale When the partial expanded display is used the position will be shifted When the trend is displayed horizontally the number of characters that can be displayed is up to 3 If the Scale digit is set to Fine up to 4 characters can be displayed Bar Base Position on the Bar Graph Display 2 000 2 000 1 0 843 l v Pn ase Bar base position normal 3 L 0 843 The bar base position is E o v either the left end or right m m 9 90 290 00 3 E end whichever has a smaller o oj 187 57 scale value 3 500 3 so0 Bar base position center i L 8 844 The base position is at the center 50 of the display span IM 04L05A01 01E 5 23 apo Buissourbuy y ul uoneIn yuo a 5 13 Setting the Display Direction Background Color Waveform Line Width Trip Line Width Grid Scroll Time and Scale digit The display direction of the trend and bar graph can be set to horizontal or vertical The background color used in the trend digital bar graph and information screens can be set to white or black common to all screens e The line width of the waveform can be selected as 1 2 or 3 dots The line width of the trip line can be selected as 1 2 or 3 dots e The grid lines can be displayed on the trend s waveform display area by dividing the
15. sesessssssersereerrerrerrrerrerrneees 1 11 display direction trend display the log SCreen ou eee eee ecee tee eeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaes display update rate ee eee seesesseseceseseeseseerseessseesssneesetesees displayed color bar graph us displayed Color trend 0 0 eee eee eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaes displayed color trip line oo eee eee eee eeee eee eeeeeeeee displayed data of the waveform displayed language csccesseseecsseseseessnseseeeseesereesseesenes 1 55 displaying the list of files oo eee eee eee eeeeeeeee 8 12 displaying the system screen 0 eee eee eee eeeeeeteeeeeeeees 8 13 E ASY TOXU ONY oiii aiin a a aaea 1 58 0 o SE 1 54 GSC DUTON Siivet eindarinnar ndin 2 4 electronic signature function 008 1 31 1 37 energize de energize alarm output relay 0 00 1 42 engineering MOE cc eseseeeesesesseeeeseeseseerseessseeesenseneeeeess 3 4 entering characters we 3 23 entering numbers we 3 22 OMOMMOSSAQOS ieira S E a E AS tates see 9 1 error on the storage medium wi 1 29 O E E satan Ethernet port sssssssessesrrseessruseneerrrnasenrrnuseustnnrenstnurrunrneennseneet executing memory stop expanding reducing the time AXiS eseeeeeeeereereerereen OXPONON Ewe reer on caren ta p h yhy vae external storage media handling external storage Medium ce eee eeeeeeeeeereeeeees E Fahrenheiti i eee de
16. ss sseeeeneseersensrrererernsrnrnsrrsrnrrnrnsrnrrernsrnrrernenee App 10 Appendix S Data Type iice c ea nie avidin a Re eel App 15 Appendix 4 Time for Acquiring Display Data Event Data to the Internal Memory App 16 Appendix 5 Operation Log Contents and Display cceceeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeees App 18 Appendix 6 Style Numbers and Functions cccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseaeeseeeenaeessaeeneeenaees App 20 Index IM 04L05A01 01E xi Chapter 1 Overview of Functions Overview of the DX100P 1 1 Unlike conventional recorders that record data on charts the DX100P displays the measured data acquired in the internal memory to a LCD in the form of waveforms numerical values and bar graphs The measured data can also be saved to external storage media such as Zip disks and flash memory cards DX100P External storage medium lt gt Zip disk Flash memory card The measured data are managed as follows e e e e Only registered users can operate the DX100P The batch number and lot number can be attached to the measured data files Operations and setting changes are recorded in the order of occurrence Up to three users can add approval information to the measured data file Communication Function See IM 04L05A01 17E You can carry out the following types of operations by using the Ethernet communication function e Transmit the measured data in
17. Note The upper and lower limits of span cannot be set to the same value 5 Unit Set the unit for the computed value Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a character string Enter the unit up to 6 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see section 3 6 Entering Numbers and Characters Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key IM 04L05A01 01E 5 31 apo Buissourbuy y ul uoeIn yuo a 5 18 Setting Equations Alarms and Constants for Computation Channels M1 Option Setting Alarms on Computation Channels You can set up to 4 alarms on each computation channel The hysteresis is not applied to alarms for computation channels Note ____ When Math On Off is turned ON an entry box used to enter the equation is displayed and the alarm setting boxes are activated white color Set the alarm after setting the equation When computation is turned On Off or when equations and span settings are changed the alarm setting for that channel is turned OFF 1 First CH 31 Last CH far Hath n Calculation expression Bi Span_Lower Span_Upper Unit 200 00 200 08 RUE Type Value Rly No fm fy a oa on
18. Setting Use of Alarm ACK Operation System Mode See section 4 1 System Mode Alarm Reflash Relay AND None Action Energize Behavior Hold Indicator Hold 21 Rate of change Increase 1 Decrease 1 Hysteresis On On Off Setting Scan Interval Burnout S stem Mode See section 4 2 hernet System Mode Link A D Integrate Scan interval 20 First cH a1 Burnout set 19 RJC Internal Temperature Auto 5 Hz 6BHz ELIS Setting Measurement Channel Alarm Engineering Mode See section 5 1 First CH ERY Lest cu a1 __ 44 Range Hode Range Span L Span U Te T7 6 6 200 0 17 16 16 ue Type Value Rly 1 fon H 155 8 off _____ 18 2 lott 3 lott 4 off Setting Tag Name Engineering Mode See section 5 3 First CH Last CH far Tag T1 001 15 Moving average Count Off Alarm delay time 10 s Setting Group Trip Line Engineering Mode See section 5 9 Group number Group set Group name GROUP 1 32 CH set 01 02 03 04 32 CH1 CH2 CH3 and CH4 IPIE Bane Pee are assigned to GROUP1 os ison L286 in this setting om ves amp Rea 33 g ort ort f 3 20 IM 04L05A01 01E 3 5 Setting the Functions System Mode and Engineering Mode Setting Display Direction Engineering Mode See section 5 13 View LoD Direction Brightness a Trend 36 Bargraph Vertical asen tr 37 Background White Trend line 2 dot
19. Setting on a Measurement Channel To display the setting screen press the soft key 2 Setting on a Computation Channel Option Twice press the soft key Next To display the setting screen press the soft key 12 1 1 l l L First CH a1 Last cH jar First CH 31 Last CH 31 z TLOG Timer No 1 Hoving average Sum scale Off Count off Rolling average off Alarm delay time 108 2 Alarm Delay Time Hu s 2 1 First CH Last CH Select the desired channels For the channels set here other parameters shown in the above figure are also simultaneously set 2 Alarm Delay Time Set the alarm delay period for the delay upper lower limit alarm Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the alarm delay period Enter an integer value in the range 1 to 3600 s and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see section 3 6 Entering Numbers and Characters If the scan interval is 2 s and you set an odd value for the alarm delay period it will operate at the specified period 1 s Example If the alarm delay period is set to 5 s it will operate at 6 s Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key IM 04L05A01 01E 5 9 a
20. c cesceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeaeeseeseeeesieeseaeeeneeeeas 8 3 8 3 Storing Measured Computed Data at Arbitrary Times Manual Sampling c 8 5 8 4 Starting Stopping Computation Resetting Computation Releasing Computation Dropout Display ME OPON eiecges ot ete Ss a i ei eee ee 8 6 8 5 Saving the Screen Image Snap Shot ceeeeecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseaeeeeeeseaeesseeeeeeeaes 8 8 8 6 Saving the Display Data Event Data to the External Storage Medium Using Key Operations s405 icieed meted anand arin slong 8 9 8 7 Signing Display Event Data Files on the External Storage Medium cceseeeeees 8 10 8 8 Displaying the List of Files and the Free Space on the External Storage Medium 8 12 8 9 Displaying the Log Screen System Screen esceceee cece eee eee tee teeeeaeseeeteeseeeeeenaes 8 13 8 10 Changing th PASSWOTd ia i etestedesetensce ti deh pteleleetz desea nti eed ete toe 8 16 8 11 Acknowledging Alarms Alarm ACK cccccesceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeseaeeeeeeseaeeneeeteatens 8 17 8 12 Clearing the User Locked ICOM 0 0 ieee ee eee cece eee teee cee teee tae eeaeeaeeeaeseeeeaeseeeeeseaeeeeaes 8 18 Troubleshooting 9 1 A Listo Messagi Sierning iin niacin Se et Geet 9 1 9 2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart ceeccecsceseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeesaeeeeaeesneeseaeeeieeseaeeseeeenaeess 9 13 Chapter 10 Maintenance 10 1 Periodic Maintenance os vcis
21. 8 712 6 718 6 711 af Measured computed value Updating of the Bar Graph and the Numerical Display Measured computed values are updated every second However when the scan interval on the DX106P DX112P is 2 s the update rate is also 2 s Displayed Information The following Information can be displayed Information Description Display direction The bar graphs can be displayed horizontally or vertically gt Section 5 13 Base position When the bar graph is displayed horizontally the starting point of the bar base position can be set to the minimum edge of the measurement scale or to the center position Section 5 12 Displayed color The displayed color of the channels are common with the trend Section 5 10 Scale display The number of divisions of the scale can be set to a value in the range 4 to 12 common with the trend Section 5 12 IM 04L05A01 01E SUOI DUNY JO M Q E 1 3 Display Function Overview Screen Alarm Summary Displays a list of measured computed values and alarm conditions of all measurement computation channels You can move the cursor to select a channel and display the trend or bar graph of the group containing the selected channel e Alarm ACK operation can be performed on each alarm Alarm ACK operation refers to the operation performed to clear the alarm display and relay output option For details on the operations on the overview scre
22. 9 999999E 99 Storing to the Internal Memory and Saving to the External Storage Medium For the description see section 1 4 1 50 IM 04L05A01 01E 1 8 FAIL Memory End Output Function F1 option FAIL output memory end output or Memory Start Memory Stop output can be assigned to the two output relays For the procedure see section 4 8 FAIL Output When a failure occurs in the CPU of the DX100P the relay contact signal 1 signal is output The relay is energized when the CPU is normal it is de energized when a CPU failure occurs de energized on failure Therefore relay output is carried out even when the power is turned OFF even during a power failure see figure below You cannot change this behavior e FAIL relay output de energized on failure NO Cc NC NO 0 NC NO c NC During normal operation When a failure occurs When power is turned OFF NO C and NC are names of the relay output terminals NO Normally Opened C Common NC Normally Closed Memory End Output The relay is energized when either of the following conditions is met You cannot change this behavior When the remaining free space on the external storage medium is less than equal to 10 or 6 MB when the storage area is not used cyclically Media FIFO When an external storage medium error is detected when the storage area is used cyclically Media FIFO When the remaining amount of time of the internal memory
23. IM 04L05A01 01E 11 8 General Specifications Input source resistance Volt range Transport and Storage Conditions e With variation of 1 kQ Ranges of 2 V or less within 10 uV Ranges of 6 V or greater 0 1 of rdg or less TC range e With variation of 1 kQ Within 10 uV 100 uV when the burnout upscale downscale function is switched on RTD range Pt100 e With variation of 10 Q per wire resistance of all three wires must be equal 0 1 of rdg 1 digit or less With maximum difference of 40 mhos between wires approximately 0 1 C The following specifies the environmental conditions required during transportation from shipment to the start of service and during storage as well as during transportation and storage if the DX100P is temporarily taken out of service No malfunction will occur under these conditions with serious damage which is impossible to repair however calibration may be necessary to recover normal operation performance Ambient temperature Humidity Vibration Shock Other Specifications Clock Daylight saving Accuracy of clock Memory backup Insulation resistance Dielectric strength 25 C to 60 C 5 to 95 RH No condensation is allowed 10 to 60 Hz 4 9 m s maximum 392 m s maximum while being packed With calendar function year of grace When the time is changed while data acquisition is in progress the time is corrected by 15 625 milsecond
24. IM 04L05A01 01E App 7 xipueddy Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings Parameters Menu Application time out On Off On Notes Time Keep alive Communication input Available user Web Use Not 1 to 120 min Use Numerical value off o Admin1 to User30 Serial Page type Operator Monitor On Off On Off Access control On Off User name Password Charactor string Basic E Mail settings SMTP server name Port number Recipient 1 Charactor string Numerical value Recipient 2 Sender Alarm E Mail settings Recipient 1 Charactor string Recipient 2 Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 Alarm 4 Include INST Include source URL Subject Header 1 Header 2 Scheduled E Mail settings Recipient 1 Charactor string Interval Ref time Recipient 2 Numerical value Interval Ref time Include INST Numerical value Include source URL Subject Header 1 Header 2 System E Mail settings Recipient 1 Charactor string Recipient 2 Include source URL Subject Header 1 Header 2 Report E Mail settings Recipient 1
25. Modbus master Displays the status of the data read using the Modbus master function User Locked ACK 8 12 Clearing the User Locked icon operation allowed only when you logged in as an administrator See the DX100P DX200P Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L05A01 17E IM 04L05A01 01E 3 5 suoneado UoWWOD eo 3 4 Functions and Operations in the Operation Mode Procedure Below is the procedure for carrying out File list that is indicated in the second line of the menu examples 1 Pressing the FUNC key displays a menu that is assigned to the soft keys at the bottom of the screen 2 Press the Next soft key to show the next menu 3 Press the File list soft key The FUNC key menu is cleared and a list of files of the external storage medium is displayed Operations Using Other Keys USER Key Executes the assigned functions see section 5 8 Setup Operation While Data Acquisition Is in Progress The following settings can be entered while data acquisition is in progress Fora description of the settings required to use this function see section 4 14 Operations That Can Be Carried Out by an Administrator e Set the calibration correction CC1 option see section 5 21 e Register administrators and users see section 4 4 e Change the time see section 5 15 Operations That Can Be Carried Out by a User e Set the calibration correction CC1 option see section 5 21 Note If an auto save
26. Nov 19 2801 07 08 46 152 This action is not possi Nov 19 2681 07 08 46 152 This action is not possi Nov 19 2081 7 67 58 612 Please acknowledge all a Nov 19 2081 07 07 46 612 Please acknowledge all a Error message Error code see chapter 9 Date and time of occurrence 8 14 IM 04L05A01 01E 8 9 Displaying the Log Screen System Screen FTP Log The number of the log displayed on the last line Total number of logs 002 002 Time No Code Flag File Name Jan 31 2061 86 58 88 282 HOSTNAHE S 13166588 DHR Jan 31 2001 06 58 08 282 HOSTNAME P 13106590 DHR l File name FTP server P primary S secondary Error code see chapter 9 Date and time when the file transfer was made Communication Command Log The number of the log displayed on the last line Total number of logs 000 000 Tine ID 1 0 Nessage Link I Ethernet interface Jan 31 2001 87 23 33 1 Logout Green Electrically connected Jan 31 2001 07 23 23 1 cca Gray Not connected Message I O symbol gt input lt output A number used to identify the user that is connected Date and time when the access occurred E mail Log The number of the log displayed on the last line Total number of logs T T 004 004 Time Type No Recipient Error Jan 31 06 16 49 Alarm 264 1 Some recipients a Jan 31 06 16 19 Alarm 1 HS Jan 31 06 16 17 Fail 1 2 H_S uu Jan 31 06 15 53 Alarm 1 hs Recipient ad
27. apo Burseourbuy y ul uoneIn yuo a 5 23 Saving loading the Setup Data Loading Setup Data Procedure Loads only the data that was set in the engineering mode from the setup file file with PPL extension on the external storage medium to the DX100P Parameters of the loaded data that contradict with the system mode information on the DX100P are not retrieved When executed the loaded data are activated and the system returns to the operation mode Press Press the soft key Next Press soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen Press soft key to display the Load settings screen Load settings 0 Directory File name Time 2001711711 26 36 PPL 2001 11 11 20 59 PPL 2001 11 11 21 07 1 Using the up and down arrow keys select the directory root directory or SETO directory containing the setup file shown in the Directory name box A list of files in the selected directory is displayed in the right column 2 Press the right arrow key to move the cursor on to the file list Press the up or down arrow key to select the setup file to be loaded Press the ESC key to cancel the operation and return to the Save Load menu 3 Press the Details soft key to view the information about the file For details see section 4 11 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to return to the operation mode The loaded setup data is activated At this point if the loaded setup data is not identical to
28. oc ls DE DER GATE KLUHNOPQRSI T UV KY 28H ela _ 0 gt 0 1 2 3 456789 Sp A Over 4 Enter the default password for the DX100P and press the DISP ENTER key A window appears for you to enter a new password r BEETLE KLHNOPORST Uv yzat a 17 L 3 6 1 2 3 4516 78 32 Sp Over User Default Password Administrator 1 Admin1 Administrator 2 Admin2 Administrator 3 Admin3 User 1 User01 User 2 User02 User 90 User90 IM 04L05A01 01E 6 1 uoneiodo siseg l 6 1 Login Logout 5 Enter the new password in the same fashion as step 2 and press the DISP ENTER key A window appears for you to confirm the password Your password has expired Key in your new password Password ABCDEFG HIJ KLNUNOPQRST UVWXY2R o HAL grola 4 5 6 7 8 9 Sp A Over Note The combinations of user IDs and passwords that are identical to those specified by other users or those that have been registered in the past cannot be specified Set the password using 6 to 8 characters Spaces cannot be used for the password 6 Enter the password that you entered in step 5 in the same fashion as step 2 and press the DISP ENTER key The window disappears and you are logged in Key in your new password again Password a ABCDEFGHIJ KLHYNOPQRST UVWKY2R a _ 0300123 4 5 6 8 8 Sp A Over Logging in after the First Time 1 Press the FUNC key A wi
29. 2 4 Input Signal Wiring A CAUTION e If a strong tension is applied to the cable wired to the DX100P the terminals of the DX100P and or the cable can be damaged In order to prevent tension from being applied directly on the terminals fasten all wiring cables to the rear of the mounting panel To prevent fire use signal wires having a temperature rating of 70 C or more Precautions to Be Taken While Wiring Take the following precautions when wring the input signal cables It is recommended that crimp on lugs designed for 4 mm screws with insulation sleeves be used on the lead wire ends However this does not apply to the optional clamped terminals optional code H2 Crimp on lug a a i L For clamped input terminals H2 the following wires are recommended Cross sectional area of the conductor or conductors Single conductor 0 14 mm to 1 5 mm Stranded conductors 0 14 mm to 1 0 mm Stripped cable length approximately 5 mm Take measures to prevent noise from entering the measurement circuit e Move the measurement circuit away from the power cable power circuit and ground cable e Itis desirable that the item being measured does not generate noise However if this is unavoidable isolate the measurement circuit from the item Also ground the item being measured e Shielded wires should be used to minimize noise caused by electrostatic induction Connect the shield to the ground termina
30. Graph Division 10 2 Bar graph Normal 3 Scale position 1 4 1 First CH Last CH Select the desired channels For the channels set here other parameters shown in the above figure are also simultaneously set Setting the Number of Divisions for the Scale 2 Division Select the number of scale divisions from 4 to 12 and C10 The scale is equally divided and scale marks are displayed at the divided position C10 The scale is equally divided into 10 divisions by main scale marks and scale values are indicated at 0 30 50 70 and 100 positions On the bar graph screen Only the main scale marks are displayed On the trend screen See Explanation IM 04L05A01 01E 5 19 apo Bun u Huq y ul uoeIn yuo a 5 12 Setting the Scale Division Bar Graph Base Position Bar Graph and Scale Position Trend Setting the Bar Graph s Base Position 3 Bar graph base position of the bar graph Select the base position of the bar graph from normal and center see Explanation Note When the bar graph is displayed vertically see section 5 13 the base position is fixed to Normal the bottom of the bar graph is the base position Setting the Scale Position on the Trend Screen 4 Scale position Select the scale display position when the scale is displayed on the trend screen see section 7 2 from 1 to 6 Select Off for channels without scale Note The scale for the channels th
31. Nov Nov Nov 19 18 57 37 19 10 54 48 19 10 54 41 19 10 51 48 19 10 51 41 19 10 51 05 19 10 51 65 19 10 58 38 19 10 50 18 19 18 49 44 19 10 49 25 19 10 48 09 Snapshot Alarmack Hanual Manual Hessage HathStart HemStart Login Error111 Logout SysSet HathStop ABC2B01 3 ABC2001 tRI3 Operation type ABC2001 R see the description below ABC2001 ABC2001 ABC20A1 ABC20A1 ABC2001 ABC281 ABC281 ABC2081 Name of the user who performed the operation Operation information Date and time when operation was performed R via the remote control function R1 option M On the setting function of the setting measurement server via the Ethernet m On the monitor function of the setting measurement server via the Ethernet T On the setting function of the Maintenance test server via the Ethernet t On the monitor function of the Maintenance test server via the Ethernet F On the FTP server via the Ethernet S via the serial communications C2 C3 options P User locked on the DAQSIGNIN Y Auto operation by the DX100P3 1 See IMO4L05A01 17E 2 See IM04L05A01 61E 3 Such as the periodic time adjustment using the SNTP function Clearing the Operation Log The operation log in the internal memory is cleared when initialization clear 1 is executed in the system mode The operation log in the display data event data file cannot be cleared IM 04L05A01 01E 1 35
32. OQQING OUb i sieteccectcutsccenecessicdarseesesesecvestesdervestteerersetiediseeeess 6 3 logical COMPUTATION o oo eee eee eee e eee eeeeeteeeeneeeeaeenaes 1 43 login ii login FUNCTION ooo eee eee cee cee eee eeeee ects teas seaeeseaeeteeseneenaaes 1 32 login information 0 0 ee cece eee eens eeeeeceee teat eeeeeeeeteneeeaes 1 33 login method logini MOE eccvscuccencescavseneevncaseapesncetcevectoenteneasessecveevereceees NOG OU isiin a a a an a lot number lower limit alarm we 1 39 lower limit on rate of change alarm eee eee eens 1 40 Index 2 IM 04L05A01 01E Index M MAC address vee 1 57 maintenance wee 10 1 manual Sampled data ccc eee eeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeaeenees 1 20 manual sampled data file Data format eee App 10 Manual sampling 00 eee eects eee manual sampling remote control Measurable range eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneees measurable range difference computation ce 5 4 measurement Channels 0 cceeeeee cesses eeeeeeeseeseeeeeees 1 2 media FIFO ore memory end OUTPUT oo eee eeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesneseeeseneseaes 1 51 memory information oo ee cece cee eee e eee eeeeeteaeeesaeeeaeeneaes 7 14 memory start 2 wees cocteve eset veeb elena tevieelcee tend as 1 31 Memory start stop OUTPUT ou eee cere cere eeteeeeeeeneeee 1 51 memory stop memory SUMMALY 0 eee cena ence eeeeeeeeenae
33. P1process and window used to enter the group name press the DISP ENTER key The group name box turns yellow and the cursor a moves to the message 1 box For the Group number 2 procedures related to entering character strings see section 3 6 Group name Piprocess 2 3 oo 5 6 7 8 Input Clear Copy IM 04L05A01 01E 3 13 3 5 Setting the Functions System Mode and Engineering Mode Confirming the Settings 6 Press the DISP ENTER key The parameters in the group name box are confirmed and turn white The cursor returns to the first item group number box of the screen Canceling the Settings 6 Press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes or No using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key A Yes No Yes Cancels the settings and returns to the engineering mode menu screen No Does not cancel the settings and returns to the screen that was shown before the ESC key was pressed Finishing the Settings 7 Press the MENU key or the ESC key to return to the engineering mode menu screen e Returning to the Operation Mode 8 Press the soft key corresponding to End A window appears for you to select whether to save the settings Select Yes No or Cancel using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Yes No Cancel Yes Saves the settings and returns to the operation mode The settings of the engineering mode are activated When settings are
34. Rated power supply frequency 50 60 Hz for AC Allowable power supply frequency range 50 60 Hz 2 for AC Rated power consumption 30 VA for DC 45 VA for AC Power consumption Supply voltage Backlight saving mode Normal Max 24 VDC 17 VA 19 VA 30 VA 24 VAC 50 60Hz 28 VA 32 VA 45 VA Effects on measured value With variation within 21 6 to 26 4 V 50 60 Hz 1 digit or less With variation of 2 Hz from rated power supply frequency at 24 VAC 0 1 of rdg 1 digit or less Calibration Correction CC1 Corrects the measured value of each channel using ten segment linearizer approximation Can be set on each measurement channel Number of segment points 2 to 16 IM 04L05A01 01E 11 13 suonesoads E 11 7 Specifications of Optional Functions Remote Control R1 This option allows the following functions to be controlled remotely by a contact or an open collector input up to eight inputs Alarm acknowledgment trigger 250 ms or longer e Memory Start Memory Stop rising and falling edge Time adjustment adjusting the internal clock to the nearest hour upon remote signal trigger 250 ms or longer The table below shows the operation when data acquisition is stopped The time is gradually corrected while data acquisition is in progress Time of signal input Processing Cut off reading of less than one minute hh 00 00 to hh 01 59 e g 10 00 50 is corrected as 10 00 00 Round
35. SUOI OUNY JO M Q E 1 5 Function for Managing Measured Computed Data Setting Change Log and Setup File When settings are changed the setup file after the change is saved to the external storage medium At the same time the log of the setting change is recorded to the internal memory and saved to the external storage medium There is a one to one relationship between the saved setup file and the setting change log They contain the same numbers that are assigned in the order of occurrence Setting change log Setup files 2001 10 31 2001 10 30 2001 10 29 2001 10 27 10 15 04 saseenaene 14 28 24 saseeenaen 16 46 58 nusanusa 09 06 36 susssisaan e Operations That are Saved Setting change of engineering mode items see chapter 5 Setting change of system mode items see chapter 4 File operation items load save settings and load save login information are excluded e Setup file e Saving the Setup File The setup file PPL extension is saved to the SETO directory of the external storage medium For details on the file name see appendix 3 e Displaying the Setup File DAQSIGNIN provided with the package can be used to view the information e Setting Change Log e Saving the Setting Change Log Up to 200 setting change logs are recorded to the internal memory When the number of logs exceed 200 the log is overwritten from the oldest log The setting change log file DPL ex
36. The information of the data being displayed on the historical trend can be displayed e You can display all the data points of the file displayed on the historical trend display in a section of the screen all data display and specify the range of data to be displayed on the historical trend using a frame Date and time at the upper end of the frame indicating the display range All data display Frame indicating the display range Cursor IM 04L05A01 01E 1 3 Display Function Sign Record Screen Loads the display event data file saved on the external storage medium and displays the waveform Viewing Method e If Batch Stop sign record is specified the sign record screen appears when Memory Stop is executed see section 6 2 The sign record screen appears through the data load operation using the FUNC key see section 8 7 SUOI OUNY JO M Q a Information Displayed on the Sign Record Screen See the explanation in the Historical Trend section Cursor Siz 43 Maximum minimum values m3h over the entire display range Top row Maximum value Bottom row Minimum value Measured computed values at the cursor position Top row Maximum value Bottom row Minimum value Operation on the Sign Record Screen The following operations can be carried out For the operating procedure see section 6 3 Sign add approval information to the display data files or the event data files on the ex
37. e Pass or fail e Comment e Name of the user who added the information and the date and time when the information was added Files That Can Be Signed and Signing Procedure The signing procedure varies depending on the type of process Batch or Continuous that was used when the data was acquired For Batch process When the batch data is saved in units of 1 data file batch e Can be signed using the DX100P e Can be signed using DAQSIGNIN Data file When a single batch data is made up of multiple files e Cannot be signed using the DX100P e Can be signed collectively using DAQSIGNIN 2 e Files can be combined to a single file using DAQSIGNIN Data file 1 Because signing at the file level is prohibited for batch data 2 Because the data of all files can be viewed and confirmed at once using DAQSIGNIN For Continuous process e Can be signed at the file level using the DX100P e Can be signed at the file level using DAQSIGNIN Data file Signing Using the DX100P Signing record screen is used For details on the displayed information see Sign Record Screen in section 1 3 For details on the operating procedure see section 6 3 You can set the signing record screen to automatically appear when memory stop is executed see section 4 4 You can load display data event data files saved on the external storage medium using key op
38. g ndino anjer wiejy edA wey wey LG oJe ayeos ueds adA yndu ebuey L uonoes jey wa ant YOS apo u u uz y ul sw y Hulyes ANIM SIHL SNOW LNO Flow of operation an example Operations on the DX100P Record of operations Operation log section 1 5 Record of setting changes Setting change log O Login 6 1 and setup file section 1 5 e Press the FUNC key e Enter the user name user ID and the password e If you try to login using Be sure to set a strage medium to the drive incorrect passwords for three consecutive times the user registration becomes invalid Operation preparation such as changing settings Press the MENU key to enter Display data or event data file section 1 4 Batch lot number Measured computed data Name of the user who i executed Memory Start i the engineering mode 3 Execute Memory Start by entering the batch lot No 6 2 e Press the START key e Enter the batch lot No and comments e Set the cursor to Start and press the DISP ENTER key Memory Stop Setup data used Login information Operation log Alarm summary Settings cannot be changed while running Memory Stop 6 2 Sign the data 6 3 e Check the data e Sign to the data using the assigned authority level Alarm ACK summary Message summary Approval information User name Pass fail Comment e If you try to sign using incorrec
39. i standard operation Conditions s 11 16 speed of movement of waveforms s es 1 7 5 10 SQUAFE FOOT nisserne square root computation SLACKS resies ia START Key ce eecceseeeececeeeeceeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeaecaeesaeeeeeeaesaeeneeeaeeeees start stop computation remote control cece 1 53 starting stopping computation 8 6 statistical computation 1 43 status report wee 1 49 status display Section eee cece eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneees 1 6 1 18 StatUS MOSSAQGOS neiaa ws cateucseuteadthasestanees 9 11 STOP key 44 2 4 storage function scale woe re storage medium drive i 2 4 Scan interval o i 2 can eee cae ed style MUMDED ee eeeeeeeceseeeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeecaeeeseeeesseneeesseaees i scroll time style number Syiar aeai App 20 sum scale FA sum scale report ep SYSLOM CLAYS wesceuvervesrcesserscnenainsereetecensrineecteceurecescasy sum scale TLOG pi iinvite 1 46 itz e a T E Oe P E aay E E ae switching the screen u ssessssssssrrsersrrrsensrnrernrrnneenrrnseesrrnsens 7 2 tag channel display sseeseeeesenesieenesresrrerrerrnerrerrnreens system errors oo temperature unit sssssssreesesreeeesrrusrnsrrusrnsrrnennrnnseenrenses system mode time deviation limit P system relay MEZONO ioeie inivesi eisite aE EEEE KEE e SYSTEM SCIEN aigesan ean aie aE TUM sa deena EE A E OTN timer number trip line E
40. the DXP to be controlled Handle the remote control terminal properly so that keys are not pressed inadvertently When you are near the DXP press the keys on the remote control terminal only when controlling the DXP Otherwise you may unintentionally control the DXP if you are going to press the keys on the remote control terminal but do not wish to control the DXP take measures so that the signal does not reach the DXP such as by covering the infrared signal output section of the remote control terminal The distance at which the DXP can be controlled using the remote control unit varies depending on the operating environment such as the battery voltage and the presence or absence of external light e There is a possibility that DXPs with the same remote controller ID be controlled simultaneously It is recommended that different remote controller IDs be set on each instrument Operation on the DX100P Setting the remote controller ID Set the remote controller ID of the DX100P You can set a value between 0 and 31 or Off for the remote controller ID For the setting procedure see section 4 9 Checking the remote controller ID You can check the remote controller ID on the system screen For the procedure for displaying the system screen see section 8 9 3 24 IM 04L05A01 01E 3 7 Using the Remote Controll Terminal Operation Using the Remote Control Terminal Names of parts Battery cover LA Ray X
41. 6 Sign the data gt Pass fail ie r Comment lectronic signature function T Logout Explanation of Terminology Login logout Login refers to the steps taken by the user who is registered in the DX100P to enable operations on the DX100P by entering the user name user ID and password Logout refers to the steps taken to terminate the login condition Memory Start Memory Stop Operation for starting or stopping the recording of the display data or event data When Memory Start is executed the display data or event data is acquired to the internal memory at a specified interval and automatically saved to the external storage medium Electronic Signature Function and Sign The electronic signature function is used to add approval information pass or fail to data files by checking the saved data Sign refers to the action of adding such information This corresponds to electronic signature Audit Trail Function This function saves information used to check the past run progress Log This log contains records such as operations in order of occurrence in a predetermined format Note The measured computed data of the DX100P is saved to the external storage medium Make sure to back up the data IM 04L05A01 01E 1 31 SUOI OUNY JO M Q a 1 5 Function for Managing Measured Computed Data Login Function The DX100P can be used only by the users that have been registered beforehand You are required to enter ID infor
42. A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Explanation Text message on cal correct Cal Correct Setting is the message that appears when the calibration correction setting is changed while data acquisition is in progress The message is displayed in purple on the trend display and recorded in the message summary 4 30 IM 04L05A01 01E 4 15 Setting the Time Deviation Limit for Time Correction Procedure Set the maximum value of time deviation between the time on the DX100P and the new time when changing the time while data acquisition is in progress For a description of this function see section 1 10 Enter the system mode Twice press the soft key Next Press the 11 Date amp Time Time Zone soft key The setup screen is displayed Date amp Time Time deviation limit 18s 1 Time zone Difference from GMT 6 1 Time deviation limit Select Off 10s 20s 30s 1min 2min 3min 4min or 5min When the time deviation between the time on the DX100P and the specified time is within the value specified here the time on the DX100P is gradually corrected Otherwise the time is not corrected Off The time cannot be changed while data acquisition is in progress Example If Time deviation limit is set to 10s and the time on the DX100P is 10 hours 21 minutes 15 seconds the time on the DX100P is corrected if the
43. For the procedures related to entering numerical values see 3 6 Entering Numbers and Characters 8 Reset For the computation channel that TLOG computation is set select whether or not to reset the computed data at every interval On Reset the computed data at every interval Off Do not reset the computed data 9 Action DataSave The measured computed data instantaneous values of all measurement computation channels is acquired to the internal memory and saved to the external storage medium at specified intervals TLOG data saving Off TLOG data is not saved Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 4 20 IM 04L05A01 01E 4 8 Setting System Relays F1 Option Procedure Enter the system mode Press the soft key Net To display the menu screen press the soft key To display the setting screen press the soft key 4 System relay 1 1 2 Fail 2 1 1 Relay 1 Select the relay using the up and down arrow keys and select the output you wish to assign to relay 1 FAIL CPU failure Memory end Memory end Batch Memory start stop User locked Occurrence of a user locked condition Login user Presence of login users For details on the behavior see section 1 8 2 2 Relay
44. OOOO OOOO OOOO 0 0 ooo The decimal position is determined by the scale lower limit setting 5 2 IM 04L05A01 01E 5 1 Setting Measuring Range Note Scale lower limit and scale upper limit cannot be set to the same value e The DX100P converts the measured data within a value span derived by removing the decimal from the scaling upper and lower limits In other words conversion is performed by using a span of 10 if the scale setting is 5 to 5 and 100 if the scale setting is 5 0 to 5 0 The resolution of the value derived by using a span of 10 is coarser than the value derived using a span of 100 Because the display becomes rough set this value so that it is greater than 100 8 Unit Set the unit when Scale or Sqrt is selected for Mode Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a character string Enter the unit up to 6 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see section 3 6 Entering Numbers and Characters Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Explanation Measurable Range The following table shows the range and measurable range for each input type Mode Range M
45. Saved to the extemal storage medium Example 3 Auto save interval or data length 12 hours Date and time when data is saved to the external storage medium 0 hour every day After starting at 13 10 on July 19th data is saved at 0 hour on July 20th and then every 12 hours after and at 0 hour every day 0 hour occurs at the same time as the 12 hour timing 7 19 13 10 7 20 0 00 12 00 7 21 0 00 12 00 7 22 0 00 12 00 gt I I I I I I I Memory start Saved d the on storage S l Example 4 Auto save interval or data length 2 day Date and time when data is saved to the external storage medium 0 hour every day After starting at 13 10 on July 19th data is saved at 0 hour on July 20th and then every 2 days after and at 0 hour every day the 2 day timing occurs at the same time as 0 hour 7 19 13 10 7 20 0 00 7 21 0 00 7 22 0 00 gt I I I I Memory start Saved to the external storage medium 1 24 IM 04L05A01 01E 1 4 Measured Computed Data Save Function If the process type is set to Batch and the acquisition to the memory is stopped before eZ the specified interval elapses 1 data file batch is achieved fe lt If the acquisition to the memory is stopped Data is saved at every prescribed interval T 2 before the first auto save interval or data and when the acquisition to the memory is length 1 data file batch results stopped boo eg 7 Memory start Memory stop T 2T
46. Select the desired channels Burnout Select Off Up or Down Off Disable the burnout detection function Up When the thermocouple burns out the measured result is set to positive over range xxx xx Down When the thermocouple burns out the measured result is set to negative over range xxxxx IM 04L05A01 01E 4 3 apo washs oy u UONesNBYyUOD 4 2 Setting the A D Integration Time Scan Interval Burnout Reference Junction and Temperature Unit 5 RJC Select the reference junction compensation method from External and Internal External Use the external RUC Internal Use the RJC of the DX100P 6 Volt uV If External is selected set the reference junction compensation voltage to add to the input Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter the voltage Enter a value 20000 uV to 20000 uV initial value is O uV and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see section 3 6 Entering Numbers and Characters Setting the Temperature Unit 7 Temperature Unit Select C or F C Use Celsius F Use Fahrenheit Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 4 4 IM 04L05A01 01E 4 3 Setti
47. The maximum sampling interval is 1 hour the maximum number of samples is 64 The initial setting is Off do not perform moving average For the setting procedure see section 5 20 Note e While the number of samples acquired is less than the specified number of samples the average of acquired data is computed The computation error data are not included in the rolling average computation If the computed data exceeds the upper or lower limit the data is clipped at the upper or lower limit and the moving average is computed The upper and lower limit is 100000000 excluding the decimal point The decimal point position is the same as that of the specified value for the span lower limit Alarm You can set up to 4 alarms on each computation channel The alarm types are upper limit alarm H lower limit alarm L delay upper limit alarm T and delay lower limit alarm t The hysteresis is fixed to 0 For the setting procedure see section 5 18 Acquiring and Saving the Computed Data Similar to measured data computed data can be acquired to the internal memory as display data or event data and saved to the external storage medium see section 1 4 TLOG Data The instantaneous values of all channels excluding measurement channels set to Skip and computation channels set to Off can be saved at intervals specified by a timer For a description on the saving of the TLOG data see section 1 4 For a description on the timer operatio
48. Winter Off 1 Header Set a header comment for data files Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a string Enter the header up to 32 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see section 3 6 Entering Numbers and Characters 2 Directory name Set the name up to 8 alphanumeric characters of the directory to which the files are to be saved using the same method as step 1 Note The following characters or strings cannot be used as file names AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK character strings that include a space or spaces Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 5 12 IM 04L05A01 01E 5 8 Assigning an Action to the USER Key An action can be assigned to the USER key Smo USER key Note If logged in as a user that is not permitted to execute the assigned operation See section 1 5 the operation cannot be executed using the USER key Even if the operation is registered to the USER key it is invalid Procedure Press To display the setting screen press the soft key 4 User key Action Sn z pshot 1 y 1 Action Select the action see Explanation to be a
49. amp Service Center IM 04L05A01 01E 9 15 Bunooyseqnol Chapter 10 Maintenance 10 1 Periodic Maintenance Check the operation periodically to keep the DX100P in good working order Perform the following checks and replace worn parts as needed e ls the display and storage functioning properly In the event of problems see section 10 2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart e Has the brightness of the LCD backlight deteriorated If replacement is necessary see section 10 4 Recommended Replacement Periods for Worn Parts IM 04L05A01 01E 10 1 aoueudjUleW z 10 2 Replacing the Fuse A Replace the fuse every two years for preventive maintenance For fuse rating see section 10 4 Recommended Replacement Periods for Worn Parts For safety reasons make sure to turn OFF the power switch and disconnect the DX100P from the main power supply before replacing the fuse To prevent the possibility of fire use only the specified fuse purchased from YOKOGAWA Never short circuit the fuse holder to bypass the use of a fuse To avoid the possibility of electric shock open the front panel only when replacing the fuse Do not touch the rear side of the front panel when replacing the fuse because it can become hot Make sure not to damage the cable while replacing the fuse Follow the procedures below to replace the fuse 1 PLN Turn OFF the power switch Disconnect the DX100P from t
50. e Decade resistance box Yokogawa M amp C Model 2793 01 or equivalent Main specifications Accuracy of output in the range 0 1 to 500 Q 0 01 2 mQ Resolution 0 001 Q To purchase these instruments contact the supplier of the DX100P Calibration procedure 1 Connect the DX100P and the calibration instruments as shown in the following figure and allow the instruments to warm up adequately The warm up time for the DX100P is at least 30 minutes 2 Check that the ambient temperature and humidity are within the normal operating conditions See chapter 11 3 Apply input signals corresponding to 0 50 and 100 of the specified input range and calculate the errors from the readings If the error is not within the accuracy specifications contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Note For TC input the temperature of the input terminals must be measured and a voltage corresponding to the temperature at the reference junction must be added DC Voltage Measurement Example for the DX112P Input terminals DC voltage standard IM 04L05A01 01E 10 3 Jueu zule N z 10 3 Calibration Temperature Measurement Using the RTD Example for the DX112P
51. if the sum unit is set to min then 2 s 60 s is multiplied every scan interval before the value is added giving a result that has a m min unit The following equations are applied The scan interval unit is in seconds Off measured value s measured value x scan interval min gt measured value x scan interval 60 h measured value x scan interval 3600 day gt measured value x scan interval 86400 If Power is Lost While the Report Function is in Progress If a power disruption occurred while the report function was in progress the report function will resume after the power is restored The exact operation will vary depending on whether the power is restored before or after the scheduled time to create a report Time of Recovery Report Operation After the time to create the Report data are created immediately after power is restored The report measured computed data up to the time of the power disruption are used For the next scheduled report data after the power recovery are used Before the time to create After power is restored report data are created at the time of the the report next normally scheduled report All measured computed data excluding the power disruption period are used How the Measured Computed Data Are Handled When There is an Abnormality in the Data Type of Abnormal Data Report Data Average value Maximum Minimum value Sum value Positive over not used used not used Negative
52. items are present and undamaged Number Part Name Part Number Model Q ty Notes 1 Fuse A1347EF 1 250 V 1 A time lag except P1 model A1352EF 1 250 V 4 A time lag P1 model Terminal screw 5 M4 for supplementary use 3 Mounting bracket B9900BX 2 For panel mounting except H5 models 4 User s Manual IM 04L05A01 01E 1 This manual User s Manual IM 04L05A01 17E 1 DX100P DX200P Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L05A01 61E 1 DAQSIGNIN User s Manual IM 04L05A01 02E DX100P DX200P Operation Guide 5 Application DXA150 02 1 Included only when the suffix code software for language is 2 DAQSIGNIN For Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP Provided on a CD 6 External storage A1053MP 1 Zip disk 100 MB included only medium when the suffix code for external storage medium is 2 A1056MP 1 Zip disk 250 MB included only when the suffix code for external storage medium is 5 B9968NL 1 Flash memory card 832 MB CF card adapter capacity and model of the CF card may vary Provided only when the suffix code for the external storage medium is 3 IM 04L05A01 01E v Checking the Contents of the Package Number Part Name Part Number Model Q ty Notes 7 Power cord A1006WD 1 Provided only when H5D is specified for the optional code Maximum rated power voltage 125 V A1009WD 1 Provided only when H5F is
53. or gt using NOT XOR OR TLOG 4 the arrow keys and press the Axe HINC SUNE P P E i DISP ENTER key Space To confirm the equation entered select ENT using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key L Displays the selection by the M1 M2 soft key Displays the selection by the Ins soft key Ins soft key Switch between insert and overwrite Over Overwrites the cursor position Ins Inserts at the cursor position Bs soft key Delete the character before the cursor position Del soft key Delete the character at the cursor position M1 M2 soft key Each time the M1 M2 soft key is pressed the function of the window switches between number input and computing element M1 Number is selected M2 Computing element is selected Note When using TLOG computation timers must be set in the system mode and the number of the timer and the sum unit only for TLOG SUM must be set in the engineering mode 4 Span_Lower Span_Upper Set the upper and lower limits of the display span Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range given below and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see section 3 6 Entering Numbers and Characters Allowed range 9999999 to 99999999 The decimal can be set in the following positions OOOO OOOO O00 Ooo Oooo
54. suoljesodg uowwoy eo 3 5 Setting the Functions System Mode and Engineering Mode Key Operations in the System Mode Below is a description of the operating procedure when displaying tag names in place of channel numbers Procedure Entering the System Mode 1 Carry out the procedure described in Proceeding to the System Mode on the previous page to enter the system mode The menu screen appears Note System mode can be entered only when logged in as an administrator Ifyou change the data save format in the system mode Application Memory and Memory and Trend items of the 2 setup screen save the settings and return to the operation mode the measured computed data in the internal memory is cleared Save important data to the external storage medium before entering the system mode Setting the Use of Tag Names thernet System Mode Cink System Node System Mode at Alarm 5 AUX Hedia FIFO A A D Temperature ime Save Load Initialize gt rs Application Memory fia Option Admin tool ae Communication 1 2 3 4 Next 2 4 2 Press the Next soft key to show the next 3 Press the 5 AUX Media FIFO soft y x page key thernet thernet System Mode Cink System Mode Cink AUX AUX Tag Channel Tag Channel Tas Memory alarm lh Memory alarm Language English Language English Partial Not Partial Not Remote Controller ID Off Remote Controller ID Off Hedia FIFO Hedia FIFO On Off Off
55. suoneisdo Asay 19410 cy 8 5 Saving the Screen Image Snap Shot Procedure Explanation The screen image that is displayed is saved to the external storage medium The data size of the screen image is approximately 12 KB screen FUNC Key Operation This operation is carried out in the operation mode The images of soft keys or messages are not saved 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 2 Press the Snapshot soft key The screen image is saved to the external storage medium However the images assigned to soft keys or the message windows are not saved shot C USER Key Operation This applies only when Snapshot is assigned to the USER key This key operates in all run modes operation engineering and system modes Press the USER key The exact screen image that is displayed when the USER key is pressed is saved to the external storage medium However error messages are not saved File Format Screen image data is in PNG format File Name For details see appendix 3 8 8 IM 04L05A01 01E 8 6 Saving the Display Data Event Data to the External Storage Medium Using Key Operation Procedure This operation saves the display data event data to the external storage medium at an arbitrary time after Memory Start For a description on the behavior when this operation is executed see section 1 4 If the type of process is Batch see section 1 4 this operation is not possible S
56. 15 of rdg 0 7 C at 200 to 100 C c s z A c m x Y a oO 0 15 of rdg 0 3 C 11 16 IM 04L05A01 01E 11 8 General Specifications Power Supply Measuring accuracy in case of scaling digits Accuracy during scaling digits measuring accuracy digits x multiplier 2 digits rounded up where the multiplier scaling span digits measuring span digits Example Assuming that range 6V measuring span 1 000 to 5 000 V e scaling span 0 000 to 2 000 Then Measuring accuracy 0 1 x5V 2 digits 0 005 V 5 digits 2 7 digits Multiplier 2 0 5 Accuracy during scaling 7 digits x 0 5 2 6 digits rounded up Reference junction compensation Internal External selectable for each channel Reference junction compensation accuracy above 0 C Types R S B W 1 C Types K J E T N L U 0 5 C Maximum allowable input voltage 000 digits 0 000 to 2 000 4000 digits 1 000 to 5 000 V 10 V DC continuous for ranges of 2 V or less and TC ranges 60 V DC continuous for 6 V DC 20 V DC and 50 V DC ranges Input resistance Approximately 10 MQ or more for ranges of 2 V DC or less and TC Approximately 1 MQ for 6 V DC 20 V DC and 50 V DC ranges Input source resistance Volt TC 2 KQ or less RTD 10 Q or less per wire The resistance of all three wires must be equal Input bias current 10 nA o
57. 5 0 1 7 or equivalent Bezel Charcoal grey light Munsell 10B 3 6 0 3 or equivalent Front Panel Water and dust proof based on IEC529 IP65 and NEMA No 250 TYPE4 except External Icing Test Dimensions 144 W x 144 H x 241 4 D mm Weight DX102P approx 2 9 kg DX104P approx 3 0 kg DX106P approx 3 0 kg DX112P approx 3 0 kg Standard Performance Measuring accuracy The following specifications apply to operation of the DX100P under standard operation conditions Temperature 23 2 C Humidity 55 10 RH Power supply voltage 90 to 132 or 180 to 250 VAC Power supply frequency 50 60 Hz 1 Warm up time At least 30 minutes Other ambient conditions such as vibration should not adversely affect the operation of the DX100P Measuring accuracy digital display Max resolution of digital display 0 1 of rdg 2 digits DC voltage 0 1 of rdg 3 digits 0 15 of rdg 1 C However R S 3 7 C at 0 to 100 C 1 5 C at 100 to 300 C Te B 2 C at 400 to 600 C Excluding the Accuracy at less than 400 C is not guaranteed reference junction compensation accuracy 0 15 of rdg 0 7 C However 0 15 of rdg 1 C at 200 to 100 C 0 15 of rdg 0 5 C 0 15 of rdg 0 5 C However 0 15 of rdg 0 7 C at 200 to 100 C 0 15 of rdg 0 7 C 0 15 of rdg 1 C 0 15 of rdg 0 5 C However 0
58. Computation start stop computation reset computation dropout ACK operations for models with the computation option M1 FUNC key USER key Display data save FUNC key event data save FUNC key manual sample operation FUNC key USER key e Display data load event data load FUNC key e E mail start stop e mail test FUNC key Other operations assign names to the four screens display logs display a list of files in the external storage medium change the password perform an FTP test and display the Modbus Status screen FUNC key Calibration correction setting Login method You can select from login only using keys login only via communications or login using keys and via communications ID information User name up to 20 alphanumeric characters User ID you can specify whether to use the user ID Up to 8 alphanumeric characters Password You can set the password expiration 6 to 8 alphanumeric characters 1 Even if the operation of the USER key is enabled if the action assigned to the USER key is disabled the action is not executed when you press the USER key 2 If the DISP ENTER key operation is disabled you cannot perform an alarm ACK operation on the overview display nor assign a name to the 4 screen display Even if the DISP ENTER key operation is disabled you can use the DISP ENTER key on the sign record screen and in the engineering mode 3 Operation is not allowed
59. DX100P The DX100P is connected to the correct power supply see section 2 9 The proper fuse is set See section 10 4 CAUTION If the input wires are connected in parallel with another instrument avoid turning ON OFF the DX100P or the other instrument when either one is in operation This may affect the reading 2 Open the front cover Turn ON the power switch 4 Close the cover After performing a self diagnosis for a few seconds a screen in the operation mode appears w Note e If nothing is displayed when the power switch is turned ON turn OFF the power switch and check the points listed in step 1 After checking the points turn ON the power switch again If the unit still does not work it is probably malfunctioning Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs e If an error message is displayed on the screen take measures according to the description in chapter 9 Troubleshooting Turn ON the power let the DX100P warm up for at least 30 minutes and then start the measurements Turning OFF the Power Switch 1 Open the front cover and remove the external storage medium see section 3 2 2 Turn OFF the power switch 3 Close the front cover IM 04L05A01 01E 3 1 suoljesodoQ uowwoy eo 3 2 Inserting Removing the External Storage Medium Procedure This section describes the procedures to insert and remove the external storage medium Two types of media can be used dep
60. End output option is as follows Terminal Position A Option terminal Terminal Arrangement Only the position of the FAIL Memory End output terminals is indicated When the relay is not energized NC is closed and NO is open C is the common terminal FAIL Memory End System relay 2 System relay 1 Initial settings J Fail Memory End Memory Start Stop User Locked or Presence of Login Users can be assigned see section 4 8 3 Attach the option terminal cover and secure it with screws Note For details on the relay operation see section 1 8 Contact Specifications The contact specification is the same as that for the alarm output See section 2 5 IM 04L05A01 01E 2 7 Remote Control Wiring R1 Option A WARNING To prevent electric shock ensure the main power supply is turned OFF AN CAUTION To prevent fire use signal wires having a temperature rating of 70 C or more Wiring Procedure 1 Turn OFF the power switch of the DX100P and remove the cover for the option terminal 2 Connect the remote control signal cables to the terminal The terminal arrangement for the remote control option is as follows Terminal Position E Option terminal Terminal Arrangement Only the position of the remote control terminals is indicated C is a common t
61. Enter the system mode To display the setting screen press the soft key oa Alarm Reflash 1 Relay AND None 2 Action Energize 3 Behavior Nonhold 4 Indicator Nonhold W 5 Rate of change Increase 1 7 6 Decrease 1 Hysteresis On Setting Reflash 1 Reflash On Use reflash function Off Not use reflash function Note If the reflash alarm is turned On relays 101 to 103 operates as reflash alarms Setting the AND OR Logic of Output Relays 2 Relay AND Select the relays that are to use the AND logic Set the last relay that is to use the AND logic The relays beyond this relay will use the OR logic Select from None 101 101 only 101 102 101 and 102 and I01 106 The setting is valid for relays specified by options Note If the reflash alarm is turned On relays 101 to 103 are set to OR logic Specifying AND produces no effect Setting the Output Relay Operation Energize De energize 3 Relay Action energize The output relay is energized when an alarm occurs de energize The output relay is de energized when an alarm occurs Setting the Output Relay Operation Hold Non hold 4 Relay Behavior non hold Turn OFF the output relay in sync with the alarm release hold Hold the output relay ON till an alarm acknowledge operation is executed Note If the reflash alarm is turned On relays 101 to 103 are set to non hold Specifying h
62. FAIL Memory End Output F1 One of the following five functions can be assigned to each of two output relays Contact specifications 250 VDC 0 1 A resistive load 250 VAC 50 60 Hz 3 A e System fail Relay action De energized on system fail e Memory end Informs of the time until end of the internal memory space before the data is overwritten or of the time when the remaining space on the external storage medium reaches to 10 of whole capacity or 6 Mbytes Relay action Energized when the remaining spaces reaches the specified value Memory alarm time selectable from 1 2 5 10 20 50 or 100 hours IM 04L05A01 01E 11 11 suoneoyioeds Ey 11 7 Specifications of Optional Functions e Memory Start Memory Stop Relay action Energized on Memory Start de energized on Memory Stop e User Locked Relay action Energized on occurence of locked user de energized on the operation of acknowledging the user lock e Presence of Login Users Relay action Energized when there is a user logged into the DX100P otherwise de energized Clamped Input Terminal H2 Clamped input terminal is used for input terminal Desktop Type H5 Provides carrying handle H5D H5F H5R or H5J Power cord is provided H5 Screw type power terminal can only be specified when P is simultaneously specified Computation Functions M1 Can perform computation display the computed data assigned to channels in trends and numerical val
63. ID number setup mode Pressing the ID key again causes the remote control terminal to exit the ID number setup mode Or if none of the keys on the remote control terminal is pressed for 8 s the remote control terminal automatically exits from the ID number setup mode The keys in the following figure can be used to control the DX100P Character input keys Up arrow key USER key DISP ENTER key Right arrow key Logout Batch Nessage Aeman Down arrow key a MENU key F1 F5 F2 F6 F3 F7 F4 ile holding down SHIFT PreSS F1 F5 ESC key Left arrow key FUNC key Character input keys Soft keys A j Character type switch key for character input keys see the next page START key STOP key OGAWA TROL TERMINAL 438227 Delete key Deletes the character at the cursor position when inputting characters Space key Enters a space at the cursor position when inputting characters 3 26 IM 04L05A01 01E 3 7 Using the Remote Controll Terminal Entering strings When entering strings on the remote control terminal a window for entering a string is displayed on the DX100P screen operate the terminal as follows different from the key operation on the DX100P 1 Press the left and right arrow keys to determine the character input position in the string entry box 2 Use the character input keys character type switch key A a 1 see the next page DEL key SPACE key and soft keys to enter the
64. IM 04L05A01 17E 3 12 IM 04L05A01 01E 3 5 Setting the Functions System Mode and Engineering Mode Key Operations in the Engineering Mode Below is a description of the operating procedure when the name of message group 2 is set to P1process Procedure Entering the Engineering Mode Note ___ _ En e Engineering mode can be entered only when logged in as an administrator or a user that has permission to enter the engineering mode see section 1 5 e You cannot enter the engineering mode when Memory Start is executed when the sign record screen is displayed when saving data to an external storage medium or when there is data that has not been saved to the external storage medium 1 Press the MENU key The engineering mode menu screen appears suoneado UOWWOD Setting the Message String Group number Engineering Mode Group name Range Alarm 1 42 Tag Moving average Alarm delay time 2 3 Fa Trend Save interval User key gt gt 4 5 Hessage 6 7 8 _l__1 _1 2 Press the 4 Message soft key to show 3 Press the 2 soft key to set 2 in the the setup screen group number box The cursor blue a moves to the group name box Group number 2 Group name O ae m PE ty A P EAEALPONEEI Lit ti iti aaron aAe UNE m _ Clear Copy A a l Del 4 Pressing the Input soft key displays a 5 Enter the group name
65. Infrared signal output section Inserting batteries 1 While pressing the projection on the battery cover open the cover 2 Insert the batteries 3 Close the battery cover Setting the ID number Set the ID number 0 to 31 of the remote control terminal according to the procedure shown in the figure below Set the ID number the same as the remote controller ID of the DX100P that you wish to control The ID number of the remote control terminal is not displayed anywhere If you are not sure which ID number the remote control terminal is set to set the appropriate ID number again according to the following procedure 1 Press ID 2 Enter the ID number 0 to 31 using the keys from 1 A1 to 0 NO Example For ID number 16 Operation Press 1 A1 and then 6 G6 3 Press ID Note If you enter an ID number other than 0 through 31 the ID number retains the original setting e Pressing the ID key once causes the remote control terminal to enter the ID number setup mode If none of the keys on the remote control terminal is pressed for 8 s the remote control terminal automatically exits from the ID number setup mode In this case the ID number of the remote control terminal retains the original setting e If you remove the battery the ID number is reset to 0 After inserting the battery set the appropriate ID number again Affixing the ID number label If you are using the remote control terminal with a fixed
66. Is in Progress This operation applies when data acquisition is in progress in the operation mode Only an administrator can carry out this operation The operation must be enabled in the settings For the setup procedure see section 4 14 Note You cannot change settings of users that are logged in Procedure Press rew The engineering mode menu appears Only the enabled items appear in the menu Engineering Mode 1 2 3 4 apo wa shs oy u UONesNBYyUOD Press Admin tool soft key The menu screen is displayed Admin tool 1 Admin settings 2 User settings Registering an Administrator Press the Admin settings soft key The setup screen is displayed For the rest of the procedure see Registering an Administrator on page 4 10 Registering Users Press the User settings soft key The setup screen is displayed For the rest of the procedure see Registering Users on page 4 12 IM 04L05A01 01E 4 15 4 5 Assigning Actions to the Remote Control Terminals R1 Option Procedure Enter the system mode Press the soft key Next To display the menu screen press the soft key To display the setting screen press the soft key i Remote No Action 1 E 1 None None None None None None None oaranrnnn wn 1 Action Select the Action box using the arrow keys and select actions for the terminals 1 to 8 Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press t
67. LoginLoad Loading the login information 4 12 PowerOff The power is turned Off 3 1 PowerOn The power is turned On 3 1 BatchNoSet Setting the batch number 6 2 8 1 LotNoSet Setting the lot number 6 2 8 1 UserLocked The user is invalidated during the operation of the DAQSIGNIN IMO4L05A01 61E EngLoad Loading the setup data on the engineering mode 5 22 SysLoad Loading the setup data on the system mode 4 11 EngSet Changing the engineering mode setup data Chapter 5 SysSet Changing the system mode setup data Chapter 4 LoginSet Changing the login information 4 4 Log amp SysSet Changing the system mode setup data and the login information Chapter 4 Eng amp SysSet Changing the engineering mode and the system mode setup data Chapters 4 and 5 Log amp EngSet Changing the engineering mode settings and login information settings 4 4 Chaptre 5 AllSet Changing the engineering mode settings system mode settings Chaptres 4 and 5 and login information settings CCSet Changing the number of set points for the calibration correction settings 5 21 while data acquisitionis in progress Channel number CCSet Changing the true values for the calibration correction settings while data 5 21 acquisition is in progress Channel number 1 Excludes the login information App 18 IM 04L05A01 01E Appendix 5 Operation Log Contents and Display Operation Log Operation Ref section EngSave Saving th
68. Measurable Range Measurable range 20 00 to 20 00 mV 60 00 to 60 00 mV 200 0 to 200 0 mV 2 000 to 2 000 V 6 000 to 6 000 V 20 00 to 20 00 V 50 00 to 50 00 V 0 0 to 1760 C 32 to 3200 F 0 0 to 1760 C 32 to 3200 F 0 0 to 1820 C 32 to 3308 F 200 0 to 1370 C 200 0 to 800 C 328 to 2498 F 328 0 to 1472 0 F 200 0 to 1100 C 328 0 to 2012 0 F 200 0 to 400 C 328 0 to 752 0 F 0 0 to 1300 C 32 to 2372 F 0 0 to 2315 C 32 to 4199 F 200 0 to 900 C 328 0 to 1652 0 F 200 0 to 400 C 328 0 to 752 0 F 200 0 to 600 C 328 0 to 1112 0 F 200 0 to 550 C 328 0 to 1022 0 F DCV input OFF less than 2 4 V TTL ON more than 2 4 V Contact input Contact ON OFF 1_R S B K E J T N IEC584 1 1995 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1995 2 W W 5 Rd W 26 Rd Hoskins Mfg Co ASTM E988 3 L Fe CuNi DIN43710 U Cu CuNi DIN43710 4 Pt100 JIS C1604 1997 IEC751 1995 DIN IEC751 1996 JPt100 JIS C1604 1989 JIS C1606 1989 5 Measuring current i 1 mA JPt100 4 Selectable from 20 ms 50 Hz 16 7 ms 60 Hz 100 ms 50 60 Hz for DX106P and DX112P or AUTO automatic selection from 20 ms and 16 7 ms by detection of power supply frequency Burnout upscale downscale function can be switched ON OFF for each channel Burnout upscale downscale selectable DX102P
69. Measured Computed Data are Handled When There is an Abnormality in the Data Type of Abnormal Data Report Data AVE MAX MIN P P SUM Positive over not used used not used Negative over not used used not used Error not used not used not used over range for measurement channels or computation overflow for computation channels IM 04L05A01 01E 1 47 1 7 Computation Function and Report Function M1 Option Report Function This function is used to create hourly daily weekly and monthly reports The report data can be displayed on the screen The report data are saved to the external storage medium in ASCII format For data formats see appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files For the setting procedure see section 4 6 Types of Reports e Hourly Report On every hour on the hour the average maximum minimum and sum values of the specified channels are determined from an hour of data up to the current hour and stored to the internal memory Daily Report At the specified time everyday the average maximum minimum and sum values of the specified channels are determined from a day of data up to the specified time and stored to the internal memory e Weekly Report At the specified time of the specified day every week the average maximum minimum and sum values of the specified channels are determined from a week of data up to the specified time and stored to the internal memory e Monthly Rep
70. Measuring Range Procedure Note On models with the calibration correction CC1 option users who are not allowed to set the calibration correction cannot set the measuring range either Press w To display the setting screen press the soft key Ooa 1 First CH m Last CH far Range Hode Range Span_L Span_U Volt av 2 000 2 000 ens Type Value Rly 1 fon H 6 000 off 2 rr 3 ort 4 OFF The setting items varies depending on the selected Mode DC Voltage Thermocouple RTD or Digital Input First CH Last CH fer Range Hode Range Span L Span_U Volt 2v 2 000 2 008 l 2 4 5 e Difference First CH a1 Last cH far Range Hode Type Range Span L Span_U Ref CH ayaa 2V 2 008 2 000 2 enS 3 4 5 6 Scaling Square Root First CH a1 Last cH a1 Range Hode Type Range Span L Span_U Volt 2v 2 000 2 008 Scale L Scale U Unit 8 60 20890 00 __ 2 3 4 7 8 IM 04L05A01 01E apo Buissourbuy y ul uoneIn yuo a 5 1 Setting Measuring Range Note 6 First CH Last CH Select the desired channels DX102P 01 02 DX104P 01 04 DX106P 01 06 DX112P 01 12 Mode Select the input type or the computation type Volt DC voltage TC Thermocouple RTD Resistance temperature detector DI Digital input Delta Difference Scale Scaling Sqrt Square root Skip Not used Type Select the in
71. On Ott Off Tag Channel off th 2h 5h Next 1 2 l 4 Press the Tag soft key to set Tag in the tag channel box The tag channel box turns yellow 3 16 IM 04L05A01 01E 3 5 Setting the Functions System Mode and Engineering Mode Confirming the Settings 5 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the settings of the tag channel box Since the cursor moves to the first item on the screen tab channel box in this case the tag channel box turns blue Canceling the Settings 5 Press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation A No Select Yes or No using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Yes Cancels the settings and returns to the system mode menu screen No Does not cancel the settings and returns to the screen that was shown before the ESC key was pressed Finishing the Settings 6 Press the ESC key to return to the system mode menu screen 7 Press the End soft key A window appears for you to select whether to save the settings No Cancel Select Yes No or Cancel using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Yes Saves the settings and you are logged out The settings of the system mode are activated When settings are changed the setup file is saved to the external storage medium and the log of setting change operations is saved to the setting change log Note e Ifthe external storage medium is not inserted an error message Media has not been inser
72. Tag Names Procedure Set tag names for the measurement and computation channels The system mode is used to select whether tag names or channel numbers are displayed see section 4 9 Press vew Setting on a Measurement Channel To display the setting screen press the soft key 2 Setting on a Computation Channel Option Twice press the soft key Next To display the setting screen press the soft key 12 1 1 ae ee O O First CH fai Last CH far First CH fai Last CH Br Tag as _ __2 tes Ea 2 Moving average URNS Were bee l Sum scale off Count Off Rolling average off Alarm Delay Time 10 s Alarm Delay Time 10 s 1 First CH Last CH Select the desired channels For the channels set here other parameters shown in the above figure are also simultaneously set 2 Tag Set a character string as a tag name Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a string Enter the tag name up to 16 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see section 3 6 Entering Numbers and Characters Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key IM 04L05A01 01E apo Burssourbuy ay ul uoneIn yuo a 5 4 Setting Input Filte
73. The operation of changing the time during data acquisition must be set so that such operation is allowed in advance For the setup procedure see section 4 14 IM 04L05A01 01E 5 27 apo Burssourbuy ay ul uoneIn yuo a 5 16 Setting the Message String Procedure Press ew To display the setting screen press the soft key oOo Group number Group name oann kh UNE 1 F2 3 Group number Select the message group number 1 to 7 Group name Set the group name for the selected message group Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a string Enter the group name up to 16 characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering strings see section 3 6 Entering Values and Strings 1to8 Set the message strings up to 8 strings that belong to the selected message group Move the cursor to the box corresponding to the message No you wish to set Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a string Enter the message string up to 32 characters using the same method as step 2 and press DISP ENTER Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 5 28 IM 04L05A01 01E 5 17 Setting the Batch Information Proc
74. X4 and the alarm is released Note Special cases of the delay upper lower limit alarm e When delay alarm is set on a computation channel and the computation is stopped in a condition in which the computed value is exceeding the alarm setting the alarm is turned ON after the specified period delay period elapses e Alarm detection is reset upon a power failure It restarts the operation after the power recovers e If an alarm is occurring at the time of the alarm setting change and the measured value is exceeding the new alarm setting the alarm continues IM 04L05A01 01E 1 39 SUO I IUNY JO M IM AQ a 1 6 Alarm Function e Difference Upper Limit Alarm h An alarm occurs when the difference between the measured values of two channels becomes greater than or equal to the alarm value e Difference Lower Limit Alarm I An alarm occurs when the difference between the measured values of two channels becomes smaller than or equal to the alarm value 1 Can be specified only on difference computation channels e Upper Limit on Rate of Change Alarm R The amount of change of the measured values over a certain time interval is checked An alarm occurs when the amount of increase becomes greater than or equal to the specified value e Lower Limit on Rate of Change Alarm r 2 The amount of change of the measured values over a certain time interval is checked An alarm occurs when the amount of decrease becomes greater than or eq
75. are saved the first time when the interval time expires after the storage medium is reinserted into the drive e A character string can be set as a file header see section 5 7 IM 04L05A01 01E 1 27 SUOI DUNY JO M Q a 1 4 Measured Computed Data Save Function Using the External Storage Medium Directory Structure The external storage medium consists of directories shown in the figure below Root directory Setup file Saves a setup file ppl when setup data is saved using key operation SETO directory Saves the following files when the setup is changed Setup file ppl and setting change log file dpl Data save destination directory See page 1 23 e Saves the following files when data acquisition is in progress Display data dbd even data dbe manual sampled data dmn TLOG data dtg report data DHR DDR DWR and DMR e Saves the screen image data png Data save destination directory while data acquisition is not in progress See page 1 30 i Saves the display data event data manual sampled data TLOG data and report data in the internal memory Replacing the External Storage Medium A message appears when there is not enough free space on the external storage medium Replace the storage medium before the data in the internal memory is overwritten Cyclical Use of the Storage Area of the External Storage Medium Media FIFO This method constantly saves the newest fi
76. be specified However the reports are not created for the measurement channels that are set to Skip and the computation channels that are turned Off 7 Sum scale sum unit Select the method to determine the sum value from Off s min h and day For details on the sum scale see section 1 7 Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 4 18 IM 04L05A01 01E 4 7 Setting the Timer for TLOG Data Acquisition and TLOG Computation The timers specified here are used to determine the interval for the TLOG data acquisition see page 1 26 and the TLOG computation see page 1 46 Up to three timers can be specified Procedure Enter the system mode Press the soft key Net To display the menu screen press the soft key To display the setting screen press the soft key 3 apo wWa sAs oy u UONesNBYUOD e Timer lt TLOG Timer lt TLOG Number 1 Number E11 Mode 2 Mode fibsolute 2 Interval 01 00 3 Interval ih lt Ref time a a4 7 Reset off 4 Reset Off ae 8 fiction of 5 fiction off 9 1 Mode Select the desired timer number Setting the Relative Timer 2 Mode Select Relative Interval Reset and Action are dis
77. below DX100P Current 24 VDC power supply terminal l F E Transmitter Input terminal 1 Shunt resistor 250 ohms Wiring Procedure 1 Turn OFF the power switch of the DX100P and remove the cover for the option terminal 2 Connect the 24 VDC power supply wires to the terminal The terminal arrangement for the 24 VDC power supply option is as follows Terminal Position EF Option terminal 2 16 IM 04L05A01 01E 2 8 24 VDC Transmitter Power Supply Wiring TPS2 Tps4 Option e TPS2 IA Option Terminal Qe e TPS4 OBE Option Terminal Cee Noe Use shielded wires to reduce the effects of noise Connect the shield to the ground terminal of the DX100P IM 04L05A01 01E 2 17 d00LXd 24 Bursn 310499 2 9 Power Supply Wiring For Panel Mount Type Precautions to Be Taken When Wiring the Power Supply To prevent electric shock and damage to the DX100P observe the following warnings A WARNING e To prevent electric shock ensure the main power supply is turned OFF e To prevent the possibility of fire use 600 V PVC insulated wire AWG18 or an equivalent wire for power wiring e Make sure to earth ground the protective earth terminal through a grounding resistance less than 100 Q before turning ON the power e Use crimp o
78. cece eee cence tee eeeeeteaeeeeeeeaes 2 8 wiring power supply 2 18 wiring remote control 0 2 15 wiring transmitter power supply 2 16 writing messages remote control writing MESSAGES STINGS eee cece eee e eee eeeee teat eeeeeeee 8 3 Zo ZIP ISK we cccecestieecvecscchsstatosdoutaeesiccusceacanewssivedsersccsuteteustenvcededs 3 2 ZONE display oo eee ee eee eee eee e eee eeeeeeeeeseaeeseeeeeeeeneees 1 8 1 9 IM 04L05A01 01E Index 5
79. changed the setup file is saved to the external storage medium and the log of setting change operations is saved to the setting change log Note If the external storage medium is not inserted an error message Media has not been inserted appears and the DX100P cannot return to the operation mode The error message is cleared by pressing the ESC key Insert an external storage medium into the drive and carry out the procedure again No Does not save the settings and returns to the operation mode The settings of the engineering mode remain the same as those before the setting change operation Cancel Cancels the operation to end the engineering mode and returns to the engineering mode menu screen The setting changes made up to that point are retained 3 14 IM 04L05A01 01E 3 5 Setting the Functions System Mode and Engineering Mode e Proceeding to the System Mode 8 Press the system mode soft key A window appears for you to select whether to save the settings Select Yes No or Cancel using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Appears only when logged in as an administrator Yes No Cancel Yes Saves the settings and proceeds to the system mode The settings made in the engineering mode are activated When settings are changed the setup file is saved to the external storage medium and the log of setting change operations is saved to the setting change log Note If the external storage med
80. containing the display event data to be loaded A list of files in the selected directory is displayed in the right column 5 Press the right arrow key to move the cursor on to the file list Press the up or down arrow key to select the file to be loaded To cancel the operation press the ESC key Confirming the File Information 6 Press the Details soft key to view the information about the file File name Damage check Damaged File damaged data tampered etc Batch name Batch number Lot number Setting file number Sequence number of the setup file used Sign record For data that is saved using keys while data acquisition is stopped the file name appears in red See page 1 30 7 Press the DISP ENTER key or the ESC key to clear the file information window Displaying the Data 8 Press the DISP ENTER key to display the selected file in the singing record display Signing For the signing procedure see section 6 3 IM 04L05A01 01E suoneisdo Asay 19410 je 8 8 Displaying the List of Files and the Free Space on the External Storage Medium Procedure Pressing the FUNC key displays the soft key menu Pressing the File list soft key displays the File list screen The directories in the external storage medium are displayed is the root directory File List Using the arrow keys select the directory Files in the directory are listed to the right File list Directory File n
81. corrosive gases are present Soot steam moisture dust and corrosive gases will adversely affect the DX100P Avoid such locations Near strong magnetic field sources Do not bring magnets or instruments that produce electromagnetic fields close to the DX100P Operating the DX100P in strong magnetic fields can cause errors in the measurements Bad angle for viewing the screen Because the DX100P uses a 5 5 TFT color LCD it is difficult to view the display from an extreme angle Please install the DX100P so that the monitor can be viewed from the front 2 6 IM 04L05A01 01E 2 3 Installing the DX100P Installation Procedure Panel Mount Type The DX100P should be mounted on a steel panel of thickness 2 mm to 26 mm 1 Insert the DX100P from the front side of the panel 2 As shown in the figure below mount the DX100P to the panel using the mounting brackets that came with the package Use two brackets to support the top and bottom or the left and right sides of the case Remove the seal that is covering the holes for the mounting brackets beforehand The proper torque for tightening the mounting screws is 0 8 to 1 2 Nm CAUTION Tightening the screws too much can deform the case or damage the bracket Panel Mounting 2 mm to 26 mm Mounting Bracket B9900BX For panel cutout and external dimensions see section 11 9 External Dimensions IM 04L05A01 01E 2 7 d00LXd 24 Bulsp 310499
82. data are specified using channel numbers in computing equations Constants K01 to K12 The values assigned to K01 to K12 can be used as constants Enter the values as K01 to K12 in the equations Range of constants Maximum number of significant digits is 5 9 9999E 29 to 1 0000E 30 0 1 0000E 30 to 9 9999E 29 Communication Input Data C01 to C12 Data that have been specified through the communication interface can be used Enter the data as C01 to C12 in the equations For the procedure used to set the data see the IM 04L05A01 01E 1 43 SUO IUNY JO M IM AQ a 1 7 Computation Function and Report Function M1 Option DX100P DX200P Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L05A01 17E Range of numerical values Maximum number of significant digits is 5 9 9999E 29 to 1 0000E 30 0 1 0000E 30 to 9 9999E 29 Conditions of the Remote Control Terminals D01 to D08 R1 option The conditions of the remote input signal can be assigned to 1 and 0 and used in the equations Enter the data as D01 to D08 the number following the letter D is the remote terminal number in the equations The correlation between the conditions of the remote input signal and the value 1 and 0 are shown below Type of the remote Status 1 or 0 input signal Contact close 1 open 0 Open collector Voltage level is Lo at the remote terminal 1 Voltage level is Hi a
83. display span into 4 to 12 sections The interval at which the displayed group is automatically switched on the trend digital and bar graph screens can be specified The displayed group rotates from group 1 to group 6 e You can increase the number of digits of the scale values by one digit on the trend display Press rw Press the soft key Next Procedure Press the soft key 5 To display the setting screen press the soft key Oom View Direction Trend Bargraph Vertical Background White Trend line 2 dot Trip line 2 dot Grid 10 div Scroll time 5s Scale digit Normal LeD Brightness fa Saver Off ONOR ON Set the Display Direction of the Trend 1 Direction Trend Select the display direction of the trend from Horizontal Vertical and Horizon2 Set the Display Direction of the Bar Graph 2 Direction Bar graph Select the display direction of the bar graph from Vertical and Horizontal Set the Background Color 3 Background Select the background color from White and Black Note The background color of the historical trend is opposite that of the trend screen 5 24 IM 04L05A01 01E 5 13 Setting the Display Direction Background Color Waveform Line Width and Scale digit Explanation Setting the Trend Line Width 4 Trend line Select the width of the trend line as 1 2 and 3 dots Setting the Width of the T
84. for acquiring display data or event data is 5 MB The display data or event data in the internal memory is divided into blocks according to the timing used to save data to the external storage medium When the acquisition area is full or when the number of blocks 3 in the internal memory exceeds 16 data is overwritten from the oldest data 1 For details on how to estimate the maximum sampling length from the number of channels which data is to be acquired to and the sampling interval see appendix 4 2 See the section Saving Display Data and Event Data to the External Storage Medium 3 The display data or event data in the internal memory can be confirmed using memory summary see section 7 4 When the acquisition area is full Start Overwrite Internal memory Saved to the external storage medium lt When the number of blocks Start exceeds 16 Overwrite Block nama memmory fao Saved to the external storage medium lt Y IM 04L05A01 01E 1 21 SUOI OUNY JO M Q 1 4 Measured Computed Data Save Function Type of Process When Saving Display Data and Event Data You can set the type of process to Batch or Continue Continuous Batch is suitable for managing data at the batch level through batch process Continuous is suitable for managing data of a process that is continuously run through the rotation of operators or administrators The following points di
85. gt gt USER key tag displayi 1 6 r E S ree ere temperature unit ssssissssssissssiieesrtinessrrinssnriresnnineesnrintsns 1 57 ZONE CISPlAY TE AEE 5 17 thermocouple a setting change 10g 1 11 11 1 36 time Change FUNCTION eeseeesessteesteeeseesteeesneeeeeneneeeeen 1 56 setting change log file data format App 14 time deviation limit for time correction 0cce eee 4 31 SettING FUNCTIONS eeeses tees eeeeeecnntneetessnnitteesenies 3 7 TIME ZONE eissecorsdad onsen ateleeslnes dn gested ii 4 24 setting items engineering MOE ccceeseeeeeseeeteteeseeee 3 8 mI MODE cececccccceccecececceceecececececeecececcececececetecectececteteteeses 1 46 setting items system MOE cceeeeteeeeeteeeeteeeesenee 3 10 timeup 2 setup operation while data acquisition is in progress TLOG Computation e eee eee eee eeeeeeeee 1 46 sign authority level s sesessssseserssenreresesrerenereseeneronenenaseenen 1 38 TLOG data a aaa Sign record SCrogMi sta rsrstesa taiate ii 1 17 trend clear SIQIIING iaa iiia a E A aR 6 6 trend screen signing display event data files 00 ceeteeseteeeeeeeeees 8 10 trigger 4 snap shot iD MiG EAE AAE AEE E A rn snap shot remote control ssessssesssessrererssrerererenesrersrenes 1 54 troubleshooting secessescseesssesssecessesssevessesssetessessseeesenesseten SNT P Onie REE a ES 8 15 turning off the power SOP KOY Snir E N EANN R NTG 2 4 turning on th
86. if the type of process is set to Batch settings made here are invalid User ID and Password The combination of the user ID and password must be unique User Locked If the user enters a wrong password three consecutive times when prompted to enter the password the user is invalidated and can no longer log in For the procedure in clearing the user locked condition see section 6 1 Saving and Loading Login Information see section 4 12 The login information refers to the settings of the Admin tool as described in section 4 4 It contains user information and information on the usage method of the login function and signin function The information is set in the system mode It is distinguished from other settings of the system mode as login information IM 04L05A01 01E 1 33 SUO I JIUNY JO M IM AQ E 1 5 Function for Managing Measured Computed Data Batch Function e Saving Login Information Login information is saved within the setup file pp extension For details on the file name see appendix 3 e Loading Login Information Login information can be loaded from a setup file ppl extension on the external storage medium and used as login information of the DX100P When login information is loaded the passwords of all administrators and users are reset to their default passwords see section 6 1 Log in via the Ethernet Only one type of login is possible at a time e Login using keys e Co
87. in the table below e Measurement Channel Item Data Condition of Measurement Channels Displayed value AVE When all data are measurement errors or over range Blank Average value MAX MIN e When all data are measurement errors Blank Maximum value Positive over range 99999 minimum value Negative over range 99999 SUM When all data are measurement errors or over range Blank Sum value When the sum value exceeds 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 When the sum value is below 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 e Computation Channel Item Data Condition of Computation Channels Displayed value AVE When all data are computation errors or over range Blank Average value MAX MIN e When all data are computation errors Blank Maximum value When the maximum value exceeds 99999999 999999999 minimum value When the minimum value is below 9999999 99999999 The decimal position that was specified when the span for the channel was specified is reflected in the maximum and minimum values For example if the span setting of the channel is 200 0 then 99999999 is output when the value exceeds 99999999 9 and 99999999 is output when the value is below 999999 9 SUM Sum value When all data are computation errors or computation overflow e When the sum value exceeds 3 4E 38 When the sum value is below 3 4E 38 Blank 9 999999E 99
88. information displayed at the bottom of the screen Number of the alarm information in the internal memory Tag Channel no Alarm No 1 2 3 4 Type H L h I R r T t Date amp Time alarm occurred pate amp Time alarm was released C2238 Charnel Te Alam IN Time Alam QUT Time FI aa2 aA FI ce2 a FI 002 aA FI ca2 aA SFI a Mark indicates the alarm status Cursor selects the alarm information Historical trend of the data containing the selected alarm information Imin div Alarm Mark Indication The mark indication varies depending on the hold non hold setting of alarm indication see section 1 6 as follows Non hold Hold Alarm ACK Alarm ACK Occurrence Alarm i i Pelease H Brinks Brinks Brinks Red Green in red in green Green in red Red Green Mark Alarm ACK Summary A record of alarm ACK operations can be displayed Up to 240 incidents can be stored to the internal memory When this number is exceeded data are overwritten from the oldest data e By scrolling the screen using arrow keys the alarms ACKs stored in the internal memory can be displayed For the operating procedure see section 7 4 Number of Alarm ACK information displayed at the bottom of the screen Number of Alarm ACK information in the internal memory Alarm No 1 2 3 4 Type H L h I R r T t Alarm ACK time User name 016 016 Cha
89. interface User s Manual DAQSIGNIN IM 04L05A01 61E Describes the functions and operating User s Manual procedures of DAQSIGNIN that comes with the package This manual describes the DX100P style number S5 The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of continuing improvements to the DX100P s performance and functions Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without YOKOGAWA s permission is strictly prohibited The TCP IP software used in this product and the documentation for that TCP IP software are based in part on BSD Networking Software Release 1 licensed from The Regents of the University of California Microsoft MS DOS Windows and Windows NT are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Zip is either a registered trademark or a trademark of lomega Corporation in the United States and or other countries Adobe Acrobat and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems incorporated For purposes of this manual the TM and symbols do not accompany their respective trademark names or registered trademark names Company and product names that are used in this manual are tradem
90. junction compensation you will also set the reference voltage For the setting procedure see section 4 2 Note e When using the reference junction compensation of the DX100P see Precautions to be taken while wiring in section 2 4 Input Signal Wiring e When using the external reference junction compensation set an appropriate reference junction compensation voltage As in the example in the following figure if the reference junction temperature for the external reference junction compensation is To C set the thermoelectromotive force of the 0 C reference for To C as the reference junction compensation voltage An example of External reference junction compensation DX100P External reference junction compensation Maintain the junction between the thermocouple and the copper wire at To C Copper wire Thermocouple 1 4 IM 04L05A01 01E 1 2 Functions of the Input Section Filter and Moving Average The filter and moving average are used to suppress the effects of noise that is riding on the signal Filtering is provided on the DX102P and DX104P Moving average is provided on the DX106P and DX112P The filter or moving average can be set on each channel For the setting procedure see section 5 4 Filter Function DX102P and DX104P Suppresses the effects of noise above the frequency determined by the specified time constant The time constant can be set to 2 s 5 s or 10 s Eff
91. key Next To display the setting screen press the soft key 12 1 m First CH Br Last CH far Tag TLOG Timer No Sum scale gt ale h Rolling average Interval 18s Number of samples 1 Alarm Delay Time 10 s ARON 1 First CH Last CH Select the desired channels For the channels set here other parameters shown in the above figure are also simultaneously set 2 Rolling average Select On or Off If On is selected Interval and Number of samples are displayed On Use rolling average Off Do not use rolling average 3 Interval Select the interval from the selections below However when the scan interval is set to 2 s even if the sampling interval is set to 1 s 3 s 5 s or 15 s the sampling will be performed at 2 s 4 s 6 s or 16s 1s 2s 3s 45 5s 6s 10s 12s 158s 20 s 30 s 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 6 min 10 min 12 min 15 min 20 min 30 min 1 h 4 Number of samples Select the number of data points used to compute the rolling average from integer values between 1 and 64 Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key IM 04L05A01 01E 5 39 apo Burseourbuy ay ul uoneIn yuo a 5 21 Setting the Calibration Correction CC1 Option Sets the segments for calibrati
92. media Check the storage medium 201 Not enough free space on media Use another storage medium 202 Media is read only Release the write protection 210 Media has not been inserted Insert a storage medium into the drive 211 Media is damaged or not formatted Use another storage medium or carry out formatting 212 Format error Try formatting again or use another storage medium 213 The file is read only Access to other files or make the file write enable 214 There is no file or directory See section 5 3 Communication Interface Manual 215 Exceeded the allowable number of files Delete files or change storage medium 216 The file or directory name is incorrect See sections 4 11 4 12 5 7 and 5 23 217 Unknown file type Access to other files 218 Directory exists Delete the directory or change directory name See section 5 7 219 Invalid file or directory operation Cannot handle files and directories in the 2nd and deeper layers 220 The file is already in use Try again later Wait till file is free 230 There is no setting file Access to other files 231 Abnormal setting exists in file Access to other files e Errors Related to Historical Trend Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 232 There is no available data This message may appear when recalling historical trend Access to other files 233 The specified historical data do not exist This message may appear when recalling historica
93. operation For the operating procedures see section 8 3 Note The number of manual sampled data in the internal memory can be confirmed on the memory summary see section 1 3 e When there is no medium in the drive at the time when manual sample is executed all unsaved data are saved the first time when manual sample is executed after the storage medium is reinserted into the drive e A character string can be set as a file header see section 5 7 TLOG Data Only on models with the optional computation function M1 TLOG data is created from the time computation is started to the time computation is stopped The instantaneous values of all channels excluding the measurement channels that are set to Skip and the computation channels that are turned Off are acquired to the internal memory at each time interval set by timers and when the computation is stopped Interval time set by the timer Start Stop computation computation a ti t2 tn tn 1 T Time e The measured computed data of all channels are acquired to the internal memory and saved to the external storage medium Up to 400 data sets can be stored to the internal memory When this number is exceeded data are overwritten from the oldest data The first time TLOG data are acquired a TLOG data file is created on the external storage medium The data are appended to this file at each time interval When the number of TLOG data sets exceeds 400
94. operation takes place during setup operation the DX100P returns to the operation mode automatically and the setup data is canceled 3 6 IM 04L05A01 01E 3 5 Setting the Functions System Mode and Engineering Mode Procedure for Setting Functions Set an administrator first Then log in as an administrator and set items of the system mode and engineering mode Turn ON the power switch Insert an external storage medium into the drive Press the MENU key to enter the engineering mode g Press the system mode soft key to enter the system Set the conditions for the login function Set the conditions for the sign record function Register administrators Save the settings and exit from the system mode You are logged out Log in as an administrator that was registered Press the MENU key to enter the engineering mode Press the system mode soft key to enter the system mode H Set users login mode and other items Save the settings and exit from the system mode You are logged out Z sees norr v o Log in as an administrator or user that was registered Press the MENU key to enter the engineering mode Set items of the engineering mode Save the settings and exit from the engineering mode to the operation mode End of setting See section 3 2 The DX100P can be operated without logging in at the time of factory shipment See section 4 4 See Key Operations in t
95. option M Operation via Ethernet communications S Operation via serial communications C2 C3 option Historical trend of the data containing the selected message 1 J Imin d Rate x IM 04L05A01 01E 1 3 Display Function Memory Summary The information pertaining to the display data and event data in the internal memory is displayed e By selecting the display data or event data using the arrow keys the historical trend display can be recalled For a description on the historical trend see Historical Trend in this section For a description on the display data and event data see section 1 4 The number of manual sampled data TLOG data M1 option and report data M1 option residing in the internal memory are displayed For models that have the alarm output relays option the ON OFF state of the relays are also listed For the operating procedure see section 7 4 Report data TLOG data Manual sampled data Number of data sets in the internal memory The maximum number of data sets the internal memory can hold SUOI OUNY JO M Q Status of alarm output relays M SAMPLE DATA GSS Now 26 15 26 31 RELAY amama Red Activated TLOS DATA 028 100 Nov 26 224 REPORT DATA B44 Nov 26 24 Green Released SAPLE DATA DISPLAY DATA 62 02 Batch Name 7 Start End Time Data Status Data type display data or event data FProcess1 0000002
96. over not used used not used Error not used not used not used over range for measurement channels or computation overflow for computation channels Displaying the Report The reports can be displayed using the key operations For the operating procedure see section 7 4 e Status Display If the data of a measurement or a computation channel enter any of the conditions listed below within the relevant time period one hour for hourly reports for example a symbol that indicates the condition is output to the report Data Condition Symbol Common to measurement and computation channels Measurement error or computation error E For measurement channels Positive over range See page 1 10 O Negative over range See page 1 10 O For computation channels Positive computation overflow when the value exceeds 3 4E 38 O Negative computation overflow when the value falls below 3 4E 38 O Power failure Time change Symbol Power failure P Time change C IM 04L05A01 01E 1 49 suopunJ JO M IM AQ 1 7 Computation Function and Report Function M1 Option Numerical Display The range of displayed values of report data is from 9999999 to 99999999 excluding the decimal point The decimal point position corresponds to the position of the decimal point of the lower limit span of the computation channel However special displays are used for cases given
97. range Time at the cursor position The time is yellow framed when the CURSOR TIME ON is selected Cursor Zad 423 6 Maximum minimum values m h over the entire display range Top row Maximum value Bottom row Minimum value Measured computed values at the cursor position Top row Maximum value Bottom row Minimum value Note Moving the Cursor Press an arrow key once to move the cursor by 1 dot e Keep pressing an arrow key to move the cursor by one division In this case when the cursor reaches the end of the screen it no longer moves Date and Time at the Cursor Position e Time down to milliseconds is displayed for the following cases Otherwise time down to seconds is displayed e Event data acquired at a sampling interval of 500 ms or lower e Display data acquired at a display update rate of 15 sec div If you reduce the time axis multiple sampled points exist at each dot on the time axis of the screen In this case the time of the oldest data is displayed Scrolling the Waveforms When the cursor is at the end of the display range and you press the arrow key directed away from the center the waveform scrolls for a half of page IM 04L05A01 01E 7 13 Ae HA LNA dSIG pue s y moy ay Bursn suonesado su 19 uoye do Bulyoyims 7 5 Using the Historical Trend Specifying the Display Range The position specified by the frame is the display range Items inside the parentheses are for vert
98. readies 4 4 fail GUPT a a aaaea reaa adarraren 1 51 FAIL memory end output 0 cece ree eeeeees 1 51 1 52 FIFO FIFO operation of the storage Media eeeeeeeeereetees 4 32 file information 0000 cece cceeeesesseeeeeeeessseaeeeeeeeesesnaeees 6 9 8 11 file name PINON tevstesnveee dene sap avediiys iad a Aia i acetate flash memory card TOOT ise che TAES E es A E ERES free space on the external storage medium frONT COVE pinsate nt areal lianas 2 3 front panelas na Mini seein lenin eee 2 3 FUNC Key tect asnrin ete Rin weit a a aae 3 5 function setup example 3 18 functional ground terminal 0 ccc eee eeeeeeeneeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaes 2 5 functions when the login function is not used 0 1 38 G OF ID iis cries aint E E aera eeaventts 1 8 5 25 group GISPlAY v scsscicssectsccnsessveievsetedsccenseessstesstecceevacerees 1 6 7 4 H Fe esata ce arate E A EEE EE E aot eh 5 5 handling precautions ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 1 historical trend cecccccilise fos cev feskesceveaseeye ds cccbeeessaeeh vice 1 16 7 12 hold non hold alarm output relay 00 ee 1 42 8 17 hourly reportis a ena eth wibdnedeodineca ech dak seanes 1 48 how to write equations ooo cece tee ceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaees 5 34 l IG NUMD GR seieren iendane yd idid ia aaaea information saved ssessssssesesesrusnsererrnsireenrrnsenerrnsenereneen init
99. relay status Output relay reflash on option Approx 500 ms Approx 500 ms F 101 output Alarm relay status Output relay reflash off option Note If you set the reflash alarm relays 101 to 103 become dedicated to reflash alarms regardless of the number of alarm output relay points Therefore 101 to 103 operate as OR logic and non hold regardless of the settings made in AND OR of alarm output relays and Hold Non hold operation of the alarm output relay on the next page IM 04L05A01 01E 1 41 SUOI OUNY JO M Q a 1 6 Alarm Function AND OR of Alarm Output Relays When sharing an alarm output relay among multiple alarms you can select from the following conditions that cause the alarm output relay to be activated AND Activated when all alarms are being generated simultaneously e OR Activated when at least one of the alarms is being generated Specify the alarm output relay to operate under the AND condition as in 101 first relay to Ixx where xx is the relay number Channel 1 a E Alarm status Channel 2 ee es AND a o L Alarm relay status Energize De energize Operation of the Alarm Output Relay You can select whether to energize or de energize the alarm output relay when the alarm occurs By selecting de energize the alarm output relay will operate in the same manner as when the alarm occurs when the power supply is disrup
100. report data corresponding to report data being displayed 1 Down arrow key Displays the report data corresponding to report data being displayed 1 Right arrow key Displays the report data corresponding to report data being displayed 10 However if such report data does not exist the most recent report data is displayed maximum report data number Left arrow key Displays the report data corresponding to report data being displayed 10 However if such report data does not exist the oldest report data is displayed report data number 1 Note Even if a new report data is created while displaying the report data the display is not updated The most recent report data is displayed by performing either operation below e Press the right arrow key e Press DISP ENTER and display the report data again from the screen menu IM 04L05A01 01E 7 11 SU9919S uopesado Bulyd yIMS Ae HA LNA dSIG pue s y moy ay Bursn suonesado 7 5 Using the Historical Trend Displaying the Historical Trend There are four methods for displaying the historical trend Display from the alarm summary section 7 4 e Display from the message summary gt section 7 4 e Display from the memory summary gt section 7 4 e Call from the screen menu gt section 7 1 Procedure Changing the Display 1 Press the DISP ENTER key to display the screen menu 2 Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu 3 Select the sub men
101. section 4 1 is enabled 2 For the procedure in releasing the alarm display relay output of all alarms and a description on the alarm display and output relay behavior see section 8 11 Switching to the Trend Bar Graph Display Containing the Channel Specified Using the Cursor The operation described here is for the screen with the cursor displayed 1 Move the cursor using the arrow keys and select the channel 2 Switch to the trend display or bar graph according to the procedure described in Changing the Display 7 8 IM 04L05A01 01E 7 4 Using the Information Screen Alarm Summary Alarm ACK Summary Message Summary and Memory Summary Procedure Changing the Display 1 Press the DISP ENTER key to display the screen menu 2 Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu 3 Select the sub menu item using the up and down arrow keys Sub menu of the information screen 100 Jan 01 00 25 1740 Jan 01 00 25 DISPLAY DATA Z Start End Time ALARM SUMMARY 103 Jan G1 00 26 18 m aa Tai el Displays the alarm summary 2 Jan B1_ 00 22 06 m ALM ACK SUMMARY Displays the alarm ACK summary MESSAGE SUMMARY Displays the message summary Memory summary Displays the memory summary JUMP TO HISTORY When alarm summary is displayed Displays the historical trend for when the alarm selected using the cursor occurred When message summary is displayed Displays the histor
102. see appendix 2 j Communication log Yes FTP log Yes Operation error log Yes Operation log Yes Yes Web operation log Yes E mail log Yes SNTP log Yes Alarm summary Yes 7 Message summary Yes Screen image data No Mddhhmma PNG PNG general format 3 1 About the file name Mddhhmm denotes the date and time Mddhhmm of setup data and screen image data is the date and time the file was created Mddhhmm of the setting change log is the date and time the first log was created Mddhhmm of other data is the date and time the first data was sampled M Month 1 9 X October Y November Z December dd day hh hour mm minute a denote the last digit of the year 0 to 9 Example 70112561 DBD Display data file which sampling started on July 1st 2001 at 12 56 However a becomes a sequence number for the following case It takes a value between A and Z For example if the acquisition of the display data is started and stopped within 1 minute and started again by pressing the START key the two file names are the same up to Mddhhmm month day hour and minute In this case the second file is assigned the sequence number A Example 70112561 DBD 7011256A DBD Two display data files which sampling started on July 1st 2001 at 12 56 IM 04L05A01 01E App 15 xipueddy Ey Appendix 4 Time for Acquiring Display Data Event Data to the Internal Memory Number of
103. see section 5 8 and chapter 8 respectively Actions That Can Be Assigned Name of Action Action None None AlarmACK Release alarm indication and relay output when alarm display and alarm output relay action is set to hold gt Section 4 1 Math Starts stops computation when the computation function M1 is equipped Section 8 4 Math rst Clears computed results when the computation function M1 is equipped and the computation is suspended gt Section 8 4 M sample Stores instantaneous values of all channels to the internal memory Section 8 3 Message 1 to Message 8 Displays messages and stores them to the internal memory gt Section 8 2 Snapshot Saves the screen image data to the external storage medium gt Section 8 5 Note If you log in as a user that is not allowed to perform action assigned to the USER key the action is not executed when you press the USER key A list of phenomena that occurred can be displayed in the order of occurrence for the following items A log of operations 2000 most recent operations A log of setting changes 200 most recent setting changes Error messages 50 most recent messages A log of communication commands 200 most recent commands A log of file transfers using the FTP client function 50 most recent transfers A log of e mail transmissions the 50 most recent transmissions A log of Web operation
104. setting active storage change administrator alarm computation Channel cccseeseeeeseees 5 32 alarm delay period na auxiliary alarm function ooo eee eee eee ects eteeeeeeeeaee 4 1 background Color ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeee 5 24 backlight saver ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeteneeeeeee 5 26 base position of the bar graph 0 0 eee eee eeeeeeee 5 19 batch information a DNIGMIMNCS Se is anan eie aaa ea aa en AATni Laan DUNNOUE ieioea ieseana aaa aa Aa Eae IM 04L05A01 01E Index 3 Index Calibration Correction oo eee eee eee tense teeeeeneeeeeeee 5 40 Channel display colors 2 0 0 eee eee eee eceeeeneeeeeeeee 5 16 channels to display the trend and acquire the data 4 6 CONSTANTS bre 58 sosoe cee ae A T 5 33 directory NAME eee ceeeceeeeeseeeecesesneseeessseesseeseseeeneeees 5 12 display direction we 5 24 display language 4 22 display update rate 5 10 display event data acquisition 0 cee eesee ee eeeeneeees 4 5 electronic signature function ee ee eee eeeeeeeeeeees 4 9 file header nace groups a inp t fiter ccc cece tasecceabeversccueevectecdasvoutscseceststeccesaserssiee sees integration time eee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeaes line width of the trip line Je line width of the waveform sssssssesreerererrrrreerrerrne 5 24 login fUNCtHON a
105. setting is void Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Setting Constants Used in Computation Equations Constants are used in computation equations Up to 12 constants K01 to K12 can be defined Twice press the soft key Next To display the setting screen press the soft key 11 1 Constant Kal KOF 1 Ke3 1 Kas 1 Kad 1 Kia 1 Kas 1 Ki kadi SSS 1 Constant Select the constant you wish to set using the arrow keys Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see section 3 6 Entering Numbers and Characters Range of Numerical Values The number of significant digits is 5 excluding the decimal When using exponents to set values use 5 or less digits for the mantissa and two digits for the exponent The allowed range is as follows 9 9999E 29 to 1 0000E 30 0 1 0000E 30 to 9 9999E 29 Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key
106. specified e Check the DNS setting e Check the SMTP server name 262 Cannot initiate E mail transmission e The host name of the DX is not correct Check the host name e The port number for SMTP server is not correct Check the port number 263 Sender s address rejected by the server Check the sender s address 264 Some recipients addresses are invalid Check the recipient s address 265 SMTP protocol error May occur if a network failure cable problems duplicate addresses network device failure and so on occurs in the middle of the e mail transmission 266 Ethernet cable is not connected Check the cable connection 267 Could not connect to SMTP server e Check to see that the SMTP server is connected to the network If the SMTP server name is specified using an IP address check to see that the IP address is correct 268 E mail transmission request failed Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer 269 E mail transfer error May occur if a network failure cable problems duplicate addresses network device failure and so on occurs in the middle of the e mail transmission 275 The current image cannot be output to the Web The setup screen cannot be output to the Web browser This message is displayed on the Web browser 276 Image data currently being created Unable to perform key operation Try again a little later This message is displayed on the Web browser 277 Could not output screen to Web Failed to create
107. specified for the optional code Maximum rated power voltage 250 V A1024WD 1 Provided only when H5R is specified for the optional code Maximum rated power voltage 250 V A1023WD 1 Provided only when H5J is specified for the optional code Maximum rated power voltage 250 V A1064WD 1 Provided only when H5H is specified for the power supply code complies with the CCC Maximum rated power voltage 250 V 8 Remote control 438227 1 Provided only when KB1 is terminal specified for the optional code Alkaline batteries 2 pieces an ID code entry label and a character label are included Optional Accessories Sold Separately The following optional accessories are available for purchase separately If you make an order make sure that all items are present and undamaged For information about ordering accessories contact the dealer from which you purchased the DX100P Number Part Name Part Number Model Q ty Notes 1 Zip disk A1053MP 1 100 MB A1056MP 1 250 MB 2 Flash memory card B9968NL 1 32 MB card CF card adapter capacity and model of the CF card may vary please be careful when ordering 3 Shunt resistor 4159 20 1 250 Q 0 1 for the screw terminal 4159 21 1 100 Q 40 1 4159 22 1 10 Q 40 1 4 Shunt resistor 4389 20 1 250 Q 0 1 for the clamped 4389 21 1 100 Q 0 1 input terminal 4389 22 1 10 Q 0 1 5 Fuse A1347EF 4 250 V 1 A time lag excep
108. tal PWN SJS A E 1 First CH Last CH Select the desired channels For the channels set here the Math range is also simultaneously set 2 On Off Select On or Off If On is selected items 3 4 and 5 are displayed On Use alarm Off Do not use alarm 3 Type Set the alarm type see section 1 6 H Upper limit alarm L Lower limit alarm T Delay upper limit alarm t Delay lower limit alarm Note _E__E__E__LLLLLLL_LLLLL_L_LE If you select delay alarm T or t for the alarm type you must set the alarm delay period See section 5 5 4 Value Set the value at which the alarm is activated Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see section 3 6 Entering Numbers and Characters 5 Rly Select whether to use the relay output On or not to use the relay output Off If On is selected output relay Number is displayed If the alarm output relay option AR1 AR2 or A3 is not installed this setting is void 5 32 IM 04L05A01 01E 5 18 Setting Equations Alarms and Constants for Computation Channels M1 Option 6 No Set the output relay number For the correspondence between the output relay number and the output relay position see section 2 5 Ifthe alarm output relay option AR1 AR2 or A3 is not installed this
109. the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key IM 04L05A01 01E 4 7 apo wa shs oy u UONesNBYyUOD a 4 3 Setting the Method of the Display Event Data Acquisition and Saving Explanation The Number of Measurement and Computation Channels Available in the Different Models Model Measurement Channel Computation channel DX102P 2 channels 1 and 2 8 channels 31 to 38 DX104P 4 channels 1 to 4 8 channels 31 to 38 DX106P 6 channels 1 to 6 12 channels 31 to 42 DX112P 12 channels 1 to 12 12 channels 31 to 42 Choices for the Data Length The maximum value of the data length varies depending on the sampling interval and the number of measurement and computation channels to be acquired The available choices for the data length from the table below are displayed on the soft key menu Sample 0 125 0 25 0 5 1 2 5 10 30 60 120 300 600 rate s Data length 3min 3min 3min 3min 3min choices 5min 5min 5min 5min 5min 10min 10min 10min 10min 10min 10min 10min 20min 20min 20min 20min 20min 20min 20 min 30 min 30min 30min 30min 30min 30min 30min 1h 1th 1h 1h 1h 1h 1h 1h 1h 1h 1h 1h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 2day 2day 2day 2d
110. the image This message is displayed on the Web browser 278 Web control denied because a user has control If there is a user logged in using the keys on the DXP or if there is a user logged into the setting function of the setting measurement server of the DXP via the communication interface you cannot operate the DXP from the browser 9 4 IM 04L05A01 01E 9 1 A List of Messages e Errors Related to FTP Client For information regarding the FTP client function of the DX100P see the DX100P DX200P Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L05A01 17E Code Message 280 IP address is not set or FTP function is not available Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 280 Character String and Details HOSTADDR The DX s IP address has not been specified Check the IP address DORMANT Internal processing error LINK Data link is disconnected Check the cable connection 281 FTP mail box operation error Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 281 Character String and Details MAIL Internal processing error STATUS Internal processing error TIMEOUT Internal processing error PRIORITY Internal processing error NVRAM Internal processing error 282 FTP control connection error Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 282 Charact
111. time period corresponding to one division referred to as the display update rate For the procedure related to setting the display update rate see section 5 6 The relationship between the display update rate and the speed of movement of waveforms is as follows Display Update Rate div 15 s1 30s 1min 2min 5min 10 min 15 min 20min 30min 1h 2h 4h 10h Interval corresponding 0 5 1 2 4 10 20 30 40 60 120 240 480 1200 to one dot s Speed of movement of waveforms 2376 1188 594 297 119 59 40 30 20 10 5 2 5 1 0 approximate value mm h 1 for DX102P and DX104P only 2 Speed of movement of waveforms 30 dots x 0 33 mm dot pitch x 60 min display update rate min Measured computed values are updated every second However when the scan interval on the DX106P DX112P is 2 s the update rate is also 2 s IM 04L05A01 01E 1 7 SUO I IUNY JO M IM AQ E 1 3 Display Function Displayed Data The data displayed on the screen are a maximum and minimum values of the data that are sampled at the scan interval within the time period corresponding to one dot Displayed data of the waveform when the display update rate is set to one minute e 2 s 1 dot 1 division 30 dots Maximum value 1 min Minimum value L When the display update rate is set to one minute the time period corresponding to one dot the sampling interval of displayed data is 2 s
112. to display the sub menu Select the sub menu item using the up and down arrow keys Sub menu of the digital screen GROUP 1 Displays group 1 GROUP 2 Displays group 2 GROUP 3 Displays group 3 GROUP 5 Displays group 5 GROUP 4 Displays group 4 GROUP 6 Displays group 6 L AUTO SCROLL ON Automatically switches the displayed groups see Explanation AUTO SCROLL OFF Cancels the auto switching of the displayed groups Press the DISP ENTER key to execute the display To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key IM 04L05A01 01E 7 5 Ae HA LNA dSIG pue s y moy ay Bursn suonesado SU9919S uopesado Bulyd yIMS 7 2 Using the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens Bar Graph Screen Procedure Changing the Display 1 Press the DISP ENTER key to display the screen menu 2 Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu 3 Select the sub menu item using the up and down arrow keys Sub menu of the bar graph screen TI 62 FI E R 150 0 20E EEn GROUP 1 GROUP 1 Displays group 1 GROUP 2 Displays group 2 GROUP 3 Displays group 3 GROUP 4 Displays group 4 GROUP 5 Displays group 5 GROUP 6 Displays group 6 AUTO SCROLL ON Automatically switches the displayed groups see Explanation AUTO SCROLL OFF Cancels the auto switching of the displayed groups 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to execute the
113. to the message you wish to write A window appears for you to set the message string next 172 ED D Ge c h ODER KIE HINIOIPIOIR SIT uvuz ela TEE CERERE 5 Enter the message up to 32 characters and press the DISP ENTER key A message mark time and the message are displayed on the trend display and written to the internal memory A window for entering the message string is cleared For the procedures for entering strings see section 3 6 Entering Values and Strings Operation Using the USER Key The operation described here is for the case when the function used to write the message is assigned to the USER key 1 Press the USER key A message mark time and the message corresponding to the message 1 to 8 that are assigned to the USER key are displayed on the trend display and written to the internal memory Note ___ Messages that can be written using the USER key are messages 1 to 8 of message group 1 to 7 Explanation Message Display Example CAP AP tae SE PP EP i Ce ORS He CER AAE Imintdik Message mark Message entering time Message 00 14 E i ateria Display Color of Message The message colors on the trend display are shown below You cannot change the colors Message number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Display color Red Green Blue Blue violet Brown Orange Yellow green Light blue 8 4 IM 04L05A01 01E 8 3 Storing Measured C
114. up reading of less than one minute hh 58 00 to hh 59 59 e g 10 59 50 is corrected as 11 00 00 hh 02 00 to hh 57 59 No process is to be performed e Start stop of computation rising and falling edge M1 option Reset of computation data trigger 250 ms or longer M1 option e Manual sampling trigger 250 ms or longer Writing messages Up to 8 different messages can be set trigger 250 ms or longer Snapshot saves the current screen image data to the external storage medium 24 VDC Power Supply for Transmitter TPS2 or TPS4 Number of loops 2 TPS2 or 4 TPS4 Output voltage 22 8 to 25 2 VDC under rated output current Rated output current 4 to 20 mADC Maximum output current 25 mADC overcurrent protection operation current approximately 68 mADC Allowable cable resistance RL lt 17 8 minimum operation voltage of transmitter 0 02 A where 17 8 V 22 8 V 5V 22 8 V Minimum output voltage 5 V Maximum voltage across the load resistor 250 Q Maximum length of cable 2 km when using CEV cable Insulation resistance 20 MQ or more 500 VDC between output terminal and ground terminal Withstand voltage 500 VAC 50 60 Hz 10 mA for one minute between output terminal and ground terminal 500 VAC 50 60 Hz 10 mA for one minute between output terminals 11 14 IM 04L05A01 01E 11 7 Specifications of Optional Functions Easy Text Entry KB1 KB2 15 10 Horizontal
115. value exceeds approximately 1770 0 C over range occurs if the measured value falls below approximately 10 0 C over range occurs e Numerical display of computation channels common to trend digital and bar graph displays See section 1 7 Alarm Indication The indications of preset alarm marks vary depending on the hold non hold setting of alarm indication see section 1 6 as follows The indication patterns are common to trend digital and bar graph Non hold Hold Alarm ACK Alarm ACK Occurrence Alarm H f Release h Brinks Brinks Brinks Alarm Green Red Green Green inred in green Green Green inred Red Green indication O 1 10 IM 04L05A01 01E 1 3 Display Function Bar graph Screen The measured computed data are displayed using bar graphs See section 7 2 Bar Graph Horizontal tarting point of the bar normal Starting point of the bar center Tag Channel no v Unit Measured computed value Bar graph in channel color 3 500 4 LO 844 L E i H Alarms mark Upper limit of span Alarm point mark Lower limit of span Bar Graph Vertical 1 2 3 Tag Channel no L ma m Alarm mark 2 000 2 500 3 000 3 500 Upper limit of span m Alarm point mark Bar graph 2 000 2 500 3 000 3 59a__ _ Lower limit of span J Unit E Y C vj C Yj Cc vj
116. will occur at 09 40 09 50 10 00 and so on e Relative Mode The timer is started when the computation is started The timer is repeated at each interval The timer is suspended while the power is lost Example Interval 00 15 The timer expires every 15 minutes after the computation is started For the procedure related to setting the timer type and the interval see section 4 7 For the procedure related to setting the timer to be used see section 5 19 Sum Scale of the TLOG SUM In the sum computation TLOG SUM of time series data are summed over the scan interval However for flow values that have units s min or h a simple summation results in the actual value not matching the computed result because the scan interval and the unit of the input values are different In these cases the unit of the data measured over the scan interval is converted to match the unit of the input values and the computation is performed For example if the scan interval is 2 s and the input value is 100 m min a simple summation would add 100 every 2 s resulting in 3000 after one minute However if the computing unit is set to min then 2 s 60 s is multiplied every scan interval before the value is added giving a result that has a m min unit The following equations are applied The scan interval unit is in seconds Off measured value s measured value x scan interval min measured value x scan interval 60 h measured value x scan inter
117. with static electricity Handling the CF Card and Adapter Insert the CF card into the adapter as shown in the figure below The card should remain in the adapter when removing it from the card slot on the DX100P Adaptor Do not force the CF card when inserting it into the adapter If the card does not seem to fit make sure you are inserting it right side up CF card CAUTION Don t expose the Zip drive to vibration or shocks as it may damage the drive IM 04L05A01 01E 2 2 Names of Parts and Functions Front Panel Light receiving section for the infrared signal from the remote control terminal valid only on models with the KB1 or KB2 option va Dx100P YOKOGAWA N DXIOCOP C YOKOGAWA Front cover knob 5 z CLO ia 12 r leap 8 ooer roke 4 v d LD 1 key panel 2 4 7 10 118 9 cover knob LCD screen Displays various operation screens such as the trend screen and the setup screen to configure the DX100P 2 Label A label used to distinguish the channels Write on this label and use it as a reference 3 Operation key Left right up and down arrow keys and the DISP ENTER key The keys are used to switch the operation screen in the operation mode In the setup screens the keys are used to select parameters and to confirm the new setti
118. 0 5 11 5 distance m 10 15 15 10 5 11 5 10 15 KB1 With a remote control terminal KB2 Without remote control terminal Operation temperature range 0 to 40 C Operation humidity range 20 to 80 RH 5 to 40 C no condensation Storage temperature range 10 to 60 C Power supply 3 VDC two AAA batteries alkaline or manganese Use the same type of batteries Weight Approx 60 g excluding the batteries External dimensions 170 H x 50 W x 23 7 D mm Number of units that can be controlled individually Up to 32 units by setting the ID number Control range 8 mor less from the front of the light receiving section of the DX100P A reference value Varies depending on the operating environment such as the battery voltage and the presence or absence of external light The value is not warranted Directional characteristics See the figure below A reference value Varies depending on the operating environment such as the battery voltage and the presence or absence of external light The value is not warranted Vertical distance m IM 04L05A01 01E 11 15 suoneoyioeds Ey 11 8 General Specifications Construction Mounting Flush panel mounting on a vertical plane Mounting may be inclined backward up to 30 degrees from a horizontal plane Allowable panel thickness 2 to 26 mm Material Case drawn steel Bezel polycarbonate Case Color Case Grayish blue green Munsell 2 0B
119. 0 0 to 1100 0 C 1980 0 to 1980 0 F U 600 0 to 600 0 C 1080 0 to 1080 0 F RTD Pt100 800 0 to 800 0 C 1440 0 to 1440 0 F JPt100 750 0 to 750 0 C 1350 0 to 1350 0 F CU1 to 6 CU10 500 0 to 500 0 C option 900 0 to 900 0 F CU25 500 0 to 500 0 C option 900 0 to 900 0 F DI Level 1 to 1 Contact 1 to 1 5 4 IM 04L05A01 01E 5 2 Setting Al arm This section describes the procedure related to setting the alarm on measurement channels For the procedure to set alarms on computation channels see section 5 18 Note e Set the measurement range before setting the alarm All Procedure of the alarm settings of a channel are canceled in the following cases When the input type is changed Volt TC etc When the input range is changed When the upper and lower limits of the span or scale are changed on channels that are set to scaling or square root computation including changes in the decimal point position Press uw To display the setting screen press the soft key oa 1 First CH Range Hode Volt Alarm m m Last CH far Range Span_L Span_U PwWNe SITSTST SI gt gt N gt 2y 2 000 2 000 Type Value Rly H 6 008 oft 3 4 5 First CH Last CH Select the desired channels For the channels set here Range is also simultaneously set On Off When the alarm is turned on Type Value and Relay On Off
120. 00 0 C 328 0 to 572 0 F CU10 Q WEED Cuid based on a particular manufacturer CU4 200 0 to 300 0 C 328 0 to 572 0 F CU10 Q BAILAY Cuid based on a particular manufacturer CU5 200 0 to 300 0 C 328 0 to 572 0 F CU10 Q a 0 00392 at 20 C CU6 200 0 to 300 0 C 328 0 to 572 0 F CU10 Q a 0 00393 at 20 C CU25 200 0 to 300 0 C 328 0 to 572 0 F CU25 Q a 0 00425 at 0 C Cu1 to 6 and Cu25 are options IM 04L05A01 01E 5 3 apo Burssourbuy y ul uoeIn yuo a 5 1 Setting Measuring Range Mode Range Measurable Range DI Level 0 Less than 2 4 V 1 Greater than or equal to 2 4 V Contact 0 Opened 1 Closed Measurable Range for Difference Computation The following table shows the input type range and measurable range for difference computation Type Range Measurable Range Volt 20 mV 20 00 to 20 00 mV 60 mV 60 00 to 60 00 mV 200 mV 200 0 to 200 0 mV 2V 2 000 to 2 000 V 6V 6 000 to 6 000 V 20 V 20 00 to 20 00 V 50 V 50 00 to 50 00 V TC R 1760 0 to 1760 0 C 3168 to 3168 F S 1760 0 to 1760 0 C 3168 to 3168 F B 1820 0 to 1820 0 C 3276 to 3276 F K 1570 0 to 1570 0 C 2826 to 2826 F E 1000 0 to 1000 0 C 1800 0 to 1800 0 F J 1300 0 to 1300 0 C 2340 0 to 2340 0 F T 600 0 to 600 0 C 1080 0 to 1080 0 F N 1300 0 to 1300 0 C 2340 to 2340 F W 2315 0 to 2315 0 C 4167 to 4167 F L 110
121. 01E 5 23 Saving loading the Setup Data Saving Setup Data The setup data set in the engineering mode and system mode including the login information is saved to the external storage medium Procedure Press Press the soft key Next Press soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen 1 Press a soft key to display the Save settings screen Save settings File name I File name Time SETIP2 PPL 2081 11 11 26 36 SET2P2 PPL 2001711711 20 59 SET3P2 PPL 2001 112711 21 07 1 Enter the file name up to eight characters in the File name box and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering a string see section 3 6 Entering Values and Strings Press the ESC key to cancel the operation and return to the Save Load menu Note e Setup data file is automatically assigned PPL extension The following characters or strings cannot be used as file names AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK character strings that include a space or spaces 2 Press the DISP ENTER key to save the setup data to the root directory on the external storage medium The name of the saved file is displayed in the file list section on the right side If a file with the same name as you entered exists on the external storage medium a message will appear to confirm overwriting To overwrite the file select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key IM 04L05A01 01E 5 43
122. 0P When not in use make sure to turn OFF the power switch If there are any symptoms of trouble such as strange odors or smoke coming from the DX100P immediately turn OFF the power and unplug the power cord Then contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer CAUTION Don t put any weight on the DX100P while it is in reclined position with its front feet up as it may damage the feet IM 04L05A01 01E dOOLXG 24 usn 310439 2 1 Precautions on the Use of the DX100P Handling Precautions of External Storage Media Insert the card until these edges are nearly flush Take special care in handling external storage media as they are delicate products For general precautions see the instruction manual that came with the external storage medium Zip disks may not operate properly under high or low temperature environment Use the DX100P in the specified temperature range Remove the external storage medium from the drive when turning ON OFF the DX100P Do not remove the external storage medium while the access lamp is lit Doing so can destroy the data on the medium It is recommended to keep a duplication of the saved data on the external storage medium If you are using a commercially available compact flash card on DX100Ps in the ATA flash memory card drive be careful of static electricity The DX100P may not operate properly if you touch the compact flash card that is inserted into the DX100P when your body is charged
123. 0s 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 6 min 10 min 12 min 15 min 20 min 30 min th Number 1 to 64 Numerical value of samples Alarm delay time 1sto 3600s Numerical value Calibration Channel Up to model types Sa Number of set points 2to16 1to 16 MES val Numerical value True val xipueddy IM 04L05A01 01E App 3 Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings Parameters Menu Notes Daylight Use Not Use saving time Start time Month 1to12 Day order 1 2 3 4 Last Weekday SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT Hour of the Numerical value 0 to 23 End time Month 1to12 Day order 1 2 3 4 Last Weekday SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT Eau of the Numerical value 0 to 23 App 4 IM 04L05A01 01E Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings System Mode Initial settings are thick framed Parameters Menu Notes Alarm Reflash Relay 101 102 101 103 Up to model types 101 106 Behavior Indicator Rate of change Increase Decrease 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Hysterisis ions Off A D Integrate ne 50 Hz 60 Hz 100 ms Initial setting is 50 Hz for models with P1 100 ms is for DX106P DX112P Scan interval 1125ms 250 ms DX102P DX104P lis 2s DX106P DX112P Burnout set Off o e Up Down RJC internal External
124. 159 ELLELE EE a a tE LLL ECELLLELER KAENA PEENE FERTA APP ir irrita EFEN ri EET PEE e LET Ty TT I V Free messages Set the message when you wish to write it Explanation Regarding the Zone Display The display range zone can be set for each channel In the example shown in the figure below channel 1 is displayed in the zone 0 to 30 channel 2 in the zone 30 to 60 and channel 3 in the zone 60 to 100 Normal display Zone display Zone 1 Zone2 Zone3 0 30 60 100 0 100 ji gi g lt CH1 CH2 CH3 Explanation Regarding the Partial Expanded Display By compressing a section of the display scale of the waveform the remaining section of is expanded You specify a value on the display scale boundary value to be moved to another position on the display scale boundary value displacement position In the example shown below 0 V boundary value is moved to the 30 position of the display scale boundary value displacement position The section below the boundary represents 6 V to 0 V and the section above the boundary represents 0 V to 6 V Normal Display Partial Expanded Dispaly Compressed portion Expanded portion of full display span 0 50 100 0 30 100 6V 0 6V 6V 0 6V Measured val
125. 2 Assign an output to relay 2 using the same method as for relay 1 Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key IM 04L05A01 01E 4 21 apo w 4S oy u UONesNBYyUOD 4 9 Setting the Auxiliary Functions Procedure Select whether tag names or channel numbers are to be displayed on the operation screen trend screen digital screen etc The initial setting is channel number display Tag names are set in the engineering mode see section 5 3 When the remaining time for storing the display or event data in the internal memory falls to the specified time Memory alarm time an alarm is generated via e mail or the relay contact output F1 option For details related to the relay output action see section 1 8 Select the display language Set whether or not to use the partial expanded display The display specifications of the partial expanded display are set in the engineering mode see section 5 11 Set the remote controller ID Easy text entry KB1 KB2 option Enter the system mode Press the soft key Next To display the setting screen press the soft key 5 AUX Tag Channel s Hemory alarm th a 2 Language English MW 9 Partial Not 4 Remote Controller ID Off 5 1 Tag Channe
126. 250 ms or more e Displays a message at the position corresponding to the time when the signal was applied on the trend screen Message1 to Message8 correspond to messages 1 to 8 of the message group 7 The displayed message is also written to the internal memory When the data acquisition to the internal memory is stopped messages cannot be displayed or written Applying a remote signal produces no effect e Snap Shot Snapshot e Remote input signal Trigger 250 ms or more e Saves the current screen image data to the external storage medium The snapshot function operates in all modes operation mode engineering mode and system mode Error messages even if they are displayed are not saved Remote Input Signal The above operations are carried out on the rising or falling edge of the remote signal edge or the ON signal lasting at least 250 ms trigger Edge rising falling Trigger Rising Falling e 250 ms or more For contact inputs the remote signal rises when the contact switches from open to closed and falls when the contact switches from closed to open For open collector signals the remote signal rises when the collector signal voltage level of the remote terminal goes from high to low and falls when the collector signal goes low to high 1 54 IM 04L05A01 01E 1 10 Other Functions USER key Log Display One of the following actions can be assigned to the USER key For the setting and operating procedure
127. 3 Nov 26 15 26 12 Nov 26 16 25 22 18995 Stoe mb Frocess1 00000022 No 26 13 43 40 Nov 26 1453 32 2097 Stoe l J doiro status Number of samplings Date and time data acquisition ended Cursor Date and time data acquisition started Y Historical trend of the selected data TI 002 FI 001 Report Data M1 option Report data residing in the internal memory can be displayed For details related to the report data see section 1 7 For the operating procedure see section 7 4 The index number of the report data currently displayed The number of report data in the internal memory Report type Index 4 4 Kind Hourly Start Nov 26 2001 15 26 12 Date and time the report started Timeup Nov 26 2001 16 26 24 Date and time the report was created ChUnit Sts Ave Hax Hin Sum ac 101 76 140 46 60 45 1 61089E 05 2c 27 4 81 2 29 9 4 AIME amp min 102 23 159 58 59 56 1 617882E 06 Bh 256 3 3 4 5 108 8 4 057234E 25 aU 8 655 8 209 0 791 5 59000E 01 l Unit Status Average maximum Tag Channel no minimum and sum values IM 04L05A01 01E 1 15 1 3 Display Function Historical Trend The waveform of the past display data and event data in the internal memory can be displayed This function is called Historical trend 1 For details of display data and event data see section 1 4 Methods Used to Display the Historical Trend The following four metho
128. 36 SET2P2 PPL 2001711711 20 59 SET3P2 PPL 2681 11 11 21 07 apo wa shs oy u UONesNBYyUOD 1 Enter the file name in the File name box up to eight characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering strings see 3 6 Entering Numbers and Characters Press the ESC key to cancel the operation and return to the Save Load Initialize menu Note e Setup data file is automatically assigned PPL extension The following characters or strings cannot be used as file names AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK character strings that include a space or spaces 2 Press the DISP ENTER key to save the setup data to the root directory of the external storage medium The saved file is displayed in the file list section on the right side If a file with the same name as you entered exists on the external storage medium a message will appear to confirm overwriting To overwrite the file select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key IM 04L05A01 01E 4 25 4 11 Saving Loading Setup Data Loading Setup Data Procedure Loads the data excluding the login information from the setup file file with PPL extension on the external storage medium to the DX100P When executed the loaded data are activated and the user is logged out Enter the system mode Press the soft key Next Press 6 soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen Press soft key to di
129. 4L05A01 01E App 1 Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings Parameters Menu Notes Message Group number 1 3 4 5 7 Group name Character string Initial setting is all space 1to8 Group set Group number 1 2 3 4 Fixed Group name IGROUP1 GROUP2 Character string CH set See section 5 9 for initial settings Trip line Position Numerical value Color Red Green Blue B violet Initial settings are No 1 Red Brown Orange Y green Lightblue Mg greon No 9 Blue Violet Gray Lime Cyan Darkblue Yellow Lightgray Purple Color CH1 to CH30 Red Green Blue B violet See section 11 2 for initial settings Brown Orange Y green Lightblue Violet Gray Lime Cyan Darkblue Yellow Lightgray Purple Zone Lower ofto 95 Numerical value Upper 5 tof109 Graph Division Bar graph Scale position Partial On Off Expand 1 to 99 Numerical value Boundary View Direction Trend Horizontal Vertical Horizon2 Bar graph Horizontal Trend line 1 2 8 Trip line 1 2 3 Grid Auto 4 5 6 11 12 Scroll bs 10s 20 s 30 s 1 min Scale digit Normali Fie 5 6 7 8 Backlight saver On Off On Of O Saver time 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min somn pn Restore Key Math color CH31 to CH42 Red Green Blue B violet See section 11 2 for initial settings Brown Orange Y green Ligh
130. 6 characters uuuuuu Unit 6 characters eeeeeecee Status of the data used E Error data o Over range or computation overflow P Power failure c Time change yyyy no dd Date the report is created hh mi Time the report is created nnn n Report value 13 digits File Output Example The following example shows the daily report for four channels DAILY REPORT START TIME 2000 01 31 20 00 Model Serial No 12A338617 a File Header Process1 Lot2 CH TAG CHO1 CHO2 CHO3 CHO4 UNIT r y uw y uy m Y y m P y m 2000 01 01 00 00 ers on cr 4 c AVE 0 00 0 10 0 20 0 30 MAX 0 00 1 00 2 00 3 00 MIN 0 00 1 00 2 00 3 00 SUM 0 000000E 01 1 000000E 04 2 000000E 04 3 000000E 04 App 12 IM 04L05A01 01E Appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files Note When the measurement and computation channel data enter the condition described in the following table status E and O are output in the report Data Condition Status Common to measurement and computation channels Measurement error or computation error E For measurement channels Positive over range O Negative over range O For computation channels Positive computation overflow when the value exceeds 3 4E 38 O Negative computation overflow when the value falls below 3 4E 38 O Measurement computation errors a
131. Charactor string Recipient 2 Include source URL Subject Header 1 lt DX gt Report_data Header 2 Charactor string App 8 IM 04L05A01 01E Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings Parameters Notes 500 ms 1s 5s 10s Communication Read cycle Modbus master Basic settings Timeout Retrials 5 10 20 Communication On Off Modbus master First Last co1 c02 C03 co4 command settings C05 C06 C07 cos c09 C10 C11 C12 Address Numerical value Registers Type INT16 UINT16 INT32_B INT32_L UINT32_L FLOAT_B FLOAT_L Active strage Time change changes User change Cal correct change Text message on cal correct Date amp Time Time deviation limit 20s 30s 3min 4min 1min 5min 1200 to 1200 Time zone Difference from GMT SNTP Server settings Use Not Basic settings Client settings Use Not Numerical value Initial value 0 Server name Character string Port number Numerical value Initial value 123 Access interval Off Access reference time Access timeout 10s 90s SNTP synched Time adjust on start action On Off to start Numerical value Initial value 00 00 xipueddy IM 04L05A01 01E App 9 Appendix 2 Dat
132. Constant gt Math set3 Tag TLOG Rolling average Alarm delay time 9 10 11 12 Next 3 4 1 2 3 Engineering Hode TER Calibration correction setting 13 14 15 16 Next 4 4 3 8 IM 04L05A01 01E 3 5 Setting the Functions System Mode and Engineering Mode Soft key Settings in the engineering mode Ref Title Item section 1 Range Input type measurement range upper and lower 5 1 limits of span reference channel for difference computation upper and lower limits of scale Unit Alarm Alarm type Alarm value Output relay number 5 2 2 Tag Tag name 5 3 Filter Filter time constant Off DX102P DX104P 5 4 Moving average Number of samples for the moving average Off 5 4 DX106P DX112P Alarm delay time 5 5 3 Trend Save interval Trend display update rate Auto save interval 5 6 USER key Assign an action to the USER key 5 8 4 Message Message string 5 16 5 Display 5 1 Group set Group name Assign channels to groups 5 9 Trip line Trip line position display color 5 2 Color Measurement channel display color 5 10 5 3 Zone Zone upper and lower limits 5 11 Graph Number of scale divisions Bar graph base position 5 12 Specify the scale display position for trends Partial Turn On Off partial expanded display Position and 5 11 boundary for the partial expanded display 5 4 View Trend display direction Bar graph display direction 5 13 Direc
133. DATA Model Serial No 12A338617 File Header Processl1 Lot2 n CH TAG CHO1 CHO2 CHO3 CHO4 n UNIT V ON wao WN mV t 2000 01 01 01 08 43 0 000 0 000 0 000 14 00 2000 01 01 01 08 48 0 000 0 000 0 000 14 00 2000 01 01 01 09 15 0 000 0 000 0 000 14 00 CH TAG 1 CHO1 CHO2 CHO3 CHO4 me UNIT V yt mee A y 4 2000 01 01 01 15 30 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 014 2000 01 01 01 18 12 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 014 App 10 IM 04L05A01 01E Appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files Note e Output value when detected erroneous data measurement over range data or computation overflow data Channels Data Output value Measurement channels measurement error Blank positive over range 99999 negative over range 99999 Computation channels computation error 999999999 positive computation overflow 999999999 negative computation overflow 99999999 CH TAG and UNIT lines In the following cases both the CH TAG line and the UNIT line are rewritten after a carriage return line feed and followed by manual sampled data e When the measurement channel is switched from some setting other than Skip to Skip e When the measurement channel is switched from Skip to some other setting e When the computation channels are turned On or turned Off e When the unit is changed Four lines from the bottom o
134. DISPLAY DATA 0404 Batch Name Start End Time Data Status 15 RELAY 0008 ci te Process 12am gt Nov 16 10 00 02 Nov 16 10 24 10 75 Sarlins Frocess1 00000007 Select the data Now 16 09 38 34 Now 16 10 00 00 644 Auto Save Process 1 00000705 Now 16 09 27 40 Now 16 09 30 18 82 Stoe Process 1 000005 Nov 16 09 03 24 Now 16 09 25 00 649 Stoe 2 Display the historical trend according to the procedure described in Changing the Display Report Data M1 option Procedure Displaying the Report Data Display the report data according to the procedure described in Changing the Display Number of the report data being displayed Number of report data stored to the internal memory T T Index 3 3 Kind Hourly Start Nov 16 2081 09 38 33 Timeup Nov 16 2061 10 00 00 ChUnit Sts Ave Hax Hin Sum a1 T 166 69 157 06 44 18 1 361350E 5 a2 T 32 9 104 3 52 5 4 234E H4 6 lenin 107 12 171 3 3 21 1 3775 w Bh 270 3 453 8 3 6 3 481956 Switching the Displayed Report Data The Number box of the report data display shows the number of the report data being displayed the number of report data saved to the internal memory The largest report data number corresponds to the most recent report data Press the arrow keys while displaying the report data to switch the report data to be displayed The behavior when the four keys are pressed is as follows Up arrow key Displays the
135. DX104P e Signal damping e On off selectable for each channel e Time constant selectable from 2 5 and 10 seconds DX106P DX112P e On off selectable for each channel e Number of samples to be averaged is selectable from 2 to 16 A D integration time Thermocouple burnout Filter Moving average IM 04L05A01 01E suoneoyioeds Ey 11 1 Input Specifications Computation Differential computation Between any two channels Linear scaling Square root Available for Volt TC RTD and DI ranges Available for Volt TC RTD and DI ranges Scaling limits 30000 to 30000 Decimal point user selectable Engineering unit user definable up to 6 characters Square root computation and linear scaling Available for Volt range Scaling limits 30000 to 30000 Decimal point user selectable Engineering unit user definable up to 6 characters 11 2 IM 04L05A01 01E 11 2 Display Specifications Display unit 5 5 inch TFT color LCD VGA 240 x 320 dot resolution Channel display color Trend Bar graph Selectable from 16 colors Red Green Blue Blue violet Brown Orange Yellow green Lightblue Violet Gray lime Cyan Darkblue Yellow Light Gray Purple Initial settings of channel display color Channel 1 Red Channel 2 Green Channel 3 Blue Channel 4 Blue violet Channel 5 Brown Channel 6 Orange Channel 7 Yellow green Channel 8 Light blue Channel 9 violet Channel 10 Gray Chan
136. Data Points That Can Be Acquired to the Internal Memory and Acquisition Time This section describes the number of display data and event data points that can be acquired to the internal memory and the acquisition time The information can be used to estimate the time until the internal memory becomes full or used to determine the number of channels and sampling interval for saving the data For the auto save interval of display data and data length of event data selectable range of values are assigned to the soft keys and displayed based on the information described here Number of Bytes per Channel Display data consists of minimum and maximum values for each sampling interval Event data consists of instantaneous values The number of data bytes per channel is shown in the following table Data Type Measurement Channel Computation channel Display data 4 bytes channel 8 bytes channel Event data 2 bytes channel 4 bytes channel Example Data size when acquiring the data of channels 1 to 4 measurement channels and channel 31 computation channel to the internal memory Display data 1st scan CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH3 CH3 CH4 CH4 CH31 CH31 Date amp Time min imax min max min max min i max min max 8 bytes 2nd scan CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH3 CH3 CH4 CH4 CH31 CH31 Date amp Time min imax min max min max min max min max 8 bytes to nth scan CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH3 CH3 CH4 CH4 CH31 CH31 Date amp Time min imax mi
137. EDBAEREE KUHNOPORST UW Zea a HAR Cb a il23 45 6 7 819 Sp l A Tover Avast 4 Enter the new password 6 to 8 alphanumeric characters spaces are not allowed and press the DISP ENTER key A window appears for you to enter the password again Enter the same password ABBRERRRDG lt AEE STEEL ELEE iia KILIM N O P QRS T UVWXYZ a uly wx yzg a KAPAR AS AEA UAE 4 5 6 78 91 Sp Over Note When the use of the user ID is enabled the combination of the user ID and password must be unique When entering the password currently in use if you repeat the operation of entering a wrong password and pressing the DISP ENTER key three times the user is invalidated Have the administrator set a default password and reset the password according to Logging in for the First Time see section 6 1 8 16 IM 04L05A01 01E 8 11 Acknowledging Alarms Alarm ACK Alarm ACK is an operation used to acknowledge the activated alarm when the alarm display and alarm output relay behavior is set to Hold Procedure Alarm ACK against Individual Alarms This operation is carried out on the overview screen For the operating procedure see section 7 3 Alarm ACK against All Alarms Occurring You can acknowledge all alarms occurring or have occurred but not yet acknowledged at once When you assign Alarm ACK to the USER key and execute the alarm ACK When you execute he alarm ACK via the r
138. Explanation Press the soft key Next Press the soft key as Setting on a Measurement Channel To display the setting screen press the soft key Oox Setting on a Computation Channel Option To display the setting screen press the soft key aes Color CH Color 1 E 7 i Green 1 O E PUN Blue B violet el 1 Color Move the cursor to the desired channel and select the channel display color from 16 colors Red green blue blue violet brown orange yellow green light blue violet gray limes cyan dark blue yellow silver and purple Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Initial Settings of Channel Display Color Channel 1 Red Channel 2 Green Channel 3 Blue Channel 4 Blue violet Channel 5 Brown Channel 6 Orange Channel 7 Yellow green Channel 8 Light blue Channel 9 violet Channel 10 Gray Channel 11 Red Channel 12 Green Channel 13 Blue Channel 14 Blue violet Channel 15 Brown Channel 16 Orange Channel 17 Yellow green Channel 18 Light blue Channel 19 violet Channel 20 Gray Channel 21 Red Channel 22 Green Channel 23 Blue Channel 24 Blue violet Channel 25 Brown Channel 26 Orange Channel 27 Yellow green Channel 28 Light blue Channel 29 violet Channel 30 Gra
139. Fae Model DX102P DX104P DX106P DX112P one DAQSTATION DX100P 4L5 A101 6E 0 4 YOKOGAWA eet enor Yokogawa Electric Corporation uonesodioy 91190 emeHoyo VMV5ONOA uonIp Ui 3L0 LOVSOTYO WI shepodiz shep pep skepgo shepg y 98 Yer YOL xosdde y5ua Buyjdwes s 009 s OZ soe SG S SW00G SWU GZL s emau Budwes sjeuueyo puawanseaw INO woy eyep juana ay Bunnboy usu xosdde skep g6gz s ep ZG s epegz shep pyy skep zz s epz UGLL Use y 5ua Buyjdures ooz o8 Al 09 oe OL Z gO 4 OL uv YUL Ulm Og UG uug UW SG 3y oyepdy Aejdsiq s emau Buljdwes S UUBYO pu w inse w JNO Wo eyep Aejdsip ey Buninboy uayM p xipuedde s e eq u 43 pue geq Aejdsig 104 yyHus Huljdwes pue jeasajyuy Huljdwes u 19S uoesado y a as 0 Ady moe Yo 10 y umop dn ay ssaig u9019S uoesado 94 10 nu wu u 19S y Aejdsip 0 Ady YILNJ dSIA 24 SSAld Z 49 dey9 s su s uoesa do HuryIMS u 19S p109 4 UBIS Keidsiq uaas0S p pu L JEOUOISIH Aewwuns oway Mewwuns aessa Aewuins yoy wey Mewwuns wiejy uonewoyy ydes6 seg jeybiq pues uona s Bas SUBBIDS uopei do 3LO LOVSO7110 INI enueW sasn y YM 194 060 39U313491 yOINb sy asf d00LXA NOILVLSOVG d ltXd d90lXd dv0lXQ dc0 xd I PON BIUTIIJOY JINO O O Ol ANI SIHL SNOW 0104 peubisse ase opo w s sS pue pu3 1 Sq uoj
140. ID number such as when there is a one to one correspondence between the DX100P to be controlled and the remote control terminal you can enter the ID number on the ID number label and affix the label on the remote control terminal IM 04L05A01 01E 3 25 suoljesodo uowwoy eo 3 7 Using the Remote Controll Terminal Affix the ID number label on the battery cover of the remote control terminal Controlling the DX100P Control the DX100P by pointing the infrared signal output section of the remote control terminal to the light receiving section on the DX100P You can control the DX100P with a remote controller ID that is the same as the ID number of the remote control terminal Control the DX100P while checking the results on the DX100P screen Note e When a specific key operation is possible on the DX100P the corresponding key on the remote control terminal is activated For example the operation for entering a character string is activated when a window for entering a character string is displayed on the DX100P screen e If another DXP with the same remote controller ID as the DX100P you wish to control exists in the range of the infrared signal of the remote control terminal the two instruments may be controlled simultaneously e Pressing the ID key once causes the remote control terminal to enter the ID number setup mode You cannot control the DX100P using the remote control terminal if the remote control terminal is in the
141. IM 04L05A01 01E 5 33 apo Buissourbuy y ul uoneIn yuo a 5 18 Setting Equations Alarms and Constants for Computation Channels M1 Option Explanation This section describes the meaning of the computation equation and how to write them Four Arithmetical Computations Power SQR ABS The types of data that can be used in equations are measured data computed data constants K01 to K12 communication interface data C01 to C12 and the remote control terminal conditions D01 to D08 Example Addition 01 02 Computes the measured value of channel 1 plus the measured value of channel 2 Subtraction 01 02 Computes the measured value of channel 1 minus the measured value of channel 2 Multiplication x 01xKO3 Computes the measured value of channel 1 multiplied by constant KO3 Division 01 K02 Computes the measured value of channel 1 divided by constant K02 Note When you set an expression as e g 31 01 on channel 31 the summation of channel number 1 will be displayed in channel 31 LOG EXP Computations The types of data that can be used in equations are measured data computed data constants K01 to K12 communication interface data C01 to C12 and the remote control terminal conditions D01 to D08 You can nest a computing element inside the parentheses of another computing element Example Power xx 01xx02 Raises measured value of channel 1 to the power of measured value of channel 2 S
142. Memory stop 5 gt Saved to the external 3 Y storage medium t y OMM 1 1 data file batch i A single batch data is divided into three files Saving Data Using FUNC Key Operation Only When the Process Type Is Set to Continuous Through FUNC key operation display data event data can be saved to the external storage medium at an arbitrary time after memory start For the operating procedure see section 8 6 Below is the behavior of the DX100P when this operation is executed e When Saving Data at Auto Save Intervals Display Data or Data Length Event Data Saving of the data is repeated at auto save intervals or every data length from the point when data is saved through key operation Example When auto save interval or data length is set to 1 hour Example When auto save interval or data length is set to 1 hour Data saved through key operation 10 00 11 00 12 0012 20 13 20 Time f t f gt 11 20 Save to the external 4 y storage medium The data here is saved Note The save operation using the auto save interval or data length is executed by counting the auto save interval or data length from the last time the data was saved e When Saving Data at Specified Times The operation continues without change after saving the data through key operation Example When data is saved every hour on the hour 15 25 Data saved through key operation Start 13 10 14 00 15 00 16 00 17 00 Tim
143. N Displays the file information Select the sub menu item using the up and down arrow keys Press the DISP ENTER key to display the selected information To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key IM 04L05A01 01E 6 7 uoneiodo siseg l 6 3 Signing Display Data Event Data Operation Log The operation log displays the log of operations from Memory Stop to the next Memory Stop The number of the log displayed on the last line Total number of logs 6812 8858 Time Action User Name Nov 19 10 57 37 Snapshot ABC2001 Operation type Nov 19 10 54 48 AlarmACK ABC2001 R see page 1 35 Nov 19 10 54 41 Manual ABC2001 R Operation information see appendix 5 Date and time when operation was performed Alarm Summary 20 823 Charrel Tare Alarm IN Time Alam QUT Time TI 1 1H Nov 14 08 20 40 Now 14 08 21 09 FI a2 1H Nov 14 08 20 19 Nov 14 08 21 25 FI a1 Nov 14 08 18 53 No 14 08 125 FI a2 2A No 14 08 16 54 Now 14 B8 18 39 T 1H Nov 14 08 14 28 Now 14 08 14 37 Date and time of release Date and time of occurrence Cursor selects the alarm Alarm ACK Summary Name of the user who performed the operation If the alarm display is set to Hold the log of alarm ACK operations is displayed CO20023 Charrel Te AXK Time User Name TI 1 1H Now 14 08 21 34 PEC2001 FI a2 1H Now 14 88 21 42 PEC2001 FI 1 1R Now 14 08 21 38 PEC2201 FI aa2 A Now 14 08 21 45 PEC2001
144. P Server System soft key Displays the system screen Displaying the Details of the Operation Log If you press the ESC key while displaying the operation log the details of the log are displayed as follows Log of calibration correction setting changes during data acquisition Log of the starting of the gradual time correction e Log accompanying erroneous operation and warning messages If you press the ESC key again the screen returns to the operation log Scrolling through the log Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the log Returning to the Operation Screen To return to the operation screen from the log screen or the system screen press the DISP ENTER key to display the screen menu select the desired screen using the up and down arrow keys and then press the DISP ENTER key IM 04L05A01 01E 8 13 suoneisdo Asay 19410 e 8 9 Displaying the Log Screen System Screen Explanation Operation Log For the detail of operation logs see appendix 5 The number of the log displayed on the last line Total number of logs 8012 0065 Time Action User Name PESC Jun 3 11 02 49 Logout BC2001 Jun 83 11 02 41 TRevEnd ABC2 01 tyH Operation type Jun 3 10 53 37 TRevStart ABC2001 Jun 3 16 53 37 TimeChg ABC2001 Jun 3 10 53 05 Errorl58 ABC2001 Jun 3 10 53 05 TimeChg ABC2001 Jun 3 18 51 36 CCSet 6 ABC2001 see page 1 35 Name of the user who performed the operation Operation in
145. Press the Locked ACK soft key The user locked icon is cleared Locked ACK 8 18 IM 04L05A01 01E Chapter 9 Troubleshooting 9 1 A List of Messages Occasionally error codes and messages appear on the screen while using the DX100P The entire list of messages is given below The messages are displayed in the language that you have chosen Errors Related to Parameter Settings e Setting Errors Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section System error Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Incorrect date or time setting See section 5 15 A disabled channel is selected See section 5 3 Communication Interface Manual Incorrect function parameter See section 5 3 Communication Interface Manual The input numerical value exceeds the set range Enter a proper value Incorrect input character string Enter a proper character string Too many characters Enter specified number of characters Incorrect input mode See section 5 1 OoOJoINI OJAJ AJOJN Incorrect input range code See section 5 1 N aik Cannot set an alarm for a skipped channel See section 5 1 N N The upper and lower span limits are equal See section 5 1 N oo The upper and lower scale limits are equal See section 5 1 oo Oo The partial boundary value exceeds the range of the span See section 5 11 wo ak P
146. Rule 2 Ifthe integer section of either value at the end of the scale is less than or equal to one digit the value is displayed as _ _ or 0 L Example 1 If the scale is set to 0 05 to 0 5 the scale display for the upper and lower limits is 0 0 to 0 5 Example 2 If the scale is set to 0 005 to 0 05 the scale display for the upper and lower limits are 0 0 to 0 0 Rule 3 If the integer section of either value at the end of the scale is two digits or three digits the value is displayed with the decimal fraction is discarded Example 3 If the scale is set to 0 1 to 100 0 the scale display for the upper and lower limits is 0 to 100 Rule 4 If the integer section of either value at the end of the scale is greater than or equal to four digits a three digit mantissa and exponent are displayed x10 or x102 for example Example 4 If the scale is set to 10 to 2000 the scale display for the upper and lower limits are 0 to 200 x 10 5 22 IM 04L05A01 01E 5 12 Setting the Scale Division Bar Graph Base Position Bar Graph and Scale Position Trend The number of digits of the scale values can be increased by one digit within Rule 1 For the procedure see section 5 13 Consider the case when the scale marks are between 49 0 and 51 0 using C10 division Normally the decimals of the scale values are truncated according to Rule 3 However if the number of digits is increased by one the values are displayed as follows
147. SC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Note The partial expanded display is turned Off for all channels if the partial expanded display setting use not use in the system mode is changed and stored When the range setting of the channel is set to Skip or when the span width is less than or equal to 1 digit the partial expanded display cannot be specified The box is grayed in this case IM 04L05A01 01E 5 12 Setting the Scale Division Bar Graph Base Position Bar Graph and Scale Position Trend Procedure The scale used on trend and bar graphs can be set When the bar graph is displayed horizontally the base position of the bar graph can be set on each channel by selecting either Normal or Center Normal The left edge or the right edge of the display span depending on which value is smaller Center Position at 50 of the display span For the procedures to set the vertical or horizontal display see section 5 13 The scale display position for each channel can be specified on the trend screen Press the soft key Next Press the soft key 5 Setting on a measurement channel To display the setting screen press the soft key 3 To display the setting screen press the soft key 6 Setting on a computation channel option 1 l First CH ERY Last cu far Zone Lower og Upper oa g
148. Stopped The data in the internal memory can be saved to an external storage medium when data acquisition is stopped This operation can be carried out only by an administrator For the operating procedure see section 5 24 Data That Are Saved The display data event data manual sampled data TLOG data and report data in the internal memory are saved Save Destination Directory see page 1 28 The data saved using this method is saved to the following directory The sequence number of the directory name is incremented by 1 each time the data save operation is carried out The specified directory name A where is a Sequence number Precautions to Be Taken When Using Display Data Files and Event Data Files e Use the display data files and event data files as reference data The login information setup data alarm summary operation log message summary and acknowledge information that exist at the time data save operation from the internal memory is carried out are saved to the display data files and event data files The information may be different from the information when the data was stored by the auto save function The file name in file information is displayed in red To distinguish these files from those saved by the auto save function the file names of these files are displayed in red in the file information see section 8 7 Saving Data via Ethernet The display data event data report data and screen image d
149. T 1H Nov 14 08 16 03 PEC2001 Date and time of alarm ACK operation Message Summary G4 G4 gt Messase Time User Name STOP Nov 14 2001 08 19 50 PEC2001 m Material2 Now 14 2001 08 17 12 FEcC2001 Materiali Now 14 2001 BS 12 24 FEC2001 START Now 14 2001 08 11 47 PeC2001 Cursor selects the message e Recalls the Historical Trend for When the Alarm Occurred Recalls the Historical Trend for When the Message Was Written The operation described here is for the case when alarm summary or message summary is being displayed 5 Move the cursor using the up and down arrow keys and select the alarm or message for which the historical trend is to be displayed 6 Press the DISP ENTER key to display the screen menu 7 Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu TREND HISTORY is selected in the sub menu iZ INFOR di HATION UAVS Displays the historical trend containing IR Nov i4 Ges et a the selected alarm or message 8 Press the DISP ENTER key to display the historical trend To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key 6 8 IM 04L05A01 01E 6 3 Signing Display Data Event Data Basic information Confirming the File Information Select INFORMATION ON from the sub menu and press the DISP ENTER key to display the file information You can switch the file information window using the left and right arrow keys Process 1 88000001 File Name D
150. TLOG sum unit 5 19 Math set3 Rolling average Turn On Off the rolling average Sampling interval 5 20 and the number of samples for the rolling average Math set3 Alarm delay time 5 5 13 Calibration correction Segments for calibration correction 5 21 14 DST Start end times of DST 5 22 15 End End the engineering mode 3 5 16 System Mode Enter the system mode 3 5 The soft key varies depending on optional functions equipped IM 04L05A01 01E 3 9 suoeado uowWwWO0y eo 3 5 Setting the Functions System Mode and Engineering Mode The Menu Screen and Items of the System Mode The menu screen and items of the system mode are as follows Enclosed in parentheses are reference sections thernet System Node System Mode Sy Alarm A D Temperature A Application Memory Admin tool pie AUX Media FIFO Next 2 4 thernet System Hode as Web E Hail 9 16 11 12 Next 3 4 thernet System Mode Application Memory 1 Application 2 Memory 3 Memory and trend Memory timeup JEA 3 System Mode Admin tool 1 Batch system setings 2 Admin settings 3 User settings 4 Login mode settings 1 2 3 4 thernet System Mode Save Load Initialize 1 Save settings 2 Load settings 3 Load Login settings 4 Initialize 1 2 3 4 System Mode System Mode End Next 4 4 System Mode Option 1 Remote 2 Report 3 Timer lt TLOG 4 Syst
151. The computed result will be 1 if the measured value of channel 2 is equal to the measured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be 0 02 NE 03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value of channel 2 is not equal to the measured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be 0 02 GE 03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value of channel 2 is greater than or equal to the measured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be 0 02 LE 03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value of channel 2 is less than or equal to the measured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be 0 Logical Computation The computation is performed using e1 and e2 which are identified as either zero or non zero The types of data that can be used in equations are measured data computed data constants K01 to K12 communication interface data C01 to C12 and the remote control terminal conditions D01 to D08 You can specify a computing equation that performs logical computation on a computing element AND Logical Product Syntax e1 ANDe2 Condition If both e1 and e2 are non 0 the operation results in 1 otherwise in g Status e1 0 e2 0 e1ANDe2 0 e1 0 e2 0 e1ANDe2 0 e1 0 e240 e1ANDe2 0 e14 0 e2 40 e1ANDe2 1 IM 04L05A01 01E 5 35 apo Burseourbuy y ul uoneIn yuo a 5 18 Setting Equations Alarms and Constants for C
152. Trip line 2 dot Grid 16 div Scroll time 5s Scale digit Normal Setting Scale Divisionst Engineering Mode See section 5 12 First CH iy Last cH ar Zone Partial off Lower og Upper 166 Graph Division 4a 34 Bar graph Normal Scale position 1 Setting Display Update Rate Engineering Mode See section 5 6 Time div 35 41 1 Auto save interval 2h 42 2 User key Action None 1 When the display update rate div is 5 min the waveform is updated every 10 s 2 Automatically determined when the type of process 40 is Batch Fixed Setting Header Name of Directory Engineering Mode See section 5 7 Header JEP 44 Directory name P1IDATA 43 Setting Batch Function Engineering Mode See section 5 17 Batch Lot number Use Not Ey 24 Auto increment on ________ 25 Headder 1 flenager ABC2001 28 2 Bupervisor Nne 29 3 Pperator opel 30 Setting Batch Number Lot Number Comment Operation Mode See section 8 1 or 6 2 26 1 27 pes o ooo 31 IM 04L05A01 01E 3 21 suoneado uowwo el 3 6 Entering Numbers and Characters Entering Numbers The operation to enter numbers is used such as when setting the date time and the display span of the input range Window for entering numbers Procedure When the window used to enter the numbers appears enter the value according to the following key op
153. Trip line Position Color 1 88 8 E Red 2 On 20 il Green 3 ort 4 off 1 Group number Select the group number 1 to 6 2 Group name Set the name of the group Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a string Enter the group name up to 16 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see section 3 6 Entering Numbers and Characters 3 CHset Assign measurement computation channels to groups using the same method as step 2 Enter the channel number using two digits Separate each channel with a period e Consecutive channels can be specified using a hyphen Example To set CH1 CH3 CH5 to CH8 to a particular group 01 03 05 08 is entered Note The channels are displayed in the order they are specified on the trend digital bar graph screens One channel can be assigned to multiple groups A channel cannot be assigned twice in the same group IM 04L05A01 01E 5 9 Setting Groups and Trip Lines Explanation 4 On Off Move the cursor to the desired trip line and press the On soft key The Position and Color boxes appear On Use the trip line Off Not use the trip line 5 Position Set the display position of the trip line Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value 1 to 100 and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures
154. URE 1 SIGNATURE 3 Add approval information to Sign1 Add approval information to Sign2 Add approval information to Sign3 IM 04L05A01 01E uoljeiado oiseg l 6 3 Signing Display Data Event Data When Logged in as a User If you are logged in as a user you can sign at the registered authority level only The sub menu Sign1 to Sign3 does not appear 3 Press the DISP ENTER key A confirmation window is displayed To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key 4 Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key while data acquisition is stopped the text appears in red See page 1 30 For data that is saved using keys If the use of the user ID is enabled a window appears for you to enter the user ID Proceed to step 5 If the use of the user ID is disabled a window appears for you to enter the password Proceed to step 6 5 Enter the user ID and press the DISP ENTER key A window appears for you to enter the password Imin d Rate x 6 Enter the password and press the DISP ENTER key A window appears for you to select Pass or Fail Imin d ate Note If you repeat the operation of entering a wrong password and pressing the DISP ENTER key three times the user is invalidated Have the administrator set a default password and reset the password according to Logging in for the First Time 7 Select Pass or Fail using the arrow keys and p
155. VA 90 to 132 VAC or 180 to 250 VAC except P1 model 21 6 to 26 4 VDC AC P1 model 0 to 50 C when using Zip drive 5 to 40 C 20 to 80 RH at 5 to 40 C 10 to 60 Hz 0 2 m s or less Not acceptable 400 A m or less DC and 50 60 Hz Normal mode 50 60 Hz Volt The peak value including the signal must be less than 1 2 times the measuring range TC The peak value including the signal must be less than 1 2 times the measuring thermal electromotive force RTD 50 mV or less Common mode noise 50 60 Hz 250 Vrms AC or less for all ranges Maximum noise voltage between channels 50 60 Hz 250 Vrms AC or less Can be inclined up to 30 deg backward Mounting at an angle away from the perpendicular is not acceptable At least 30 minutes after power on 2000 m or less above sea level With temperature variation of 10 C e 0 1 of rdg 1 digit or less for Volt and TC ranges Excluding the error of reference junction compensation e 0 1 of rdg 2 digit or less for RTD ranges Except P1 model e With variation within 90 to 132 V and 180 to 250 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 digit or less e With variation of 2 Hz from rated power frequency at 100 VAC 0 1 of rdg 1 digit or less P1 model e With variation within 21 6 to 26 4 VDC AC 1 digit or less e With variation of 2 Hz from rated power frequency at 24 VAC 0 1 of rdg 1 digit or less AC 50 60 Hz and DC 400 A m fields 0 1 of rdg 10 digits or less 11 18
156. a Formats of ASCII Files This section describes the data format of the ASCII file The DX100P creates three types of ASCII files the manual sampled data file the report file and the change setting file Data Format of the Manual Sampled Data File The manual sampled data are output in ASCII format using values and strings that are separated by commas The channel tag unit and manual sampled values are not output for channels in which the input range is set to Skip or for which the computation is turned OFF The manual sampled data are appended to the file for each manual sample operation Syntax MANUAL SAMPLE DATA CRLF Model Serial No IIIIIIIIIIIIIIII CRLF File Header HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH CRLF CH TAG ccccececccccccece ceccececceccccccc UNIT uuuuuu uuuuuu yyyy mo dd hh mi ss nnn n nnn n IIIT e I HHH H ccc c uuuuuUu yyyy mo dd hh mi ss nnneeen ceccccecccccccccc CRLF uuuuuu CRLF nnn nCRLF Serial number of the DX100P 16 characters File header 32 characters Channel number or tag name 16 characters Unit 6 characters Date when the setup file is created Time when the setup file is created Measured computed value measured value 8 characters computed value 10 characters File Output Example The following example shows a file that contains manual sampled data from channels 1 2 3 and 4 MANUAL SAMPLE
157. a new file is created For the setting procedures see section 4 7 Note e Up to 16 blocks number of computation start stop operations of TLOG data can be stored to the internal memory When the number of blocks in the internal memory exceeds 16 TLOG data are overwritten even if the number of data sets is less than 400 The number of TLOG data sets in the internal memory can be confirmed on the memory summary see section 1 3 e When there is no medium in the drive at the time when data are supposed to be saved all unsaved data are saved the first time when the interval time expires after the storage medium 1 26 IM 04L05A01 01E 1 4 Measured Computed Data Save Function is reinserted into the drive e A character string can be set as a file header see section 5 7 Report Data Only on Models with the Optional Computation Function M1 A report is created from the time Memory Start is executed to the time Memory Stop is executed The average maximum minimum and sum can be computed for the specified channels at predetermined intervals and the result can be stored to the internal memory e You can select one hour hourly report one day daily report one hour one day hourly and daily report one day one week daily and weekly reports or one day one month daily and monthly reports for the interval The interval time for the report creation 1 hour 1 day 1week or 1 month Memory Start Memor
158. aSSWOord ou eee password invalidation periodic maintenance power COMPUTATION 0 eee eee eee e cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeenees POWEY SUPPLY eee cece eee eee eeeee sees seaeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaes power supply for transmitter eee cece eee eeeeeees 1 58 POWEP SWITCID oesie haana a aaea en akae ANAE 2 4 power terminals seseseesseeeereesrierrnsineirerrerirerrnrinernerinerrsrens 2 5 presence of login users output sseeeseeesrrieerriesrresrn 1 52 protective ground terminal s sesssseesesreerrerrrereerrernsrrere 2 5 R range computation channel range scaling seses reading values using the CUISOF esessssseseerreriereerrrereerreens 7 13 tear PAN nsaria uires eaii Vaea EE Aai 2 5 reference junction COMpensation s 1 4 reflash iirinn wee 1 41 registering an administrator FEGISTCTING USEMS we ceccncececoscacescvccevesncesscvesiecareestenversdeteaeceees 4 12 relational COMPUTATION eee ee eee eee eee eteeeeeneeeeaeenaee 1 43 relative mode a remote Control FUNCTION s sseessesieessesrerieernerrnrrnerenrrnerenrrnne 1 53 remote Control terminal cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 25 remote controller id c ccccceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeaeeeteneeeeeee 3 24 remote input signal 0 0 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeseeeeeeseeeeaes 1 54 removing zip disk replacement periods for Worn parts ceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeee replacing the fuse eeesecsesr
159. ace It is not displayed on the screen For information regarding the communication function of the DX100P see the DX100P DX200P Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L05A01 17E e Errors Related to Engineering Mode Setting System Mode Setting Control and Output Command Execution Code Message 300 Command is too long 301 Too many number of commands delimited with 302 This command has not been defined 303 Data request command can not be enumerated with sub delimiter 350 Command is not permitted to the current user level 351 This command cannot be specified in the current mode 352 The option is not installed 353 This command cannot be specified in the current setting 354 This command is not available during sampling or calculating 360 Output interface must be chosen from Ethernet or Serial 362 There are no data to send NEXT or RESEND 363 All data have already been transferred 367 Password change denied because another user is logged in IM 04L05A01 01E 9 9 Bunooyseqnol el 9 1 A List of Messages e Maintenance and Test Communication Command Errors An English error message is returned via the communication interface It is not displayed on the screen Code Message 390 Command error 391 Delimiter error 392 Parameter error 393 No permission 394 No such connection 395 Use quit to close t
160. age medium and the log of setting change is recorded in the setting change log audit trail function see section 1 5 Note Ifthe file is Damaged the setup data cannot be loaded from the file Ifthe loaded setup data are void check the error log For the procedure for displaying the error log see section 8 9 IM 04L05A01 01E 4 27 apo wa shs oy u UONesNBYUOD 4 12 Loading the Login Information Procedure This operation loads only the login information from the setup file file with PPL extension on the external storage medium and uses it as the login information of the DX100P When this operation is executed the user is logged out Enter the system mode Press the soft key Next Press soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen soft key to display the Load login settings screen Load Login settings Directory File name Time 2661 11 11 20 59 2601 11 11 21 87 2681 11 11 21 14 2661 11 11 20 36 Details 1 Using the up and down arrow keys select the directory root directory or SETO containing the setup file shown in the Directory box A list of files in the selected directory is displayed in the right column 2 Press the right arrow key to move the cursor on to the file list Press the up or down arrow key to select the setup file to be loaded Press the ESC key to cancel the operation and return to the Save Load Initialize menu 3 Press t
161. ain betes 5 42 5 23 Saving loading the Setup Data ee eecceecececeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeeeeseaeeeeeeseaeeseeeeaeesieeenieeseaees 5 43 5 24 Saving the Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium Using Keys 5 45 Basic Operation 6 1 LOGIN OG OUT si sacis es facie tert edhe eo reis ccs a a Sea Sota aah cate a 6 1 6 2 Executing Memory Start Memory Stop eecceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeseeeeaeeeneeesas 6 4 6 3 Signing Display Data Event Data 0 ee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeseeeeaeeeeaeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeeeeereas 6 6 Switching Operation Screens Operations Using the Arrow Keys and DISP ENTER Key 7 1 Displaying and Switching Operation Screens ssesesseeseesieeeeeeeiesinsresinsrnsrnsenserese 7 1 7 2 Using the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens cccceeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeteaeeseeeeeaeeteaeeeaeeneas 7 3 7 3 Using the Overview Screen ecceecceesceceseeeeeeeeaeeeeecaeessaeeeaeeeseeseaeeeseeseaeeseeeseaeeteaeeneetaas 7 8 7 4 Using the Information Screen Alarm Summary Alarm ACK Summary Message Summary and Memory Summary ceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeaeeseeeeeaeetaas 7 9 7 5 Using the Historical Trend erisera aortas diene eet ee 7 12 IM 04L05A01 01E Contents Chapter 8 Other Key Operations Chapter 9 8 1 Setting the Batch Number Lot Number and Comment cccsseceeseneeeseteeeseseersenes 8 1 8 2 Writing Messages Strings Trend
162. al e Dispose the batteries correctly Do not burn or disassemble the batteries e Do not use batteries that are leaking If the battery liquid comes in contact with your hands or face thoroughly wash using water Exemption from Responsibility e YOKOGAWA makes no warranties regarding the product except those stated in the WARRANTY that is provided separately YOKOGAWA assumes no liability to any party for any loss or damage direct or indirect caused by the user or any unpredictable defect of the product IM 04L05A01 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Unpack the box and check the contents before operating the DX100P If some of the contents not correct or missing or if there is physical damage contact the dealer from which you purchased them DX100P Main Unit There is a name plate on the back side of the key panel cover Open the cover and check that the model name and suffix code given on the name plate match those on the order Panel mount type Desktop type MODEL e O SUFFIX YOKOGAWA Made in Japan DAQSTATION DX100P 2 ch DAQSTATION DX100P 4 ch External storage medium Language DAQSTATION DX100P 6 ch DAQSTATION DX100P 12 ch 100 MB Zip disk English deg F DST DAQSIGNIN included Options Alarm output relay 2 relays remote control Alarm output relay 4 re
163. alibration correction setting Display the Admin tool menu see the previous page To display the setting screen press the soft key oOo Number el 1 Sign record Signaturel 2 DE 3 START Free Batch Free STOP Free i Hessage Free i 4 MENU Free i Snapshot Free i USER Free jiMath Free i DISP ENTER Free Save data Free i Ki vat ai Free i Alarm ACK E mail Free iMedia eject Free Other Free 1 Number Login mode number Select a number from 1 to 30 2 Sign record Select from the three sign authority levels Sign1 Sign2 and Sign3 or Off Off Signing to data is not permitted IM 04L05A01 01E 4 13 apo wa shs oy u UONesNBYUOD a 4 4 Registering Users and Setting the Login Function and Electronic Signature Function 3 Key Set whether to enable the operation Free Enable Lock Disable Symbol Operation When Lock Is Specified START STOP MENU USER DISP ENTER The START key does not operate The STOP key does not operate The MENU key does not operate The USER key does not operate The DISP ENTER key does not operate in the operation mode except the key operates on the sign record screen The DISP ENTER key operates in the engineering mode 4 Alarm ACK Media Batch Other Set whether to enable the operation Free Enable Lock Disable Symbol Operation When Lock I
164. alize screen thernet System Node Cink Initialize Kind Initialize contents Clearl System mode settings Settings Measure amp Math data Log data Clear2 Settings Neasure amp Nath data Clear3 Neasure amp Math data Clear 1 Clear 2 Clear 3 1 Select the type of initialization Use the soft keys to select the initialization type form Clear 1 Clear 2 and Clear 3 Press the ESC key to cancel the operation and return to the menu Clear 1 Initializes the setup data of the system mode and engineering mode and clears the measured computed data and logs in the internal memory However the following system mode items the login information are not initialized see section 4 4 e Batch system settings e Administrator settings e User settings e Login mode settings Clear 2 Initializes the setup data of the engineering mode and clears the measured computed data in the internal memory Clear 3 Clears the measured computed data in the internal memory 2 Press the DISP ENTER key A confirmation window is displayed Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key to execute the initialization The user is logged out Note If settings are changed on the DX100P through the Clear 1 or Clear 2 operation the setup file is saved to the external storage medium and the log of the setting change is recorded to the setting change log file Audit trail function see section 1 5 IM 04L05A01 01E 4 29 apo wa shs o
165. ame Time SETIP2 PPL 2001 11 11 20 36 File list SET2P2 PPL 2081 11 11 20 59 SET3P2 PPL 2001 11 11 21 07 Free space 1235 Kbytes Pressing the right arrow key moves the cursor to the file list The list can be scrolled using the arrow keys To move back to the Directory name column press the left arrow key Press the ESC key to return to the Save Load menu screen 8 12 IM 04L05A01 01E 8 9 Displaying the Log Screen System Screen Procedure Display the Log Screen System Screen 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 2 Press the Log soft key The types of logs that can be displayed and the system screen are assigned to the soft keys and displayed Log 3 Press a soft key to display the log or the system screen Operate Setting Error FIP TEESE ED ED Ge Commu E Mail Web Ga E abla Ga EZA 9 469 MEIEN Co ee Operate soft key Displays a log of operations Change soft key Displays a log of setting changes Error soft key Displays a log of error messages FTP soft key Displays a log of file transfers made using the FTP client function Commu soft key Displays a log of communication commands that have been executed E Mail soft key Displays a log of e mail transmission Web soft key Displays a log of operations on the Web screen when the web server function is in use SNTP soft key Displays the Access Log of the SNT
166. ame is Data0 the data is saved to DATA0 A00 on the first key operation and DATAO A01 on the second key operation Note e This operation cannot be carried out if the engineering mode setting is changed but the change has not been applied e Data storage is cancelled when there is no free space on the storage medium If a directory of the same name exists on the storage medium for saving data an error message is displayed and the save operation is terminated data is not saved e You cannot carry out other operations while the data is being saved e If you change the directory name for saving the data the sequence number is reset to 0 IM 04L05A01 01E 5 45 apo Buissourbuy y ul uoneIn yuo a Chapter 6 Basic Operation 6 1 Login Logout Logging in Procedure Logging in for the First Time 1 Press the FUNC key A window appears for you to enter the user name 2 Enter the user name and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures for entering values and strings see section 3 6 Entering Values and Strings If the use of the user ID is enabled a window appears for you to enter the user ID Proceed to step 3 If the use of the user ID is disabled a window appears for you to enter the password Proceed to step 4 ABSREReReG lt BORROeaRee UMW YZ RH al H A Loo 11213 4 5 6 7 8 9 Sp ENT 3 Enter the user ID and press the DISP ENTER key A window appears for you to enter the password
167. and small scale marks are displayed in between the main scale marks Section 5 12 You can select whether or not to display the scale for each channel Grid The specified number of lines are displayed on the waveform display area gt Section 5 13 Turn ON OFF the numerical display section The numerical display section can be turned ON or OFF If the numerical display section is turned OFF the display shows only the waveform and the scale gt Section 7 2 Zone display The waveform of each channel is displayed in its display range zone The waveforms are easier to view because they do not overlap See the explanation of the zone display below gt Section 5 11 Partial expanded display You can expand the important section of the display range See the explanation of the partial expanded display below Sections 4 9 and 5 11 1 8 IM 04L05A01 01E 1 3 Display Function Messages There are the following two types of messages e Preset Messages Messages are set beforehand and recalled and written when necessary Number of messages available 56 messages 8 messages x 7 groups The eight messages of group 7 can be assigned to the USER key and the remote control function R1 option to be written e Free Messages Messages are entered when you need to enter them Preset messages Trend screen Group 1 Stat ERO AE Material 1 100 5 a T 10
168. ara ara 5 14 5 10 Setting the Channel Display Colors Trend Bar Graph ecceeceesteseeeeeeeeteeeeeneeeeeeens 5 16 5 11 Setting Zone Displays Partial Expanded Displays Trend c eeeceeseeeeteeeeeeeeettens 5 17 5 12 Setting the Scale Division Bar Graph Base Position Bar Graph and Scale Position TREN ieee ae eel 5 19 5 13 Setting the Display Direction Background Color Waveform Line Width Trip Line Width Grid Scroll Time and Scale digit ccccscccceeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeseneeescneeesssneeessnsees 5 24 5 14 Setting the Brightness of the Screen and the Backlight Saver Function 006 5 26 5 15 Setting the Date and Time ec eeeceeeeceseeeeeeeeeeseeteaeeceeeeeaeecaeseaeeeaeesaaeeseeeeeesneneeaees 5 27 5 16 Setting the Message String 00 cceeeceseceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseaeeeaeeseaeesaeeseaeeseeeeaeessaeenieeenates 5 28 5 17 Setting the Batch Information ececcceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeseaeeseeeseaeeseeeeeaeess 5 29 5 18 Setting Equations Alarms and Constants for Computation Channels M1 Option 5 30 5 19 Setting the Timer Number and Sum Scale for TLOG Computation M1 Option 5 38 5 20 Setting the Rolling Average M1 Option ccceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeseaeeseeeteatens 5 39 5 21 Setting the Calibration Correction CC1 Option eeceeeeeseeeeeeeeteeseeeeeeeseaeeeeeeteeten 5 40 5 22 Setting the DST sisi oo eed pea ttn i
169. are displayed Type Set the alarm type H Upper limit alarm L Lower limit alarm h Difference upper limit alarm I Difference lower limit alarm R Upper limit on rate of change alarm r Lower limit on rate of change alarm T Delay upper limit alarm t Delay lower limit alarm IM 04L05A01 01E 5 5 apo Buissourbuy y ul uoneIn yuo a 5 2 Setting Alarm Note ____ If you select delay alarm T or t for the alarm type you must set the alarm delay period See section 5 5 4 Value Enter the value at which the alarm is activated Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see section 3 6 Entering Numbers and Characters 5 Rly Set whether or not to activate the output relay On Off When turned ON the output relay number box appears 6 No Set the output relay number For the correspondence between the output relay number and the output relay position see section 2 5 When the alarm output relay option is not installed these settings are void Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key IM 04L05A01 01E 5 3 Setting
170. are four screen brightness settings which can be selected 1 to 8 e The lifetime of the LCD backlight can be extended by automatically dimming the light when there has been no key operation for a certain amount of time The screen will return to the original brightness with a key operation or an alarm occurrence The screen saver is initially disabled Press rw Press the soft key Net Press the soft key 5 Procedure To display the setting screen press the soft key Oom LD Brightness a Saver on Time in Restore KeytAl m POD Setting the Brightness of the Screen 1 Brightness Select the brightness of the screen from 1 to 8 The initial setting is 4 A higher number corresponds to a brighter screen setting Setting the Backlight Saver 2 Saver Select On use the backlight saver or Off not use the backlight saver When On is selected Saver time and Restore boxes are displayed 3 Time Select the time from 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min 80 min and 1 hour If the specified time elapses without any key operation the LCD backlight is automatically dimmed 4 Restore Select the trigger action to restore the original brightness of the screen from Key and Key Alm Key Alarm Key The screen will return to the original brightness with a key operation Key Alm The screen will return to the original brightness with a key operation or an alarm occurrence Confirming Op
171. aries depending on the remaining time Value below i the unit is truncated example displays 1hour even if the time is 1 hour 56 minutes i Number of blocks of data in the internal memory The maximum number of blocks that the internal memory l i can retain is 16 Thus a value less than or equal to 16 i When the number of blocks exceeds 16 the block is i l overwritten from the block with the oldest data i i Maximum number of blocks that the internal memory can retain 16 l Alarm icon see section 1 6 Displayed when any alarm is activated User Locked icon see section 1 5 Displayed when the user is invalidated Car Data acquisition to the due to wrong operations internal memory is stopped Data acquisition to the internal memory is in progress Computation icon M1 option see section 1 7 PA E EEE AEEA E E E E No icon Computation stopped Name of the user logged in see section 1 5 White icon Computation started Screen name or group name Yellow icon Computation dropout occurred E mail icon communication function Displayed when the e mail j i i i Internal memory icon see section 6 2 j transmission is started j i For all channel display on the External Storage mediaiicon trend screen All is displayed Lt The operation cover on the front panel is open Date and time Displayed in yellow while the time ta is being corrected see section 1 10 Dis
172. arks or registered trademarks of their respective holders First edition December 2001 Second edition July 2002 Third edition November 2003 Fourth edition August 2004 All Rights Reserved Copyright 2001 Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM 04L05A01 01E Safety Precautions The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation If the DX100P is used in a manner not specified in this manual the protection provided by the DX100P may be impaired YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements This product is a measurement category II CAT II instrument Mesurement category II CAT II Applies to measuring circuits connected to low voltage installation and electrical instruments supplied with power from fixed equipment such as electric switchboards The DX100P conforms to IEC safety class provided with terminal for protective grounding Installation Category Il and EN61326 1 EMC standard class A use ina commercial industrial or business environment Please use this instrument as a mesurement category II CAT Il instrument This instrument is for indoor use only Symbols The following symbols are used on the DX100P A Handle with care To avoid injury death of personnel or damage to the instrument the operator must refer to the explanation in the User s Manual or Service Manual L Functional ground term
173. artial expansion display is set ON for a SKIPPED channel See section 5 1 wo oa The upper and lower limits of the display band are equal See section 5 11 wo O The lower limit of the display band is greater than the upper limit See section 5 11 wo NJ The display band is narrower than 4 of the entire display See section 5 11 A Incorrect group set character string See section 5 9 iN ry There is no specified input channel Check the number of input channels iN N Exceeded the number of channels which can be set Check the number of input channels P a A channel number cannot repeat in a group See section 5 9 A ol There is no character string saved in the clipboard Copy a character string to the clipboard iN O The character string saved in the clipboard is too long Paste a character string with the specified number of characters 61 There is no channel specified by the MATH expression See section 5 18 62 MATH expression grammar is incorrect See section 5 18 63 MATH expression sequence is incorrect See section 5 18 64 MATH upper and lower span values are equal See section 5 18 70 MATH constant description is incorrect See section 5 18 71 The range of the MATH constant is exceeded See section 5 18 80 This username is already registered See section 4 4
174. at are assigned to the group in the trend screen are displayed The larger the number of scales to be displayed less amount of area there is to display the waveform Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 5 20 IM 04L05A01 01E 5 12 Setting the Scale Division Bar Graph Base Position Bar Graph and Scale Position Trend Explanation Scale Display on the Trend Screen Scale display position On the trend screen the scale for the channels that are assigned to groups can be displayed in 6 different positions see the figure below During trend vertical display see page 7 19 for horizontal display The scale display position is 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 from the top 4 scale division sample 5 scale division sample 6 scale division sample 7 scale division sample Loo 8 scale division sample iti 9 scale division sample pitiiii Lf sbiriit iit ae popil iii iis kieleni zB g 8 4 i Wace 10 scale division sample 4 5 0 1 0 9 x linet ire 2 8 i PL ult TE rr ies ra AIF recon RIAL pO Ere 11 scale division sample 1S 2 12 scale division sample AT Ac OP A rc Pa C10 scale division sample The scale is divided into 4 to 12 se
175. ata Kind Serial No Start Time Start User Name End Time End User Name Header 1 Y1408071 DBD lt DISP gt 12WB24024 Nov 14 2081 08 07 52 ABC2081 Nov 14 2081 08 21 48 ABC2081 Manager ABC2081 2 i Supervisor None 3 Operator opel Sign record Sign record 1 Time Result Comment Sign record 2 Time Result Comment Sign record 3 File name Data type DISP Display data EVENT Event data used for data acquisition Date amp time and the user name at Memory Start Stop Headers Date and time result pass fail comments See page 1 30 Signing Adding Approval Information Note Serial number of the DX100P Comments date and time user name Comment 1 Sample225 User Name ABC201 Time Nov 14 2001 67 57 18 Comment 2 User Name Time Comment 3 User Name Time For data that is saved using keys while data acquisition is stopped the file name and data type appear in red Make sure to confirm the measured computed data and alarm information before signing the data Press the DISP ENTER key to display the screen menu Move the cursor to SIGN RECORDJ using the up and down arrow keys This menu is displayed when the user is assigned a sign authority level When Logged in as an Administrator Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu Select Sign1 Sign2 or Sign3 using the up and down arrow keys SIGNAT
176. ata can be automatically transferred to an FTP server via Ethernet for storage Conversely the DX100P can operate as an FTP server In this case the DX100P is accessed from a PC and the files on the external storage medium can be retrieved for storage For details on these functions see the DX100P DX200P Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L05A01 17E 1 30 IM 04L05A01 01E 1 5 Function for Managing Measured Computed Data Relationship between the Operations on the DX100P and the Function for Managing Data The measured computed data of the DX100P can be managed using the login function batch function audit trail function and electronic signature function The following figure indicates the operations on the DX100P and each of the functions I 1 Operation log record of operations Setting change log record of setting changes and setup file Login function D Login Operation preparation such as changing settings Batch function GB Execute Memory Start by entering the batch lot No Record measured computed data display data or event data see section 1 4 i gt e Batch lot number e Measured computed data e Name of the user who executed Memory Startt Memory Stop Settings cannot be i Setup data while running changed while running e Login information e Operation log e Alarm summary e Message summar Memory Stop gt e Approval information User name
177. ave Display and Save Event soft keys do not appear 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu Either the Save Display soft key or the Save Event soft key is displayed 2 Press the Save Display soft key or the Save Event soft key The unsaved data residing in the internal memory is saved to the external storage medium at the time of the next sampling after the soft key is pressed Display Event Ss Save Display The display data is saved to the external storage medium Save Event The event data is saved to the external storage medium Note When the external storage medium does not have enough space a message Not enough free space on media is displayed and the data are not saved to the external storage medium Change the medium and operate again IM 04L05A01 01E 8 9 suonesado Asay 19410 eo 8 7 Signing Display Event Data Files on the External Storage Medium Procedure This operation is for loading the display data file or event data file on the external storage medium into the DX100P and signing adding approval information Signing is allowed only at the level that has not been signed before sign 1 to 3 Note If the type of process is Batch and a single batch data is made up of multiple files you cannot sign the batch data using the DX100P see page 1 37 Use the DAQSIGNIN that came with the package to sign the data e Ifa single batch data made up of multiple files is
178. ay 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 7day 7day 7day 7day 7day 7day 7day 7 day 10 day 10day 10day 10day 10day 10day 10day 10 day 14day 14day 14day 14day 14day 14day 14 day 31 day 31 day 31 day 31 day 31 day 31 day for DX102P and DX104P only 4 8 IM 04L05A01 01E 4 4 Registering Users and Setting the Login Function and Electronic Signature Function When using the DX100P first set the login function electronic signature function and administrators Log in as the registered administrator to register users See the flow chart on section 3 5 Note The DX100P can be operated without logging in at the time of factory shipment Procedures of Registering Users While Data Acquisition Is in Progress See page 4 15 Setting the Login Function and Electronic Signature Function for the First Time Procedure Enter the system mode To display the menu screen press the soft key Oom Admin tool 1 Batch system setings 2 Admin settings To display the setting screen press the soft key oa Login settings UserID Use Not Use 1 Auto Logout Smin 2 Display change without Login Off 3 Sign record settings Sign record Use Not Use 4 Batch stop sign record On 5 Sign record UserID Use 6 Setting the Conditions for the Login Function 1 User ID Use Not Use Enter an user ID when logging in Not Not use an user ID w
179. cannot be used Auto logout Logged out when there is no key operation for a specified time When logged out Operation of switching the operation screen is possible User identification User name user ID and password are used Combinations of user ID and password that have been used in the past cannot be used Audit trail function Saving of operation log The operation log from the previous Memory Stop to the current Memory Stop is added to the data file Number of operation logs Up to 2000 Saving of setting change log and setup file The log of setting changes is saved to the external storage medium The setup file when settings have been changed is saved to the external storage medium Electronic signature function Adds approval information electronic signature to the display data file or event data file e Information that can be added User name date and time pass fail and comment e User identification User ID and password e Sign authority level One of three authority levels or no authority can be specified e Approval information cannot be added if errors exist in the data e Approval information that has been added cannot be erased or changed Applicable files e When the type of process is set to Batch Data file that is not divided 1 data file batch e When the type of process is set to Continue All data files 11 8 IM 04L05A01 01E 11 5 Specifications of the Function Used to Manage the Data Batch f
180. channel suoneoyioeds Ey Data type Measurement channel Computation channel Display data 4 bytes datum 8 bytes datum Event data 2 bytes datum 4 bytes datum IM 04L05A01 01E 11 3 Data Storage Specifications Maximum sampling count Sampling date and time 8 bytes is attached Data type Maximum sampling count Display data 5 000 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 4 number of computation channels x 8 8 Event data 5 000 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 2 number of computation channels x 4 8 Example of the maximum sampling length In case measurement ch 4 ch computation ch 0 ch Display data approx Display rate A min div es min Sampling interval s 480s Sampling length 115h 24 days 96 days 144 days 289 days 1157 days Event data approx Sampling interval 125 ms 250 ms 1s 5s 30s 120s Sampling length 10h 21h 86h 18 days 108 days 434 days In case measurement ch 6 ch computation ch 0 ch Display data approx Display rate min div 5min 20min 240 min Sampling interval s Sampling length 86h 18days 72 days 108 days 217 days 863 days 10s 40s 480s Event data approx Sampling interval 1s 10s 30 s 60 s 120 s Sampling length 69h 14 days 28 days 86 days 173 days 347 days Manual sampled data Trigger Key operation communication command or remote input signals R1 option Data f
181. cified by the instrument When replacing a fuse turn OFF the power switch and unplug the power cord Never short the fuse holder Do Not Operate in Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a safety hazard Do Not Remove Covers Some areas inside the instrument have high voltages Do not remove the cover if the power supply is connected The cover should be removed by YOKOGAWA s qualified personnel only External Connection Connect the protective grounding before connecting to the item under measurement or control unit Damage to the Protection Using the instrument in a manner not specified in this manual can damage the instrument s protection Safety Precautions in Handling the Batteries Abide by the following precautions in handling the batteries If the batteries are not handled correctly dangerous conditions may result such as the batteries exploding or leaking Insert the batteries according to the polarity indicated on the remote control terminal Use only the specified batteries e Do not mix different types of batteries e Do not mix new and old batteries e Do not short the positive and negative terminals of the batteries e Do not charge the batteries e If the remote control terminal is not going to be used for an extended time remove the batteries from the remote control termin
182. clear the User Locked icon e Clearing the Invalidated User Log in by the Invalidated User 1 The administrator sets the password of the invalidated user to the default password For the operating procedure see section 4 4 2 The invalidated user sets the password according to the procedure Logging in for the First Time Note If the passwords of all administrators are invalidated you can no longer login as an administrator if a user is registered you can still log in as a user Make sure to keep track of passwords to avoid such situation If you find yourself in such situation contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Operation Using the FUNC Key 1 Press the FUNC key to display the FUNC key menu 2 Press the Logout soft key to log out Logging Out Automatically If the auto logout function is enabled see section 4 4 and there is no key operation for the specified time you will be automatically logged out IM 04L05A01 01E uo eado oiseg l 6 2 Executing Memory Start Memory Stop Executing Memory Start Procedure f Press the START key The start screen is displayed Start button Headers 1 to 3 Batch number Lot number Comments 1to 3 ET Entering the Batch Number Lot Number and Comment Perform the following operations as necessary 2 Using the arrow keys move the cursor blue to the batch number lot number or comment 1 2 or 3 box and press the Input soft key Enter th
183. clock will be set to the correct time 192 seconds later 1 56 IM 04L05A01 01E 1 10 Other Functions System Screen The total number of inputs on the DX100P the capacity of the internal memory the communication functions the external storage medium drive the options the MAC address and the firmware version number can be displayed For the operating procedure see section 8 9 Number of measurement channels 1 Number of computation channels ANALOG 1b c MATH 12 MEMORY SAAAAAA Internal memory capacity OPTION RS 232 Optional functions ETHERNET Communication function External storage medium drive REMOTE CONTROLLER ID 2 Remote controller ID 2 PRODUCT HAC address 00 00 64 81 26 F0 _ MAC address Version 4 00 Graphic B89870228 2 091 t Firmware version number 1 When the cramped input terminal is equipped H2 option C is indicated as ANALOG 8 C in this example 2 Displayed when the easy text entry is equipped KB1 and KB2 options Displayed Language The displayed language can be selected from English Japanese German or French For the setting procedure see section 4 9 Daylight Savings Time The DX100P time can be adjusted automatically to Daylight Savings Time if the DX100P is used in a region in which the time is set ahead by 1 hour during the summer season The start and end times of DST are specified as in 12th ho
184. combined into a single file using the DAQSIGNIN that came with the package the DX100P cannot load the file 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 2 Press the Load data soft key to display the display data load or event data load screen Data Load p File name and the date amp of file creation Load display data Directory File name Time 1609031 DBD 2001 11 16 09 25 DATAGE 1609271 DBD 2001 11 16 89 30 DATAG Batch Time Details Batch number lot number Load display data Directory Batch name No Process 1 2A000005 Process 1 000006 Batch Time Details x amp Note When set to save the display data the display data load screen is displayed when set to save the event data the event data load screen is displayed Switching the File Name Display 3 You can change the file name display using the Batch and Time soft keys Batch Displays the file name using the batch number and lot number Time Displays the file name in Mddhhmma DBD display data file or Mddhhmma DBE event data file format and displays the time the file was created For details on Mddhhmma see appendix 3 8 10 IM 04L05A01 01E 8 7 Signing Display Event Data Files on the External Storage Medium Selecting the File 4 The directories in the external storage medium are displayed in the Directory name column Press the up or down arrow key to select the directory
185. cscccececcved sec ce cvateeeicee a cseceevsetenes ceed seteenscauneveiee cesebedvnecenedecnadbasce 10 1 A 10 2 Replacing the USC 2 r r aa E a r Ades oreo ee 10 2 10 3 lt Calibrations ina ae eid eg Le ed coh tient ied dea ae 10 3 10 4 Recommended Replacement Periods for Worn Parts eesseeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeenetereees 10 5 Chapter 11 Specifications TET o Input Specifications 2 2 00 h ee ia ieee eee A 11 1 11 2 Display Specifications wan k ncn pees ele li eae dad a eet 11 3 11 3 Data Storage Specifications cee eecccceceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeeeeseaeeseaeeeaeessaeeeaeessaeeeeeseaeenaae 11 5 11 4 Alarm Function Specifications eccceceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseaeeeeetaee 11 7 11 5 Specifications of the Function Used to Manage the Data eee eee eee 11 8 11 6 Specifications of Communication FUNCTIONS 0 0 00 eee eee eee e eee tee eter rene te teee teeta 11 10 11 7 Specifications of Optional FUNCTIONS 0 ee ecceeeceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeaeeseeeseaeeeeatenas 11 11 11 8 General Specifications 2 0 0 eecceceeececeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeteaeeeaeesaeeeseesaeesseeseaeeseeseaeeeeeeeeas 11 16 11 9 Dimensional DrawingS 2 2 cc ccsczpcedesecseasasteshdacsaces tes aea aae a ea a raie E EAE aE eaa Eais 11 21 Appendix Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings 0 0 eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeteeeeeeeseaeeneeseas App 1 Appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files
186. ct the power supply frequency and select 16 7 ms or 20 ms However the integration time is fixed to 20 ms on P1 models that use the 24 VDC power supply e Because 100 ms is an integer multiple of 16 7 ms and 20 ms this setting can be used to eliminate the power frequency noise for either frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz 100 ms is available on the DX106P and DX112P However when the integration time is 100 ms the scan interval is fixed to 2 s For the setting procedure see section 4 2 IM 04L05A01 01E SUOI OUNY JO MOIAIOAO a 1 3 Display Function Common Items Related to the Display 5 5 TFT Color LCD and the Screen Configuration The DX100P has a 10 4 TFT color LCD 240 by 320 dot resolution The screen consists of the status display section and the data display section m Status display section y Data display section e Status Display Section Displays the displayed screen name date and time or batch number lot number user name internal memory external storage medium usage condition alarm condition and computation condition M1 option For details see page 1 18 e Data Display Section Displays measured computed data using numerical values waveforms bar graphs and so on Shows the setup screen when setting functions The measured values of measurement channels and the computed values of computation channels M1 option of the DX100P including the time information when they are acquired ar
187. ctions as shown in the figure above C10 Scale Division The scale is divided into 10 divisions and the scale values are displayed at 0 30 50 and 70 positions of the scale If 10 scale division is set the scale values are at 0 20 40 60 80 and 100 positions If the scales for two or more channels are specified to the same position the scale for the channel that was assigned first to the group is displayed Example 1 When the channels were assigned to a group in the following order 03 02 01 05 and the scale display positions for channels 3 2 1 and 5 are all set to 1 The scale for channel 3 is displayed at position 1 Vacant positions in between scale assigned positions are void The scales are displayed close together from the display position 1 Example 2 When the channels were assigned to a group in the following order 01 02 03 05 and the scale display position for channels 1 2 3 and 5 are set to positions 1 3 5 and 6 respectively The scales for the channels are actually displayed at positions 1 2 3 and 4 respectively If the scale display position is set to Off the scale is not displayed IM 04L05A01 01E 5 21 apo Burseourbuy y ul uoneIn yuo a 5 12 Setting the Scale Division Bar Graph Base Position Bar Graph and Scale Position Trend e During trend horizontal display The scale display position is 6 5 4 3 2 and 1 from the left
188. d computed data The input scan operation stops when this mode is entered Alarm detection is also disabled The condition of the alarm output relay option retains the condition existing immediately before The DX100P can be configured so that a portion of the settings of these modes can be changed even when data acquisition is in progress see page 3 6 3 4 IM 04L05A01 01E 3 4 Operations in the Operation Mode Note Operations in the operation mode can be executed only when logged in as an administrator or a user that has permission to use the operation see section 1 5 Operations Using the Arrow Keys and the DISP ENTER Key Switches the operation screen such as trend digital and bar graph For the operating procedure see chapter 7 Operations Using the START STOP Key Executes Memory Start Stop For the operating procedure see section 6 2 Operations Using the FUNC Key and Soft Keys of the screen The menu varies depending on the setup information and options Menu Example of the FUNC Key Logout Batch Nessage Hath STOP File List FTPtest Hanual sample Data Load Next 1 4 Math START Save Event Locked ACK Hath reset Save Display Snap Spat Next 2 4 Password E Nail change START Hodbus Log Next 3 4 SNTP E Hail test master Next 4 4 Pressing the FUNC key displays a menu that is assigned to the soft keys at the bottom Menu Reference F
189. d in conjunction with the word WARNING or CAUTION WARNING Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent injury or death to the user CAUTION Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent minor or moderate injury or damage to the instrument Note Provides important information for the proper operation of the instrument Reference an Indicates a reference item Example 3 6 Entering Numbers and Characters Notation Regarding Procedures On pages that describe the operating procedures in Chapter 3 through 8 the following symbols are used to distinguish the procedures from their explanations Represents contents that are displayed on the screen Example Volt 1 Denotes the soft key that is used to make a selection on the engineering and system mode menus Follow the steps indicated with numbers The procedures are given with the premise that the user is carrying out the steps for the first time Depending on the operation not all steps need to be taken Procedure This section describes the setting parameters and the limitations regarding the procedures It does not give a detailed Explanation explanation of the function For detail on the function see chapter 1 viii IM 04L05A01 01E Contents FOLGWOMG MEE E sdstasaacarecscstaaces ccaiditasscsdesaacdeesdebegeate cb asteccdagecseases i Safety Precautions gt seresa erp pias dedinel dike E ne abies aaitene e
190. d into the setting measurement server maintenance test server or FTP server Or there is a user logged in using keys on the DXP administrator or user when attempting to log into the setting function of the setting measurement server Check the login status Status Messages Code Message 500 Execution is complete 501 Please wait a moment 503 Data are being saved to media 504 File is being loaded from media 505 Formatting 506 Memory save to media was interrupted 507 Exchange media to continue the saving operation 508 There is no file or directory 510 Range cannot be changed during sampling or calculating 511 MATH expression cannot be changed during sampling or calculating 512 Because memory save is manual mode FTP is not available 513 Cannot change during calculating 520 Connecting to the line 521 The data file is being transferred 551 FTP test is being executed 553 Review and sign functions cannot be used when the file is divided 554 Signature functions are being executed 555 Login prohibited because software login is active 556 Press FUNC key to login 557 This user is not allowed to change a setting 558 Setting changes are aborted while data is saved 559 This command must be used with LL command 560 Now connecting to SNTP server 561 Now adjusting the time IM 04L05A01 01E 9 11 Bunooys
191. d the user name are shown FI 1 1R Now 16 99 09 29 PEC2001 SFI IR Now 16 69 09 29 PECI on the alarm ACK summary screen Message Summary Procedure Recalling the Historical Trend for When the Message Was Written The operation described here is for the memory summary 1 Move the cursor using the up and down arrow keys and select the message GEG GES gt Messase Time Materiali Nov 16 22001 09 10 47 PEC2001 mb Batch Start Nov 16 2001 09 07 04 FEC2001 ER FEcC2001 START Now 16 2081 09 05 20 User Name Operation type see page 1 14 Select the message 2 Display the historical trend according to the procedure described in Changing the Display The data of the following type is displayed e When configured to acquire the display data to the internal memory Display data e When configured to acquire the event data to the internal memory Event data 7 10 IM 04L05A01 01E 7 4 Using the Information Screen Alarm Summary and Memory Summary Memory Summary Procedure Displaying the Historical Trend for the Data Specified by Memory Summary The operation described here is for the case when the information of display data or event data is displayed in the memory summary 1 Move the cursor using the up and down arrow keys and select the data M SAMPLE DATA 0250 Nw 16 09 43 TLOG DATA 0187100 Nov 16 10 20 REPORT 03740 Nov 16 10 00 SAFLE DATA
192. digital bar graph overview and other screens The detailed information about the alarms is displayed in the alarm summary Alarm Indication Example Overview screen The area corresponding to a channel on which Alarms occurring an alarm is occurring is displayed in red Hold Non Hold of the Alarm Indicator There are two methods in displaying alarms Clears the alarm display when the cause of the alarm is no longer met non hold e Holds the alarm display until the alarm ACK operation is executed hold For the procedure related to setting the alarm indication see section 4 1 Alarm Output Relay AR1 AR2 or A3 option If you are using a model with the optional alarm output relay a contact signal can be generated according to the alarm conditions The following functions can be specified on the alarm output relay For the procedure related to setting the functions see section 4 1 Reflash When multiple alarms are set to one alarm output relay this function notifies the succeeding alarms after the first alarm that causes the relay activation When a succeeding alarm occurs the output relay temporarily turns OFF approximately 500 ms The reflash alarm function is set only to output relays 101 102 and 103 _ji assuming 101 is assigned Channel 1 assuming 101 is assigned Alarm status Channel 2 s i I I i i assuming 101 is assigned L Channel 3 a a l l r I 101 output Alarm
193. display To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key 7 6 IM 04L05A01 01E 7 2 Using the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens Changing the Displayed Group Using the Arrow Keys Procedure Press the right arrow key while displaying the trend digital or bar graph screen to rotate the displayed group from group 1 to group 6 Press the left arrow key to rotate the displayed group in reverse order Switching the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screen Using the Arrow Keys Procedure Press the down arrow key while displaying the trend digital or bar graph screen to switch the screen in the order trend digital bar graph trend and so on Press the up arrow key to switch the screen in reverse order a T Li Trend screen piiitiiis Q ug pti ii T silisili y lvmin 13 3 ptrriitiriil s Digital screen TI 881 08 97 C FI 881 48 28 l min TI 882 32 5 t FI 082 102 3 m3 h H N TI 861 TI 82 FI 81 FI 082 H E L 200 00 150 0 6 00 100 0 8 00 8 0 ci eC E 1min E m3 h 78 19 5 2 72 83 172 5 IM 04L05A01 01E 7 7 D SU9919S uopesado HulyIMS Ao HA LNA dSIG pue s y moy ay Bursn suonesado 7 3 Using the Overview Screen Procedure Changing the Display 1 Press the DISP ENTER key to display the screen menu 2 Press the right arrow key to
194. display the sub menu 3 Select the sub menu item using the up and down arrow keys Sub menu of the overview screen CURSOR OFF Clears the cursor CURSOR ON Displays the cursor r JUMP TO TREND Displays the trend screen of the group containing the channel selected using aa the cursor JUMP TO BAR Displays the bar graph screen of the group containing the channel selected using the cursor ACK ALARM 1 Performs ACK operation against alarm 1 of the channel selected using the cursor H indicates that an unacknowledged upper limit alarm is occurring ACK alarm 2 Performs ACK operation against alarm 2 of the channel selected using the cursor _ ACK alarm 3 Performs ACK operation against alarm 3 of the channel selected using the cursor ACK alarm 4 Performs ACK operation against alarm 4 of the channel selected using the cursor 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to execute the display To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key Releasing Alarm Display Relay Output Option of Individual Alarms Alarm ACK Operation The operation described here is for the screen with the cursor displayed 1 Move the cursor using the arrow keys and select the channel on which the alarm is occurring 2 The alarm display relay output is released by performing the procedure as described in Changing the Display 1 Operation when the use of alarm ACK operation see
195. dress Recipient No Error code see chapter 9 Date time Mail type Web Browser Operation Log The number of the log displayed on the last line Total number of logs 003 003 Time Request No Parameter Jan 31 06 52 38 Key DOWN Jan 31 06 51 21 Screen TREND GROUP 2 l Operation Date time Type Error code see chapter 9 when a code is displayed SNTP Log For the detailed code see chapter 6 in the Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L05A01 17E The number of the log displayed on the last line Total number of logs 805 005 Time No Code Jun 88 2604 00 50 13 SUCCESS Jun 8 2084 00 50 00 294 OVER Jan 64 2008 18 32 26 298 LINK Jan 84 2688 18 31 49 292 HOSTNAME Jan 4 2688 18 38 34 291 TIMEOUT l Detailed code Error code see chapter 9 Date and time of access to the SNTP server System Screen See System Screen in section 1 10 IM 04L05A01 01E 8 15 suonesado Asay 19410 8 10 Changing the Password This operation is for changing the password that is used when logging in Procedure 1 Press the FUNC key The soft key menu is displayed 2 Press the Password change soft key A window appears for you to enter the password currently in use change SS 3 Enter the password in use and press the DISP ENTER key A window appears for you to enter the new password For the procedures for entering strings see section 3 6 Entering Values and Strings h D
196. ds are available in displaying the historical trend of the display data or event data in the internal memory e Display from the alarm summary For the operating procedure see section 7 4 e Display from the message summary For the operating procedure see section 7 4 e Display from the memory summary For the operating procedure see section 7 4 e Recall from the screen menu For the operating procedure see section 7 5 Information Displayed on the Historical Trend Alarms and scales are not displayed on the historical trend display Zoom factor of the time axis Time axis The background color is the opposite of the trend display black or white Wa Screen switch display Display reference position wN the newest data being displayed C Date and time at the display reference position or date and time at the cursor position Cursor Trip line Measured computed values Maximum minimum values at the cursor position over the entire display range Top row Maximum value Top row Maximum value Bottom row Minimum value Bottom row Minimum value Operation on the Historical Trend The following operations can be carried out For the operating procedure see section 7 5 Measured computed values and the date and time at an arbitrary position can be read by moving the cursor using the arrow keys The waveform can be scrolled along the time axis using the the arrow keys The time axis can be expanded or reduced
197. e Save to the external storage medium EN LA The data here The data here is saved is saved Note ____ If the saving of the data to the external storage medium is not complete due to reasons such as insufficient free space the following operation takes place The next time data is saved to the external storage medium unsaved data is also saved If Memory Start is not executed the unsaved data is saved when the operation cover is closed e You cannot execute Memory Start when unsaved data exists IM 04L05A01 01E 1 25 1 4 Measured Computed Data Save Function Manual Sampled Data When the manual sample operation is executed the instantaneous values of all channels excluding the measurement channels that are set to Skip and the computation channels that are turned Off are acquired to the internal memory Manual sample operation is executed v T1 T2 Ta T3 T4 Time gt I Save the display event data to the external storage medium AA The measured computed data of all channels are acquired to the internal memory and saved to the external storage medium Up to 50 data sets can be stored to the internal memory When this number is exceeded data are overwritten from the oldest data The first time manual sample is executed a manual sampled data file is created on the external storage medium The data are appended to this file for each successive manual sample
198. e soft key when setting multiple channels simultaneously the measured value of the first channel are set to all channels 4 True val Press the Input soft key to display a window used to enter the value Enter the value and press DISP ENTER The selectable range for true value is the same as that for the measured value Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Changing the Settings While Data Acquisition Is in Progress To change the calibration correction setting during data acquisition this operation must be enabled in advance In addition a message can be written when the calibration correction setting is changed during data acquisition For these setup procedures see section 4 14 When the calibration correction setting is changed during data acquisition a log for this operation is recorded see appendix 5 IM 04L05A01 01E 5 41 apo Burssourbuy y ul uoneIn yuo a 5 22 Setting the DST Set the DST start time and end time Wfen you use the DST function set the time difference from GMT correctly see section 4 10 Procedure Press the soft key Nex Press the Daylight savings time soft key The setup screen is displayed Daylight savings time Use Not Use _ Start Time Month 2 Day o
199. e batch number lot number or comment 1 2 or 3 and press the DISP ENTER key Batch number Up to 32 characters Lot number Up to 8 digits Comment 1 2 and 3 Up to 32 characters For the procedures for entering values and strings see section 3 6 Entering Values and Strings Starting Operations 3 Note ____ If a user that is not allowed to use Batch operation in login mode settings see section 4 4 is logged in the user cannot enter the batch number lot number and comment Using the arrow keys move the cursor blue to the START button and press the DISP ENTER key The following operations start e Acquisition of the display data or event data to the internal memory The icon of the status display section changes to indicate data acquisition to the internal memory is in progress e Waveform display on the trend screen On models with the computation function M1 option Computation The computation icon appears in the status display section e Report IM 04L05A01 01E 6 2 Executing Memory Start Memory Stop Executing Memory Stop Procedure 1 Press the STOP key A confirmation window below opens Note If there are alarms that have not been acknowledged using the alarm ACK operation when you press the STOP key a message Please acknowledge all active alarms before stopping this record appears Cancel the memory stop operation as necessary see step 3 and perform alarm ACK operation If Memory St
200. e called measured data and computed data respectively Group Display The data displayed on the trend digital and bar graph screens are the data of measurement or computation channels that are assigned to the group Up to 6 channels can be assigned to a single group Up to 6 groups can be registered The groups are common to the trend digital and bar graph screens For the procedure used to assign channels to groups see section 5 9 On the trend digital and bar graph screens the displayed groups can be automatically switched at 5 s 10 s 20 s 30 s or 1 min intervals For the setting procedure see section 5 13 Channel Number or Tag Name Display The channels can be displayed as channel number or tags The setting applies to all channels For the setting procedure see sections 4 9 and 5 3 Alarm Indication Alarms are checked at all times and displayed on the relevant screens using alarm type symbols For details related to setting alarms see sections 4 1 5 2 and 5 18 Difference upper limit alarm h r Delay upper limit alarm T Difference lower limit alarm t Delay lower limit alarm Name Symbol Name Symbol Upper limit alarm H Upper limit on rate of change alarm R Lower limit alarm L Lower limit on rate of change alarm l l IM 04L05A01 01E 1 3 Display Function Trend Screen Displays the waveform of the measured and computed data The direction of the waveform display can be set to horizon
201. e entire display range Upper row Maximum value Lower row Minimum value Measured computed values at the cursor position Upper row Maximum value Lower row Minimum value The following operations can be carried out on the sign record screen e Read the time and measured computed values at the cursor position Scroll the waveforms e Change the range of displayed waveforms For details on the operations above see section 7 5 Using the Historical Trend Expanding Reducing the Time Axis 1 Press the DISP ENTER key to display the screen menu 2 Using the up and down arrow keys move the cursor to TIME AXIS Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu Expand the time axis Reduce the time axis 3 Select ZOOM or ZOOM using the up and down arrow keys 6 6 IM 04L05A01 01E 6 3 Signing Display Data Event Data Press the DISP ENTER key to switch to the waveform display with the time axis expanded or reduced Display data 2 times the trend display to 1 60 minimum Event data Reduction only up to 1 60 minimum The minimum magnification and the factor by which the display can be expanded or reduced with one operation varies depending on the display update rate for the display data and on the sampling interval for the event data To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key Changing the Display Press the DISP ENTER key to display the screen menu Using the u
202. e maximum and minimum values for each sampling interval from among measured data acquired at scan intervals Data format Binary Automatic saving When the type of process is set to Batch Display data Saved to the external storage medium at maximum applicable interval Event data Saved to the external storage medium at maximum applicable interval e When the type of process is set to Continue Display data Saving at specified times periodic saving 10 min to 31days to external storage medium Event data Saving at specified times periodic saving 3 min to 31 days to external storage medium Save operation Cyclic use of the storage area is possible Media FIFO Sampling interval Display data Linked with the waveform display update rate Event data Specified sampling interval Sampling interval for event data A sampling interval that is faster than the scan interval cannot be specified DX102P DX104P Selectable from 125 250 500 ms and 1 2 5 10 30 60 120 300 600 s DX106P DX112P Selectable from 1 2 5 10 30 60 120 300 and 600 s Sampling length The maximum sampling length the maximum data length can be derived from the following equation Maximum sampling length the maximum sampling count x sampling interval Maximum sampling count calculated from internal memory capacity 5 MB types of data data size and number of measurement and computation channels data to be stored Data size per
203. e power specifications type of process 24 VDC power supply for transmitter 11 14 types Of COMPUTATIONS sescseeecsseesseeeeesteesseeeeeeeeeteeeeteen 1 43 24 VDC AC power SUPPIY sssseeeessssetteeeeeeeeeesnnnens 11 13 tyPOS Of USCIS siieeecvienratevineccostnnaimranrsaecnrintacetunrernt 1 32 3 terminal isolated RTD input eee 11 13 alarm ooo ee cece eee eeeeeeeees wee 11 7 alarm output relays 11 11 U calibration correction 11 13 clamped input terminal o n 11 12 unit computation oe ee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeneesaeeeeeaes 5 31 Index 4 IM 04L05A01 01E Index unit scale unit scaling unit handling 0 eee ee ce eee eee e cee eeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeaeetsaeeseeeeaes updating bar graph eee cece eee eee eteeeeeeeeeeaeenees 1 11 updating digital Fe updating OVEFVIEW ee eee eee eeee eee e tee eeeeseeeeseeeenatenees 1 12 updating trend upper limit alarm n upper limit on rate of change alarm sssessesereeereerreree 1 40 USER Key s vssccccc cishniiniend a aa EAREN 1 55 2 4 serlock d ssn ee eree eri yaara 1 33 6 3 user locked condition output USEF locked iCOM a seert ara aa ariana 6 3 8 18 V V rSIOn NUMDED sisisi tirida 1 57 W WAVETOFM TIMES sireisas asaina ididiin 1 8 weekly report 1 48 wiring alarm output 1 2 12 wiring FAlL memory end 1 2 14 wiring input signal oo
204. e setup data on the engineering mode 5 23 SysSave Saving the setup data on the system mode 4 11 Error Error operation Error code Chapter 9 Warning Warning Code Chapter 9 UsrLockACK Clearing the User Locked icon 6 1 8 12 ChgPasswd Changing the password 8 10 ConctClose Being closed by the maintenance test server IMO4L05A01 17E FileGet Getting files IMO4L05A01 17E FilePut Putting files IMO4L05A01 17E MemorySave Executing the data save operation of the internal memory while data 5 24 acquisition is stopped A DCalDisp Entering the AD calibration mode A DCalExec Executing the AD calibration 2 For maintenance purposes The operating procedure is not described in this manual Detailed Display of the Operation Logs CCSet Changing the number of set points for the calibration correction settings while data acquisition is in progress CcSetOl Point 10 gt 16 L New number of set points Number of set points Changing number of set points Channel number CCSet Changing the true values for the calibration correction settings while data acquisition is in progress CCSet01 02 2 000 2 000 gt 2 000 1 999 New Measured value True value Measured value True value Set point Channel number e TRevStart Starting time adjustment while data acquisition is in progress The DX100P s time is ahead TRev start Adjust time 00 08 500 000 microseconds milisecond
205. e soft key menu The Math reset soft key is displayed only when the computation is suspended 2 Pressing the Math reset soft key clears the data from all computation channels Nath reset Operation Using the USER Key The operation is for when the reset function of computation is assigned to the USER key Press the USER key to reset the computation data of all computation channels Clearing the Computation Dropout Display Procedure Explanation When a computation data dropout occurs during computation the computation icon displayed in the status display section turns yellow The computation icon will return to a white color once the computation data dropout has been acknowledged Computation icon Gor a S EA ia 1 Pressing the FUNC key displays the soft key menu The Math ACK soft key is displayed only when a computation data dropout occurs 2 Pressing the Math ACK soft key causes the yellow computation icon in the status display section to return to a white color Computation Data Dropout Computation data dropout occurs when the computation is not completed within the scan interval When this occurs frequently lower the CPU load by reducing the number of computation channels or making the scan interval longer When computation data are acquired to the internal memory the data immediately before a computation drop out are substituted for the computation data at the time of the dropout IM 04L05A01 01E
206. e time retrieved from an SNTP server The time correction operation varies depending on whether data acquisition is progress on the DX100P e When Data Acquisition Is Stopped The time of the DX100P internal clock is changed immediately e When Data Acquisition Is in Progress The time of the DX100P internal clock is gradually corrected While the time is being gradually adjusted the date time in the status display section is displayed in yellow see page 1 18 Note Operation of gradually correcting the time of the internal clock If the time deviation between the time of the DX100P internal clock and the correct time the specified time is within a specified value the time on the DX100P is adjusted by 1 64 s for each second Otherwise the time is not corrected The maximum value of time deviation for changing the time tm in the figure below can be selected in the range of 10 s to 5 min Time specified using keys or Time on retrieved from an SNTP server the DX100P Yy l T tka T Time deviation as tm tm Range in which the time is changed gt Remote signal input time Nearest Time for adjusting to the nearest hour hour y I a I Time deviation tm tm Range in which the time is changed gt Example When changing the time to 12 hours 55 minutes 35 seconds when the internal clock is 12 hours 55 minutes 32 seconds The time deviation of 3 seconds is adjusted by 1 64 s for each second The internal
207. earth terminal otherwise the protection function will be compromised Use a power supply that meets the following conditions Item conditions Rated power supply 100 to 240 VAC Allowable power supply voltage range 90 to 132 or 180 to 264 VAC Rated power supply frequency 50 60 Hz Allowable power supply frequency range 50 60 Hz 2 Maximum power consumption 45 VA 100 V 62 VA 240 V Note Do not use a supply voltage in the range 132 to 180 VAC as this may have adverse effects on the measurement accuracy applies to all models except the ones with the P1 option IM 04L05A01 01E 2 19 d00LXd 94 Bulsp 310499 2 9 Power Supply Wiring e Connection Procedure 1 Check that the power switch of the DX100P is turned OFF 2 Connect the power cord supplied with the DX100P to the power connector on the rear panel of the DX100P 3 Ensure that the power supply voltage is within the maximum rated voltage for the power cord then plug the other end of the power cord into an outlet that meets the conditions below Use only a 3 prong AC outlet with a protective ground terminal Models with H5 Option The wiring procedure of the power supply is the same as that for the panel mount type 2 20 IM 04L05A01 01E Chapter 3 Common Operations 3 1 Turning ON OFF the Power Procedure Turning ON the Power 1 Check the following points before turning ON the power The power cord wires are connected correctly to the
208. easurable Range Volt 20 mV 20 00 to 20 00 mV 60 mV 60 00 to 60 00 mV 200 mV 200 0 to 200 0 mV 2V 2 000 to 2 000 V 6V 6 000 to 6 000 V 20 V 20 00 to 20 00 V 50 V 50 00 to 50 00 V Mode Range Measurable Range C Measurable Range F Note TC R 0 0 to 1760 0 C 32 to 3200 F IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1995 S 0 0 to 1760 0 C 32 to 3200 F IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1995 B 0 0 to 1820 0 C 32 to 3308 F IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1995 K 200 0 to 1370 0 C 328 to 2498 F IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1995 E 200 0 to 800 0 C 328 0 to 1472 0 F IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1995 J 200 0 to 1100 0 C 328 0 to 2012 0 F IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1995 T 200 0 to 400 0 C 328 0 to 752 0 F IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1995 N 0 0 to 1300 0 C 32 to 2372 F IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1995 Ww 0 0 to 2315 0 C 32 to 4199 F W 5 Re W 26 Re Hoskins Mfg Co ASTM E988 L 200 0 to 900 0 C 328 0 to 1652 0 F Fe CuNi DIN 43710 U 200 0 to 400 0 C 328 0 to 752 0 F Cu CuNi DIN 43710 RTD Pt100 200 0 to 600 0 C 328 0 to 1112 0 F JIS 1604 1989 JIS C1606 1997 IEC751 1995 DIN IEC751 1996 JPt100 200 0 to 550 0 C 328 0 to 1022 0 F JIS C1604 1989 JIS C1606 1989 Cul 200 0 to 300 0 C 328 0 to 572 0 F CU10 Q GE1 Cuid based on a particular manufacturer CU2 200 0 to 300 0 C 328 0 to 572 0 F CU10 Q L amp N Cuid based on a particular manufacturer CU3 200 0 to 3
209. ection changes to indicate data acquisition to the internal memory is stopped Cancel Acquisition of the display event data to the internal memory and computation continue If the data acquisition to the internal memory is stopped the display data or event data is saved to the external storage medium If the report function is being used a report data is created and saved to the external storage medium Make sure to back up the saved data If batch stop sign record is specified and a user that has sign authority executes Memory Stop the sign record screen appears Proceed to section 6 3 IM 04L05A01 01E 6 5 uoljeiado oiseg l 6 3 Signing Display Data Event Data Procedure Sign the display data and event data using the sign record screen e If batch stop sign record is specified and a user that has sign authority executes Memory Stop the sign record screen appears The sign record screen appears when the operation to load the display data or event data on the external storage medium see section 8 7 is executed N t eee eee Oe eee SS If the type of process is Batch and a single batch data is divided into multiple files the Batch stop sign record setting is invalid you cannot sign using the DX100P Use the DAQSIGNIN that came with the package to sign the data Display reference position Time at the cursor position or time at the display reference positon 7 Maximum minimum values over th
210. ector tip the temperature at the measurement terminal is displayed When calibrating the DX100P this compensation voltage thermoelectromotive force of 0 C reference corresponding to the input terminal temperature must be subtracted from the output of the standard generator before application As shown in the figure by using the 0 C standard temperature device to compensate the reference junction at 0 C you can input the thermoelectromotive force of 0 C reference from the DC voltage standard and make the calibration 10 4 IM 04L05A01 01E 10 4 Recommended Replacement Periods for Worn Parts To maintain the reliability of the DX100P and to use it in good working order for a long time we recommend periodic replacement of worn parts as preventive maintenance The recommended replacement periods for worn parts are shown in the following table The replacement periods apply when the DX100P is operated under standard operating conditions Please consider the actual operating conditions when determining the actual replacement periods for your DX100P The replacement of the worn parts except the fuse must be conducted by a qualified YOKOGAWA personnel Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer to have the LCD replaced Item Replacement Part Name Part Number Specifications Quantity Period Used Fuse 2 years FUSE A1347EF 250 V 1 A time lag 1 except for P1 model 2 years FUSE A1352EF 250 V 4 A time lag 1 fo
211. ects of using filter Output response fot a step input lt lt 2 5 10s time constant the time it takes to reach 63 2 of the output value Moving Average DX106P and DX112P The input signal of the measurement channel is set to the averaged value of the m most current data points the number of moving averaged data points acquired at the scan interval The number of moving averaged data points can be set in the range 2 to 16 The figure below shows an example indicating the operation of the buffer for the moving average computation when the number of moving averaged data points is set to 5 Buffer data at the Buffer data at the Buffer data at the nth sampling n 1th sampling n 2th sampling New data New data l hea Deleted Deleted l 15 0mV 10 0mV a Aa WN a Integration Time of the A D Converter The DX100P uses an A D converter to convert the sampled analog signal to a digital signal By setting the integration time to match the time period corresponding to one cycle of the power supply or an integer multiple of one cycle the power supply frequency noise can be effectively eliminated The integration time of the A D converter is selected from the table below Model Integration Time of the A D Converter DX102P DX104P Select 16 7 ms 60 Hz 20 ms 50 Hz or Auto DX106P DX112P Select 16 7 ms 60 Hz 20 ms 50 Hz 100 ms or Auto e If Auto is selected the DX100P will automatically dete
212. ecuted waveforms are not updated For the operating procedure see section 6 2 Writing Messages See section 8 2 IM 04L05A01 01E 7 3 Ae HA LNA dSIG pue soy moy ay Bursn suonesado SU9919S uopesado Bulyd yIMS 7 2 Using the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens Explanation Waveform Display during All Channel Display or Group Display In group display the waveforms of channels that are assigned to the group see section 5 9 and are set to display the trend see section 4 3 are displayed In all channel display the waveforms of all channels that are set to display the trend see section 4 3 are displayed on the current group display Condition Trend s Waveform Display Assigned Trend Display Data During Group During All Channel to Groups Storage Specification Display Display Yes Yes Display Display Yes None Don t display Don t display None Yes Don t display Display None None Don t display Don t display 1 Whether or not the channel is assigned to a group 2 Whether or not the channel is set to display the trend and store the data Trend all channel display example vertical display tee 168 100 1 15 A a OP oa Ea O P aa R dY 3 Jamin 163 14a 22 CLELELELLL A CLLGEE LI Lai Except for the waveform all information displayed on the screen corresponds to the group that was being displayed before switching to the all channel display 6B siiis
213. ed solely to saving data be used File Division Manual sampled data files report data files hourly or monthly and setting change log files are often excluded from files that are deleted because the date of creation of these files is updated each time new data is added To prevent this problem these files are divided when the file exceeds 100 KB only when FIFO operation is specified Below are estimations of the amount of data that can be saved to a divided 100 KB file e Manual Sampled Data Files 3525 or 388 samples when the number of channels is 1 or 30 respectively e Report Data Files Hourly and Monthly When the number of report channels is 30 48 weeks for weekly and 48 months for monthly Setting change log files 1161 logs or less e When an Error Occurs on the Storage Medium The following alarms are output when an alarm occurs on the storage medium The external storage medium icon in the status display section changes to an error indication Memory end output is possible using the system relay F1 option An E mail can be transmitted see IM04L05A01 17E The error is output as status information via the communication interface see IMO4L05A01 17E Note If a normal storage medium is detected such as by replacing the storage medium the storage medium error status is cleared IM 04L05A01 01E 1 29 SUO I JIUNY JO M IM AQ E 1 4 Measured Computed Data Save Function Data Storage While Data Acquisition Is
214. edure The following items can be specified Whether to use lot numbers Whether to use the function to increase the lot number by one at Memory Stop Headers 1 to 3 Press mw Twice press the soft key Nex To display the setting screen press the soft key o Batch Lot number Use Not Use 1 Auto increment 0n E 2 Headder 1 73 1 Lot number Use Not If you enter Use the Auto increment box appears Use Use lot numbers Not Not use lot numbers 2 Auto increment of lot numbers Set whether to automatically increase the lot number at Memory Stop as the lot number of the next batch On Automatically increase the lot number by 1 Off Do not change the lot number Note The lot number after 99999999 is 0 3 Headers 1 2 3 Set the header comment for the display data file and the event data file Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter the string Enter the header string up to 64 characters and press DISP ENTER For the procedures related to entering strings see section 3 6 Entering Values and Strings Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key IM 04L05A01 01E 5 29 apo Buissourbuy y ul uoneIn yuo a 5 18 Setting Equatio
215. ee xi lease a at ii Checking the Contents of the Package cescceeseeeseeeeneeseeeeeaeeseaeeeaeesaeenaeeseaeesaeeeeaeeseeseaeeseeeeas iv How to Use this Manual sosiaa y a aa aea he a ap T eat a Sen aAa aa aae KE AE eaaa NEEE vii Chapter 1 Overview of Functions 1 1 Overview of the DXT OOP nsii ech ieee a eee ee alerts 1 1 1 2 Functions of the Input Section eceeecceceeeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeesaeeeeaeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeesaeeseaeesieeeeaeeeaas 1 2 1 3 Display FUNCION suit center esi aiid A ail aoa eee ate 1 6 1 4 Measured Computed Data Save FUNCTION cceeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeseeeeeeeseeeeeaees 1 20 1 5 Function for Managing Measured Computed Data cecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaees 1 31 Te Alam PUA iO e a aa aa aa r aa ae a aa aaa E aera nE aaRS 1 39 1 7 Computation Function and Report Function M1 Option ecceeseseeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 1 43 1 8 FAIL Memory End Output Function F1 Option cecceeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeeeenaees 1 51 1 9 Remote Control Function R1 Option eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeaeeseeeeaeesseeeeeeeeeeeeaees 1 53 Oy Other FUNCIONS i ts5 ois AATE EAA EN 1 55 Chapter 2 Before Using the DX100P 2 1 Precautions on the Use of the DX100P eeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeenaeees 2 1 2 2 Names of Parts and FUNCTIONS ceseeeeseeeesneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaneeeeaeeeeeaaeeseaaeeeeeaeeeeeneeereneeees 2 3 2 3 Installing t
216. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenee data acquisition event data cceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees data acquisition manual sampled data se data acquisition report data oo eee ceeeeneeeeeeeeees data acquisition TLOG data c cccceeecseeeeeeteeeteeeeees data formats of ASCII files a data length ic siceccwescrsicevscs ccvecnyeces sucveccvars conestwsstvarecvectcaveeebeses data save destination directory cc eee cee eeeeeeeeeees 1 23 data storage while data acquisition is stopped 1 30 data lV PO sierran an aaeeea aaar aa SEERNES 1 20 App 15 data used in computation o oo eee eee eeee tee teeeeeee 1 43 daylight savings time a DC Voltage erani aha adnaniiAtietinann default PASSWOIE wx scccscevcswesecvecevesectsritedsesaesevecaedssenedterveceedae delay lower limit alarm delay upper limit alarm eee cece eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeteaeees 1 39 detailed display of the operation logs eee App 19 IM 04L05A01 01E Index 1 Index details of the operation log difference cceceeeeessseeees difference lower limit alarm difference upper limit alarm oe eeeeeeeeseeeesteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaee 1 40 digital input digital Screen ices escacemnhestaracaveve leave acauareiete 1 10 7 5 digits of the scale values 0 eee cece eee eee eeee eee eteeeeeee 5 23 dimensional drawings 3 display conditions of the LOD sssssssssererrsrerreree 1 19 display direction bar graph
217. el mount type see Panel Cutout in section 11 9 Dimensional Drawings For the desktop type a space of 50 mm or more from the right left and top surface of the DX100P is recommended Minimum mechanical vibrations Choose an installation location with the minimum mechanical vibration Horizontal Install the DX100P horizontally However the DX100P can be inclined up to 30 degrees backwards for panel mounting Note Condensation may occur if the DX100P is moved to another place where both the ambient temperature and humidity are higher or if the temperature changes rapidly In addition measurement errors will result when using thermocouples In this case let the DX100P adjust to the new environment for at least one hour before using it The lifetime of the LCD may be shortened if the DX100P is used in a high temperature environment over a long period of time It is recommended that the backlight brightness of the LCD be set low when the DX100P is installed in a relatively hot environment 40 C or higher For setting the LCD brightness see section 5 14 Do not install the DX100P in the following places Outdoors In direct sunlight or near heat sources Install the DX100P in a place with small temperature fluctuations near room temperature 23 C Placing the DX100P in direct sunlight or near heat sources can cause adverse effects on the internal circuitry Where an excessive amount of soot steam moisture dust or
218. elow When the maximum number is exceeded the information is overwritten from the oldest information Therefore if the alarm information message information or operation log exceeds its maximum number before the display data event data is saved to the external storage medium the overwritten information is not stored to the display data event data file Alarm information 240 max Message information 250 max Operation log 2000 max Data Save Destination Directory See Page 1 28 You can specify the name of the save destination directory on the external storage medium up to 8 alphanumeric characters Initial value is DATAO see section 5 7 Display data event data manual sample data TLOG data report data and screen image data files are saved to this directory Note ____ Back up the data on the external storage medium IM 04L05A01 01E 1 23 SUOI DUNY JO M Q a 1 4 Measured Computed Data Save Function Auto Save The display data event data in the internal memory is saved automatically to the external storage medium according to the timing shown below For the procedure see section 4 3 e Every interval indicated below e Display data Auto save interval 10 minutes to 31 days see section 5 6 Fixed to the maximum selectable interval if the process type is set to Batch e Event data Data length 3 minutes to 31 days see section 4 3 Fixed to the maximum selectable data length if the process type i
219. em relay HEER 3 4 3 10 IM 04L05A01 01E 3 5 Setting the Functions System Mode and Engineering Mode Soft key Settings in the system mode Ref Title Item section 1 Alarm Reflash alarm 4 1 AND operation of alarm output relays Energize de energize alarm output relays Hold non hold alarm output relays Hold non hold alarm displays Rate of change alarm interval Turn On Off the alarm hysteresis 2 A D Integration time of the A D converter 4 2 Scan interval Burn out Off Up Down Reference junction compensation internal or external compensation voltage when using external Temperature Temperature unit 4 2 3 Application Memory 3 1 Application Type of process 4 3 Whether to clear the displayed waveform at Memory Start 3 2 Memory Save method to the external storage medium 4 3 Type of data to be acquired Event data e Sampling interval e Data length file size 3 3 Memory amp trend Measurement channels to acquire data display the 4 3 waveform Computation channels to acquire data display the waveform Memory timeup Date and time to save data 4 3 4 Admin tool 4 1 Batch system settings Login settings 4 4 e Use Not use user ID e Auto logout On Off e Enable Disable screen change operation while logged out Sign record settings e Use Not use electronic signature function e Sign at Memory Stop On Off e Use Not use user ID when signing 4 2 Admin settings Registration
220. ement accuracy applies to all models except the ones with the P1 option 2 18 IM 04L05A01 01E 2 9 Power Supply Wiring Wiring Procedure 1 Turn OFF the power switch of the DX100P and remove the transparent power terminal cover 2 Connect the power supply wires and the protective ground wire to the power terminals except for P1 model for P1 model 24V DC 30VA MAX Sovea 62VA MAX 24V AC 50 80H245VA MAX L N L We G 3 Replace the power terminal cover and fasten it with screws For the Desktop Type Models with H5D H5F H5R or H5J Option e Precautions to Be Taken When Wiring the Power Supply To prevent electric shock and damage to the DX100P observe the following warnings A WARNING Before connecting the power cord ensure that the power supply voltage matches the voltage rating for the instrument and that it is within the maximum rated voltage for the power cord itself e Confirm that the power is turned OFF before connecting the power cord To prevent electric shock and the possibility of fire use only the power cord for the DX100P that is supplied by YOKOGAWA e Always use protective earth terminal to prevent electric shock Connect the power cord of the DX100P to a three pole power outlet that has a protective earth terminal e Never use an extension cord that does not have protective
221. emote Coniroll Terminal Troubleshooting 1 The DX100P does not react at all when you try to control it using the remote control terminal Check the voltage and the polarity of the batteries e Check that the ID number of the remote control terminal matches the remote controller ID of the DX100P that you are trying to control 2 The DX100P that could be controlled before cannot be controlled e Ifthe remote control terminal is in the ID number setup mode condition in which the ID key is pressed once the DX100P cannot be controlled using the remote control terminal if none of the keys on the remote control terminal is pressed for 8 s the remote control terminal automatically exits from the ID number setup mode e Get closer to the DX100P In addition control the DX100P in front of the light receiving section e Replace the batteries with new ones Do not allow strong light to hit the light receiving section of the DX100P Move magnetic field sources such as transceivers away from the system e Clean the infrared signal output section of the remote control terminal or the light receiving section on the DX100P e Check whether the DX100P is in a condition that allows the operation and start from an operation that can be performed 3 28 IM 04L05A01 01E Chapter 4 Configuration in the System Mode 4 1 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function For the detail of the auxiliary alarm function see section 1 6 Procedure
222. emote control function R1 option Explanation Alarm Indication The alarm condition can be confirmed with the alarm icon in the status display section and the alarm indication on the operation screen such as the trend screen The indicator pattern varies depending on the hold non hold setting see section 1 6 For an example the alarm icon on the status display section is explained below e The Alarm Icon in the Status Display Section WS BED oe 3 EE Aarm icon Non hold Hold Alarm ACK Alarm ACK Occurrence Alarm i i Release i No Blinks No No Blinks Blinks No No Blinks Red No Alarm icon icon inred icon icon inred ingreen icon icon inred icon icon Alarm Output Relay For the description see Hold Non Hold Operation of the Alarm Output Relay in section 1 6 Note If the same alarm occurs before performing the alarm ACK operation The same alarm is acknowledged through a single alarm ACK operation Alarm ACK Occurrence j Alarm i Release gt Two alarms are acknowledged by an alarm ACK operation Alarm information of each alarm is recorded in the alarm summary IM 04L05A01 01E 8 17 suoneisdo Asy 198410 cy 8 12 Clearing the User Locked Icon Clears the user locked icon A on the status display section You the can clear the icon when you logged in as a registered administrator Procedure 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 2
223. en see section 7 3 Tag Channel no Cursor The area corresponding to a channel on which an alarm is occurring is displayed in red Alarms occuring Measured computed value Updating of the Numerical Display Measured computed values are updated every second However when the scan interval on the DX106P DX112P is 2 s the update rate is also 2 s Alarm Indication The display in the channel display area and channel No tag name when an alarm occurs on any of the channels varies depending on the hold non hold setting of alarm indication see section 1 6 as follows Non hold Hold Alarm ACK Alarm ACK Occurrence Alarm Release Tag channel Area corres Green Red Green ponding to a channel When all alarms occurred from the channel are acknowledged by the alarm ACK operations A list of the most recent alarms can be displayed Up to 240 incidents can be stored to the internal memory When this number is exceeded data are overwritten from the oldest data By scrolling the screen using arrow keys the alarms stored in the internal memory can be displayed By selecting an alarm from the list using arrow keys the historical trend of the display data or event data containing the alarm can be recalled For a description on the historical trend display see Historical Trend in this section For the operating procedure see section 7 4 IM 04L05A01 01E 1 3 Display Function Number of the alarm
224. en the value is below 999999 9 SUM Sum value e When all data are computation errors or Blank computation overflow e When the sum value exceeds 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 e When the sum value is below 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 IM 04L05A01 01E App 13 xipueddy Ey Appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files Data Format of Setting Change Log File The log of setting changes is output using numerical values and strings in ASCII format delimited by commas Syntax Setting Change Log File CRLF File Header hhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh CRLF CRLF Date Time No File Name Operation User Name Changed Part CRLF yyyy mo dd hh mi ss nnnnnnnnnn ffffffff PPL ppp uuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuu ccc CRLF dii eeei Serial number of the DX100P 16 characters max hhh h File header 32 characters max yyyy mo dd__ Date the setting is changed hh mi ss Time the setting is changed nnn n A number appended in order of occurrence 10 digits fff f Name of he setup file 8 characters ppp Operation type KEY Key operation MSR via the Ethernet communications the setting function of the setting measurement server SRL via the serial communications uuu u Name of the user who changed the settings 20 characters max ccc Location of the setting change Eng Engineering mode settings Sys System mode settings excluding Login information Eng Sys Engineering mode and System mode se
225. ending on the specification e Model DX1 xx 2 Zip disk e Model DX1 xx 3 Flash memory card For the handling procedure of the storage medium see section 2 1 Inserting the Storage Medium 1 Open the front cover by pressing down on the knob that is located in the center of the upper section of the cover and pulling forward Insert the medium into the drive until a click is heard Zip disk Flash memory card 2 When the power switch is turned ON closing the front cover causes the DX100P to detect the existence of an external storage medium in the drive If the storage medium is detected an external storage medium icon is displayed in the status display section of the screen External storage medium icon c gt e EAC Note Keep the front cover closed during operation except when accessing the power switch and the external storage medium This will protect the storage medium and the drive from foreign particles such as dust Removing the Storage Medium Floppy disks and flash memory cards can be removed from the drive regardless of whether the DX100P is turned ON or OFF Zip disks cannot be removed when the DX100P is turned OFF 1 Check that the storage medium is not being accessed Note The access indictor is lit while the storage medium is being accessed A message Data are being saved to the medium is displayed while measured computed data are being saved to the medium IM 04L05A01 01E 3 2 Inserting Re
226. eneeeeenaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeaeeeesaeeeseeeeeeeaeetennees 4 28 4 13 Clearing the Data in the Internal Memory and Initializing the Setup Data 0 4 29 4 14 Setting Items That Are Allowed to Be Changed While Data Acquisition Is in Progress 4 30 4 15 Setting the Time Deviation Limit for Time Correction eccecceeeseeeneeteeeeeeeeseteeeeeeeetens 4 31 4 16 Using the Storage Area of the External Storage Medium Cyclically FIFO Operation of the Storage Media ecceeecesseeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeneeseeeseaeessaeeeeeeeatens 4 32 Configuration in the Engineering Mode 5 1 Setting Measuring RANGe cceeeeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeceaeeeaeessaeeeaeeseeseseeseaeeeaeeteaeenseeteaees 5 1 5 2 Setting Alarm skinhead 5 5 5 3 Setting Tag Names c ricseits alee ern ln tieneariene eee 5 7 5 4 Setting Input Filter and Moving Average cecceeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeteaeeseeseaeeseeeeeaeeeaas 5 8 5 5 Setting the Alarm Delay Period eeecee cee eects cee e tee tee stan tees taeeeae teat sae seaetaeseaeseeeeaeeas 5 9 5 6 Setting the Display Update Rate and Auto Save Interval cecceeseseeeeeeeeteeeeeneeeeeeens 5 10 5 7 Setting the File Header and Directory Name cecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseaeeeeeeteaeeneeeenetens 5 12 5 8 Assigning an Action to the USER Key 0 0 0 cece teen teen tect ee tee eeaesaeeeaeseeeeaeenaenae 5 13 5 9 Setting Groups and Trip Eines i re tieien ieren aaar ar aa a aaaea a
227. eqnol el 9 2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart Cautions Code Message Ref section 600 Measured data and Settings have been initialized See section 4 13 601 Measured data have been initialized See sections 4 13 and 3 5 610 This user name is already registered See section 4 4 611 There is no user who can enter to the SETUP mode 612 Please acknowledge all active alarms before stopping this record See section 8 11 613 You can t sign this record because of being made by memory time up See sections 1 4 and 1 5 614 Calibration settings are reset because of range setting change See sections 5 21 615 Setting changes are aborted while data is saved See section 3 4 System Errors Servicing is required when a system error occurs dealer for repairs Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA Code Message 901 ROM failure 902 RAM failure 910 A D memory failure for all input channels 911 Channel 1 A D memory failure 912 Channel 2 A D memory failure 913 Channel 3 A D memory failure 914 Channel 4 A D memory failure 921 Channel 1 A D calibration value error 922 Channel 2 A D calibration value error 923 Channel 3 A D calibration value error 924 Channel 4 A D calibration value error 930 Memory acquisition failure 940 The Ethernet module is down 9 12 IM 04L05A01 01E 9 2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart Nothing is displayed Is the power on Does the
228. er String and Details HOSTNAME Failed the DNS lookup search the IP address corresponding to the host name Check the DNS setting and the destination host name TCPIP Internal processing error UNREACH Failed to connect to a control connection server Check the address setting and that the server is running OOBINLINE Internal processing error NAME Internal processing error CTRL The control connection does not exist Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time period IAC Failed to respond in the TELNET sequence Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time period ECHO Failed to transmit data on the control connection Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time period REPLY Failed to receive data on the control connection Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time period SERVER The server is not in a condition to provide the service Check that the server is in a condition in which service can be provided IM 04L05A01 01E 9 5 Bunooyseqnol el 9 1 A List of Messages Code Message 283 FTP command was not accepted Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 283 Character String and Details USER Failed user name verification Check the user name se
229. er parameters 6V 20V 50V Upper lower limits of span TC R S B K E J T N w L U RTD PT JPT Other parameters Upper lower limits of span Scale Volt 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV 2V Other parameters 6V 20V 50V Upper lower limits of span Upper lower limits of scale TC R S B K E J T N w L U RTD PT JPT DI Level Cont Unit Character string Delta Volt 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV 2V Other parameters 6V 20V 50V Upper lower limits of span TC R S B K E J T N w L U RTD PT JPT DI Level Cont Ref CH Up to model types DI Level Cont Other parameters Upper lower limits of span Sqrt 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV 2V Other parameters Upper lower limits of span 6V 20V 50V Upper lower limits of scale Unit Character string Skip Alarm On Off On Type H L h l R r t Value Numerical value Relay On Off On Off Number 101 to 106 Up to model types Tag Tag Character string Initial setting is all space Moving average Count 2 3 4 DX106P DX112P 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Filter off 2s 5s 10s DX102P DX104P Alarm delay time 1 to 3600 s 10s e Numerical value Trend Save Time div 15s 30 s imin 2 min 15 s and 30 s are for DX102P and interval 5 min 10 min 15 min 20 min DX104P only 3 30 min ih 2h 4h 3 10h 2 Auto save interval 10 min to 31 days La Up to other parameters set e Fixed when Batch process is set User key Action Alarm ACK Math Math rst M sample Messsage 1 Message 2 Message 3 Message 4 Message 5 Message6 Message 7 Message 8 Snapshot IM 0
230. eration To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 5 26 IM 04L05A01 01E 5 15 Setting the Date and Time Procedure Explanation Set the date and time on the internal clock of the DX100P Note When using the login function only the administrator can set the date time Press When data acquisition is stopped Press the soft key Next To display the window for the date and time setting press the soft key 8 When data acquisition is in progress Press the Time soft key A window used to set the time appears 4705 27 09 11 58 Number input keypad Pressing the Input soft key displays a cursor on the text box Enter the date and time For the procedures related to entering numbers see section 3 6 Entering Numbers and Characters Applying New Date and Time Press the DISP ENTER key to apply the settings and close the window To cancel the settings and close the window press the ESC key Selectable Range of Date Time You can set the date time in the range of 0 hour 0 minute 0 second of January 1 1980 to 14 hour 0 minute 0 second of January 18 2038 Time Correction Operation The time correction operation varies depending on whether data acquisition is in progress For a description of the operation see section 1 10
231. eration and sign them see section 8 7 IM 04L05A01 01E 1 37 SUOI OUNY JO M Q E 1 5 Function for Managing Measured Computed Data User That Can Sign and Sign Authority Level Logged in user can sign the files However users without sign authority cannot sign Three different authority levels of signs can be placed on a single display data event data file Signi Sign2 and Sign3 You can assign meanings to Sign1 Sign2 and Sign3 For example Signi Sign2 and Sign3 can be assigned to the operator the quality control personnel and the manager respectively The administrator can sign at all authority levels Each user is assigned a sign authority level by the administrator Users can sign using the assigned authority level However users without sign authority level can be specified Sign at the same authority level is allowed once Confirming the Data When signing files the following information can be confirmed on the sign record screen Measured computed values and waveforms File information batch number lot number serial number of the DX100P Memory Start stop time operation user name header string comment and sign record information For a display example see section 6 3 Operation log for a display example see section 6 3 Alarm summary for a display example see Alarm Summary in section 1 3 Alarm ACK summary for a display example see Alarm ACK Summary in section 1 3 Message su
232. erations Cursor blue Shifts the cursor To shift the cursor to the left or right select lt or gt using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key To confirm the number entered select ENT using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key To enter a number select the number using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Minus sign Sp Space 3 22 IM 04L05A01 01E 3 6 Entering Numbers and Characters Entering Characters Used to set tag names set message strings set or enter passwords Window for entering numbers h DEDBRRRDG KLM NOP Q R S T UW KX yz ea PAROMMe a3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 Sp Insert Overwrite Selected character type Procedure When the window used to enter the string appears enter the characters according to the following key operations Cursor blue Shifts the cursor Select the character using the arrow keys E and press the DISP ENTER key Ae EEE ET LA To shift the cursor to the left or right select lt or gt Py auenudeeaa using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 7 9 0 1123 JE To confirm the character entered select ENT using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Displays the selection Displays the selection EREA Ins soft key Selects insert or overwrite Over Overwrites the cursor position Ins Inserts at the cursor position Bs soft key Deletes the character to the left of the cu
233. erations All operations Login method You can select from login only using keys or login using keys and via communications ID information User name up to 20 alphanumeric characters User ID you can specify whether to use the user ID Up to 8 alphanumeric characters Password You can set the password expiration 6 to 8 alphanumeric characters Note At least one administrator must be registered to use the login function If there is no administrator registered the login function is disabled the DX100P can be operated without logging in In addition the electronic signature function cannot be used 1 32 IM 04L05A01 01E 1 5 Function for Managing Measured Computed Data User Users are registered by the administrator Item Description Number of users 90 that can be registered Range of operations Operations in the system mode is prohibited Each user is allowed to perform specific operations that have been assigned Possible operations are shown below e Sign record operation START key operation STOP key operation MENU key operation USER key operation DISP ENTER key operation Alarm ACK operation on the overview screen USER key Zip disk eject operation for models with the Zip drive Batch number lot number write operation comment write operation FUNC key e Message write operation FUNC key USER key Snapshot operation FUNC key USER key
234. erminal for terminals 1 through 8 Option Terminal 3 Replace the terminal cover and fasten it with screws Note Use shielded wires for the remote control wires to reduce the effects of noise Connect the shield to the ground terminal of the DX100P Input Specifications Item Specification Input signal Voltage free dry contact open collector TTL or transistor Input conditions ON voltage Less than or equal to 0 5 V 30 mA DC Leakage current in the OFF state No more than 0 25 mA Signal duration 250 ms minimum Input type Photocoupler isolation one side common Internal isolated power source 5 V 5 Dielectric strength 500 VDC for one minute between input terminals and the ground terminal For the control actions and setting procedures see sections 1 9 and 4 5 respectively IM 04L05A01 01E 2 15 d00LXA 24 usn 310439 2 8 24 VDC Transmitter Power Supply Wiring TPS2 TPS4 Option A WARNING To prevent electric shock ensure the main power supply is turned OFF AN CAUTION e Never short circuit the power supply terminals or apply an external voltage otherwise damage to the DX100P may result e Do not use current that exceeds the maximum output current 25 mADC This may cause damage to the DX100P e To prevent fire use signal wires having a temperature rating of 70 C or more Wiring Diagram Arrange the wires as shown
235. ers and Setting the Login Function and Electronic Signature Function Registering Users Enter the system mode To display the menu screen press the soft key oOo Admin tool 1 Batch system setings 2 Admin settings 3 User settings 4 Login mode settings To display the User number screen press the soft key a User number 1 81 38 2 31 68 3 61 98 To display the setting screen press the soft key ot ox or 3 User settings Number 5 1 Login method Kes D 2 User name 3 User ID 4 Password R222 5 Password expire Off 6 Login mode No 1 7 Calibration correction set Not 8 1 Number Number used to identify the user Select a number from 1 to 30 31 to 60 or 61 to 90 2 Login method Off Disables the user Key Enables to login through key operations on the DX100P Com Enables to login via communications Key Com Enables to login through key operations on the DX100P and via communications 3 User name See the section User name in Registering an Administrator 4 User ID See the section User ID in Registering an Administrator 5 Password See the section Password in Registering an Administrator 6 Password expire See the section Password expire in Registering an Administrator 7 Login mode number Set the number 1 to 30 of the login mode to be applied The login mode is set in the section followed IM 04L05A01 01E 4 4 Regi
236. ervice 292 Incorrect SNTP server setting Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 292 Character String and Details HOSTNAME Failed to specify the IP address from a hostname using the DNS Check the settings for DNS and the name of the SNTP server TCPIP Internal processing error 293 Invalid SNTP server reply Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 293 Character String and Details SEND The DXP s IP address has not been specified correctly Check the IP address BROKEN Access to the SNTP server manually several times If this error occurs check the SNTP server 294 No time correction because excess time deviation with SNTP server Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 294 Character String and Details OVER This error occurs when a periodic time adjustment does not operate because the time deviation between the time of the DXP internal clock and the SNTP server exceeds ten minutes Check the time on the SNTP server 1 Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer 2 These errors may occur if the network experiences trouble during the data transmission bad cable connection duplicate addresses network equipment failure 9 8 IM 04L05A01 01E 9 1 A List of Messages Communication Errors An English error message is returned via the communication interf
237. es 1 15 7 11 memory tiMCUDP 0 0 eee eee eee eee eeceee teat tees eeeeeeeeeeneees 1 24 4 7 menu engineering mode eee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 8 menu system mode 3 10 MENU Ke yieen nee iii uel eet arn tae 2 4 IMOSSAQO aienea e A E EE AREE aa 1 8 1 9 message SUMMATY s sssssssssssinsenreeirnssrrnsernrerinnnsennne 1 14 7 10 model sereen i monthly report moving average N number Of alarmS 00 eee seeeeseseeeeeeeseseeseeeseseesseneneeesaes 1 39 number of bytes per channel 0 numerical display computation channel numerical display measurement channel T numerical display report sseseesssesesreerrerensnerierresreerreens 1 50 numerical display section eseeseseeseesieeirerrrrrrerrerrnerrere 1 8 O operation log scsecsessecsseeseceseesseeeeneesees 1 35 6 8 App 18 operation MOQO weccesceccnccescevestcestcesctocsenveevectienceseseacaeeneencentes 3 4 operation of gradually correcting the time ee 1 56 operations that can be carried out when logged out 1 32 option terminals eeeseseeeseecesesseeeseecsseesseessaeees order of precedence of the operators over display range computation bes OVET LANGE ana ar A E A RA over range measurement sssessresrerrerrrerrerrerree OVET OW nisso overview screen P pan l CUTOUT ssr fccedeccens weed anaandaa taataan 11 21 partial expanded display 1 8 1 9 p
238. essages Strings Trend You can set arbitrary strings messages and display them on the trend display The displayed message is written to the internal memory The written messages can be listed in the message summary For the procedure in displaying the message summary see section 7 4 Note Messages can be written after Memory Start Procedure Operation Using the FUNC Key These procedures are carried out in the operation mode 1 Press the FUNC key The soft key menu is displayed 2 Press the Message soft key Soft keys for free message and message groups 1 through 7 and a message group list window appear gt Writing Messages of Message Groups 1 through 7 3 Press one of the Group 1 to Group 7 soft keys Message 1 through 8 soft keys and a message list window appear Fe ie i TI 002 FI 001 72 438 4 m3h TA TA 4 Press the soft key corresponding to the message you wish to write A message mark time and the message are displayed on the trend display and written to the internal memory E 1 ES a E BEA FI 001 JETA H 156 22 458 8 m3 h Hessagel Nessage2 Messages Hessaged MPHNext 1 2 e Setting and Writing the Message String 3 Press the Free soft key Message 1 through 8 soft keys appear Next 172 IM 04L05A01 01E 8 3 suonesado y 19410 e 8 2 Writing Messages Strings Trend 4 Press the soft key corresponding
239. essceeeseeseseerseesesnessneeseeesees report data report data display report file data format rop rt fUNCIONA ie aii enaa reset action TLOG sessesesssieiieisrisierieinrieisersrisrnersrrerern resetting the computation resistance temperature detector RJ Ciolaa ene iat RTD Eo enen cots aa a e net cits AR a aia Rai rules for writing an equation common items a PUN MOQE ceeeeeseeseneeescessseeescesesnesseessaeeceseecseessaeecssnseneeesneees S SAMPIC rate vicvvessccccesvecnscressecaecaceseensterunsascndearercdecteensyiacees sampling interval display data 0 0 0 0 eee eeeeeeee sampling interval event data saving data ee saving data via Ethernet ceee Es saving setup data engineering mode c eee saving setup data system mode s s s saving the data in the internal memory scale Dar Graph occccsvceccsvscecusevesivencevsssdyeanveavestivececddenetes scale OMA uc iceceeciscccsseccnsderssccasereesecriccedrecvuetorsecoustnsbeseibes scale display position Se SCal6 MarkS ws heienteiuceer enceeinaeeee cece neces scale values oe eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeteaaeeeecaaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeneeeees scaling scan interval 000 scrolling the waveforms serial interface Porto eee cee eee cess eeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeaes serial MUMDE eee eceeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeesesaeeeeeneeeeseneeeeneaee v
240. event data files e Serial number of the DX100P the number written on the name plate of the DX100P e Date and time of Memory Start and user name e Date and time of Memory Stop and user name 1 34 IM 04L05A01 01E 1 5 Function for Managing Measured Computed Data Audit Trail Function Operation log setting change log and the setup file at that point are saved as information regarding the progress of operation Operation Log The operation on the DX100P is logged in the order of occurrence Logs of up to 2000 operations can be recorded to the internal memory When the number of logs exceed 2000 the log is overwritten from the oldest log Operations That Are Logged Key operations on the DX100P operations through the remote control function R1 option and via the communication are logged For a description on the operations that are logged and the display see appendix 5 Saving the Operation Log The operation log from the last memory stop to the current memory stop is saved within the corresponding display data event data file Displaying the Operation Log e Displayed through FUNC key operation see section 8 9 When signing the recorded data file you can display the operation log within the file and confirm the information The number of the log displayed on the last line Total number of logs 0012 0050 Time Action User Name None Key operations Nov Nov Nov Nov Nov Nov Nov Nov Nov
241. f the file example shows the output when the unit for channel 31 is changed from mV to V IM 04L05A01 01E App 11 xipueddy Ey Appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files Data Format of the Report File The hourly daily weekly and monthly reports are output in ASCII format using values and strings that are separated by commas The channel tag unit average value maximum value minimum value and sum value are not output for channels in which the input range is set to Skip or for which the computation is turned OFF The report data are appended to the file at each time interval Syntax TTT T REPORT START TIME YYYY MO DD HH MICRLF Model Serial No IIIIIIIIIIIIIIII CRLF File Header HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH CRLF CH TAG cccceccccccccccce ceccecccccccccccc cceccccccecccccccc CRLF UNIT uuuuuu uuuuuu uuuuUuUu CRLF CRLF yyyy mo dd hh mi eeeeeeee eeeeeece gt eeeeeeeeCRLF AVE nnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnnnnnn gt nnnnnnnnnnnnnCRLF MAX nnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnnnnnn gt nnnnnnnnnnnnnCRLF MIN nnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnnnnnn gt nnnnnnnnnnnnnCRLF SUM nnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnnnnnn gt nnnnnnnnnnnnnCRLF TTT T Title HOURLY DAYLY WEEKLY or MONTHLY YYYY MO DD Date the report started HH MI Time the report started III I Serial number of the DX100P 16 characters HHH H File header 32 characters ccc c Channel number or tag name 1
242. fault gateway is not equal to that of IP address See section 2 3 Communication Interface Manual 110 This user name is not registered Enter a registered user name See sections 4 4 and 6 1 111 The login user ID is incorrect Enter the correct user ID See sections 4 4 6 1 and 6 3 112 Password must use more than 6 alphanumeric characters A space or spaces cannot be used See section 6 1 113 Password entered is incorrect Enter the correct password See sections 6 1 and 8 10 114 This user name is invalid Use a valid user name 115 Relay behavior Hold and Indicator Nonhold can not be selected See section 4 1 116 This user name cannot be specified See section 4 4 117 This password is not effective See section 6 1 118 You are logged out because of invalid access Register the user again See section 4 4 119 This user name is unable to use this mode Use other user name to log in See section 4 4 120 Measured value is incorrect in ascending order See section 5 21 121 A user is already logged in See section 1 5 122 Measured value exceeds the range setting See section 5 21 123 Measure function cannot be used until range settings are stored See section 5 21 124 Password entry cannot be performed Errors when entering characters using barcode See section 3 7 of IM04L05A01 17E 125 Character entry cannot be performed Errors when entering characters using barcode See section 3 7 of IM04L05A01 17E e Execution Errors
243. ffer between Batch and Continuous Saving of the Data to the External Storage Medium Batch Data is saved so that 1 data file batch is achieved as much as possible e The interval for saving the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium is fixed to the maximum interval that can be specified on the DX100P If the acquisition to the memory is stopped before 1 interval elapses 1 data file batch is achieved The value varies depending on the number of channels of data that is saved and the sampling interval e Data cannot be saved using key operation Continuous You can select the interval for saving the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium Signing Data Files Adding Approval Information Batch In the case of 1 data file batch the file can be signed using the DX100P or the DAQSIGNIN that came with the package If a single batch of data is made up of multiple files the DX100P cannot be used to sign the data You can use the DAQSIGNIN software that came with the package In the DAQSIGNIN the batch can be handled as 1 data file batch Continuous You can use either the DX100P or the DAQSIGNIN software that came with the package to sign each data file 1 22 IM 04L05A01 01E 1 4 Measured Computed Data Save Function Saving Display Data and Event Data to the External Storage Medium Type of External Storage Medium The measured computed data in t
244. formation Date and time when operation was performed l ESC key t Detailed display 0031 0083 Details 4ESC TRevStart Adjust time 86 68 500 000 Error158 Exceeds time deviation setting COSet86 q 2 0007 1 999 2 008 1 998 Setting Change Log The number of the log displayed on the last line Total number of logs 012 016 Time File Name User Name Nov 19 10 49 25 Y1918491 ABC2001 Nov 19 18 25 83 1918251 ABC2001 Nov 19 10 12 33 1918121 ABC2001 Nov 19 7 4 44 Y1907041 ABC2001 Nov 19 07 01 39 Y1907011 ABC2 1 Nov 19 06 55 06 Y1906551 ABC2 1 Nov 16 14 44 27 Y1614441 ABC2001 Nov 16 14 35 07 Y1614351 ABC201 Nov 16 14 28 00 Y1614281 ABC2 1 Nov 16 13 16 84 Y1613161 ABC2001 Nov 16 12 36 56 Y1612361 ABC2 1 Nov 16 12 33 35 Y1612331 ABC2 1 Name of the user who changed the settings Setup file name that was saved Date and time when settings were changed Error Message Log The number of the log displayed on the last line Total number of logs 012 050 Time No Message Nov 19 2081 16 58 18 111 The login user ID is inc Nov 19 2001 10 48 08 612 Please acknowledge all a Nov 19 2681 18 13 38 089 Press FUNC key to logi Nov 19 2881 10 13 02 681 Measured data have been Nov 19 2881 16 12 38 613 You can t sign this reco Nov 19 2081 07 15 51 245 This function cannot be Nov 19 2081 07 15 05 152 This action is not possi Nov 19 2061 7 14 58 218 Media has not been inser
245. gin mode e MENU key is prohibited e Enable to sign as Sign 1 Auto logput Off Measurement channel DX100P Channel CH1 Tag name TI 001 Input type Type T thermocouple Measuring range 0 0 to 200 0 C Alarm Upper limit alarm155 C Burn out Up Scan interval 1s Use Alarm ACK Sign record conditions Sign at Memory Stop 22 Use user ID when signing 23 Batch conditions Use lot number Use lot number auto increment Batch number Process1 Lot number 00000001 Header1 Manager ABC2001 Header2 Supervisor None Header3 Operator ope Commenti sample Display screens Group GROUP1 Trip line position 78 Sclale 0 0 to 200 0 C 4 divisions Waveform update interval 10 s Trend diaplay Vertical Bar graph display Vertical Clear the displayed waveform at Memory Start Acquire the display data of CH1 and save them to the external storage medium e Type of process Batch e Sampling interval 10 s e Name of directory P1DATA e Header for data file P1sample IM 04L05A01 01E 3 5 Setting the Functions System Mode and Engineering Mode Login Condition Sign Record Condition System Mode e Setting Loginn Sign Record See section 4 4 thernet System Mode Login settings UserID Use Not Use 3 8 Auto Logout Off 13 Display change without Login off Sign record settings Sign record Use Not Use Use Electronic Signature Function Batch stop sign
246. gineering mode from the operation mode USER key Executes the action assigned to this key For the procedure related to assigning actions see section 5 8 FUNC key Used to execute various functions in the operation mode For the functions that you can execute see section 3 4 Soft keys Pressing the FUNC key displays a function name that is assigned to the soft keys at the bottom of the screen The soft key can be used to carry out the assigned function In addition selections are assigned to the soft keys in the engineering or system mode at the bottom of the screen In this case you can press the soft key to select the assigned selection with Zip drive with ATA flash memory card drive N Dxoor YOKOGAWA pocaoor voam e 13 noas Beal i f er 14 15 14 15 Power switch Storage medium drive Zip drive or ATA flash memory card drive depending on the specification Eject button Access indicator for Zip drive Used when ejecting the storage medium Also is the access indicator for the Zip drive The access indicator is lit while the Zip disk is being accessed IM 04L05A01 01E 2 2 Names of Parts and Functions Rear Panel 3 RS 232 1 Note1 1 Note2 3 RS 422A 485 Fieldbus
247. gital input the input value is converted to a value in the appropriate unit and the converted value becomes a measured value of the channel Scaling Square root computation Input value Measured value Input value gt 5V 300 0 C 100 0 C 1V Square Root When the input type is set to DC voltage the square root of the input value is computed The computed result is scaled to a value in the appropriate unit and the scaled value becomes a measured value of the channel Note The DX100P uses the following square root computation Frona Fan Oo Frm V max Vmin e Vmin Lower limit of span Fmin Lower limit of scale Vx Input voltage e Vmax Upper limit of span Fmax Upper limit of scale Fx Scaling value e When the value inside the square root is negative the measured value is indicated as when Fmin lt Fmax KxXxxXx or when Fmin gt Fmax XXXXx IM 04L05A01 01E SUOI OUNY JO MOIAIOAO a 1 2 Functions of the Input Section Calibration Correction CC1 Option Burnout Corrects the measured value of each channel using ten segment linearizer approximation and makes the resultant value the measured value of the channel You can set arbitrary true values measured values after correction for up to 16 points of arbitrary measured values Linear approximation is used between two segment points For the setting procedure see section 5 21 4
248. gs that include a space or spaces are not allowed Note User ID Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter the user ID Enter the user ID up to 8 numbers and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedure related to entering values and strings see section 3 6 Entering Numbers and Characters Password The default password for the DX100P is set The password cannot be changed For details on the default password see section 6 1 The password that the user actually uses is set To change to the default password press the Default soft key User Locked condition To clear the User Locked condition press the Default soft key to set the default password The password that is actually used is set when the user logs in for the first time If the user name or user ID is changed the password is reset to the default password Password expire If the specified time elapses you will be requested to change the password Select the time period from 1month 1 month 3month 3 months and 6month 6 months Off Not set a password expiration period Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key IM 04L05A01 01E apo wa sAs oy u UONesNBYUOD 4 4 Registering Us
249. h 6h 6h 6h 6h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 7day 7day 7day 7day 7day 7day 7day 7day 7day 7day 7day 10 day 10day 10day 10day 10day 10day 10day 10day 10 day 10 day 14day 14day 14day 14day 14day 14day 14day 14day 14 day 14 day 31 day 31 day 31 day 31 day 31 day 31 day 31 day 31 day 31 day for DX102P and DX104P only IM 04L05A01 01E 5 11 apo Bun u Huq y ul uoneIn yuo a 5 7 Setting the File Header and Directory Name Procedure File Header A header comment specified here is written to the display data file event data file manual sampled data file TLOG data file option and report data file option Directory Name When saving data to the external storage medium you can specify the name of the directory to which the files are to be saved The display data event data manual sampled data TLOG data option report data option and screen image data are saved to this directory The initial setting is DATAO Press ew Press the soft key Next To display the setting screen press the soft key 6 File code i 1 Directory name DATAA 2 Daylight saving time lt YYZ MMZDD HH Summer Off
250. he DXTO0P acne ia dedi cba dine de chenille leis N 2 6 A 2 4 InputSignal Wiring ceccecceccecceceeceeceeceeeeeeeeeceecaecaecaccaeeaeeaecaeeeeeeeeaeeeseatecseeseeseeeeetenteees 2 8 A 2 5 Alarm Output Wiring AR1 AR2 A3 Option cecccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeieteeeeeeeeeees 2 12 A 2 6 FAIL Memory End Wiring F1 Option c ccecceceeceeceeceeeceeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeaeeeteseesseneenseeeaes 2 14 A 2 7 Remote Control Wiring R1 Option cccceecceecceceeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeaeeeeeeaees 2 15 A 2 8 24 VDC Transmitter Power Supply Wiring TPS2 TPS4 Option ceceeeeees 2 16 A 2 9 Power Supply Wiring ce cceccesceecceeeceeeeeecececeeeeaecececaeeeaecaescecaeeeaesaeecaeseeeaeseeeeeeeaeeaes 2 18 Chapter 3 Common Operations Chapter 4 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 4 1 4 2 43 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 Turning ON OFF the POWE ieaie E E E N aS 3 1 Inserting Removing the External Storage Medium esesseeseseesresreeirereerreerrerrerinsrnsrenne 3 2 Run Mode iine e i en Sl i le 3 4 Operations in the Operation Mode e ceecceeseeeececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeseaeeeaeeseaeeeeeeteaees 3 5 Setting the Functions System Mode and Engineering Mode ccsceeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeee 3 7 Entering Numbers and Characters 0 cccceeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeseeeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeeeeeeeeaten 3 22 Using the Remote Controll Terminal
251. he Details soft key to view the information about the setup file Fora display example see page 4 23 Press the ESC key to clear the window displaying the information 4 Press the DISP ENTER key The loaded login information is activated and the user is logged out Note If the loaded login information differs from that of the DX100P the setup file is saved to the external storage medium and a log of the setting change is recorded to the setting change log file Audit trail function see section 1 5 When login information is loaded the passwords of all administrators and users are reset to their default passwords see section 6 1 Set the password according to the procedure Logging in for the First Time If the file is Damaged the login information cannot be loaded from the file 4 28 IM 04L05A01 01E 4 13 Clearing the Data in the Internal Memory and Initializing the Setup Data You can initialize the setup data of the DX100P At the same time the measured computed data display data event data manual sample data TLOG data optional function report data optional function and logs in the internal memory can be cleared When this operation is executed the user is logged out For the initial values of settings see appendix 1 Procedure Enter the system mode Press the soft key Next Press soft key to display the Save Load Initialize menu screen Press soft key to display the Initi
252. he DISP ENTER key to confirm the change For the procedures for entering values see section 3 6 Entering Values and Strings Note Batch numbers and lot numbers cannot be changed after Memory Start IM 04L05A01 01E 8 1 suoneisdoc Asay 128410 eo 8 1 Setting the Batch Number Lot Number and Comment Entering Comments Three comments 1 2 and 3 can be set separately 5 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Comment box 1 2 or 3 Press the Input soft key The other items are dimmed and the comment can be entered Enter the comment up to 32 characters and press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the setting For the procedures for entering strings see section 3 6 Entering Values and Strings Note You can change the comment as many times as you wish before executing Memory Start Only the comment that was entered last remains After Memory Start only the comments that are not specified can be entered You can change the comment as many times as you wish while the batch screen is displayed Only the comment that was entered last remains e The comment is cleared when Memory Stop is executed Clearing the Batch Screen Window Press the DISP ENTER key or the ESC key while the batch screen is displayed Note ____ The batch number lot number and comments are saved to the display data file or event data file They are not saved to the setup file 8 2 IM 04L05A01 01E 8 2 Writing M
253. he DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Explanation Actions That Can be Assigned Enclosed in parentheses are soft key expressions For details of actions see section 1 9 e No action is assigned None e Memory Start Memory Stop StartStop e Releasing the alarm indication and output relay AlarmACK e Adjusting the internal clock Time adj Starts stops computation option Math e Clears computed results option Math rst e Manual sampling M sample e Writing messages Message1 to Message8 The messages 1 to 8 of the message group 7 see section 5 16 can be assigned to the remote control input to be written e Snap shot Snapshot 4 16 IM 04L05A01 01E 4 6 Setting the Report Function Procedure Enter the system mode Press the soft key Next To display the menu screen press the soft key Oo To display the setting screen press the soft key ox Report Report Date Time Report On Off Channel 81 E fz Sum scale fs 1 set _Hour__ CH RoI P NOOA On Report set see page 1 45 Hour Creates hourly reports Day Creates daily reports Hour Day Creates hourly and daily reports Day Week Creates daily and weekly reports Day Month Creates daily and monthly reports Date Day of the week This is the date or day of t
254. he FUNC Key e Starting the Computation 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 2 Press the Math START key to start the computation When the computation is started a computation icon is displayed in the status display section e Stopping the Computation 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 2 Press the Math STOP key to stop the computation The computation icon in the status display section also disappears STOP Note When the computation is stopped the computed data of the computation channel is held at the value that existed immediately before If data is being acquired to the internal memory the value held is written Operation Using the USER Key The operation is for the case when the start stop function of computation is assigned to the USER key e Press the USER key when the computation is stopped to start the computation When the computation is started a computation icon is displayed in the status display section e Press the USER key when the computation is started to stop the computation The computation icon in the status display section disappears 8 6 IM 04L05A01 01E 8 4 Starting Stopping Computation Resetting Computation Releasing Computation Dropout Display Resetting the computation Procedure This is executable only when the computation is suspended Data from all computation channels are cleared Operation Using the FUNC Key 1 Pressing the FUNC key displays th
255. he System Mode page 3 16 From this point you must log in to operate the DX100P See section 6 1 See Key Operations in the System Mode page 3 16 For details on users and login mode see section 4 4 For details on other items see the respective sections in chapter 4 See Key Operations in the System Mode page 3 16 See section 6 1 See the respective sections in chapter 5 See Key Operations in the Engineering Mode page 3 13 IM 04L05A01 01E suoeiado uowwoy eo 3 5 Setting the Functions System Mode and Engineering Mode The Menu Screen and Items of the Engineering Mode The Math set1 and Math set2 are displayed when the M1 option is equipped The Calibration correction settings is displayed when the CC1 option is equipped System Mode appears only when the login function is not used or when the login function is used and you log in as an administrator Engineering Mode Range Alarm 2 Tag Moving average Alarm delay time Trend Save interval User key 1 2 3 4 Next 1 4 Engineering Mode Display A 1 Group set Trip line rig Display gt 2 Color wm File 3 Zone Graph Save Load 4 View Direction L D 5 Hath Color 8 Ti aa e 6 Hath Zone Graph Next 2 4 1 2 3 4 Next 1 2 Engineering Mode Save Load 1 Save settings Batch set 2 Load settings 3 Save data to media SEE Math setl Expression Alarm au Hath set2
256. he internal memory can be saved to the following external storage media Zip disk 100 MB or 250 MB Flash memory card 4 MB to 440 MB The size varies depending on the memory card that you are using Note e Use an external storage medium formatted to FDISK 1 partition hard disk format e Ifa memory card larger than 32 MB is formatted using Windows XP FAT32 is selected by default The DX100P cannot use memory cards formatted to FAT32 When formatting a memory card on Windows XP select FAT for the file system Information Saved to the Display Data and Event Data Files The following information is saved to the display data and event data files Content of the display data and event data files e Header string see section 5 7 e Batch information see Batch Function in section 1 5 e Measured computed data e Setup data while running e Login information see Login Function in section 1 5 e Operation log see Audit Trail Function in section 1 5 e Alarm summary e Alarm ACK summary e Message summary Approval information Added after data see Electronic Signature Function in section 1 5 acquisition to the memory is stopped The header string is common to the manual sampled data TLOG data option and report data option Note ____ The limitation on the number of alarm information message information and operation logs that can be stored to the internal memory are shown b
257. he main power supply Open the cover and remove the two screws Pull the front panel slightly toward you and lift it While pressing the fuse carrier located to the right of the power switch turn it counterclockwise approximately 45 degrees The carrier and the fuse will slide out Replace with a new fuse insert the carrier in the fuse holder and turn it clockwise while pressing the carrier to fix it in place Lift the front panel slightly and attach it to the top and then the bottom of the rubber packing Secure the front panel with screws Note For DX100Ps which are side by side mounted vertically a front panel always interfere the upper one when it is opened so that front panels except the top one can t be opened directly First open the top front panel and then the lower one by one For the same reason when closing front panels first close the bottom front panel and then the upper one by one 10 2 IM 04L05A01 01E 10 3 Calibration To maintain the measurement accuracy we recommend the DX100P be calibrated once a year Calibration service is also provided by YOKOGAWA dealers For details contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Required Instruments For calibrating the DX100P calibration instruments with the following resolution are necessary Recommended Instruments e DC voltage standard YOKOGAWA Model 2552 or equivalent Main specifications Accuracy of output in the range 20 mV to 20 V 0 005
258. he week on which the report is created If the Report set is set to Day Month Date is displayed If Day Week is specified Day is displayed If Hour Day or Hour Day is specified Date is displayed However this setting is void Date for monthly reports Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the date Enter the date 01 28 and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see section 3 6 Entering Numbers and Characters You cannot specify 29 30 or 31 Day for weekly reports Enter the day of the week using the soft key Time hour Set the time to create daily weekly and monthly reports with the time on the hour 00 to 23 Enter the time using the same method as step 2 This setting is void for hourly reports Report CH Select the report channel R01 to R12 to which the measurement computation channel is assigned The reports are output in order according to this number IM 04L05A01 01E apo wWa shs oy u UONesNBYyUOD e 4 6 Setting the Report Function 5 On Off Select whether to use the selected report channel or not If Off is selected the report channel and the data are not output On Use the report channel Off Do not use the report channel 6 Channel Set the measurement or computation channel to assign to the report channel All measurement and computation channels can
259. hen logging in 2 Auto logout Select the time period from 1 min 2 min 5 min and 10 min The user who logged in is automatically logged out if there is no key operation for the specified time Off The user stays logged on until the user manually logs out 3 Display change without Login On The operation screen can be switched using keys while logged out Off The operation screen can not be switched using keys while logged out IM 04L05A01 01E 4 9 apo wa shs oy u UONesNBYUOD e 4 4 Registering Users and Setting the Login Function and Electronic Signature Function Setting the Conditions for the Electronic Signature Function 4 Sign record Use Not Use Use the electronic signature function Not Not use the electronic signature function 5 Batch stop sign record On When you execute Memory Stop the sign record screen appears automatically Off When you execute Memory Stop the sign record screen does not appear Note The Batch stop sign record setting is invalid in the following cases If the type of process is Batch and a single batch data is divided into multiple files e When a user who is not allowed to sign executed Memory Stop 6 Sign record User ID Use Use an user ID when signing Not Not use an user ID when signing Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confir
260. his connection 396 Failed to disconnect 397 No TCP control block e Other Communication Errors An English error message is returned via the communication interface Codes other than 085 and 117 are not displayed on the DX100P DX200P screen Code Message and Description 085 The login password is incorrect The password is incorrect Check the password 117 This password is not effective The user is invalidated If the login operation is carried out with a wrong password for three consecutive times the user is invalidated From that point the user can no longer log in Clearing the user locked condition Administrators can clear the user locked condition For the procedure see section 6 1 400 Input username Enter a user name that is registered in the DXP 401 Input password Enter the password 402 Select function from setting or monitor Specify the function to be connected setting or monitor 403 Login incorrect try again Login failed Restart from the user name 404 No more login at the specified level is acceptable Attempting to connect exceeding the number of simultaneous connections allowed setting function 1 monitor function up to 2 Connect to a different function or use quit to exit 405 Input user ID Input user ID 407 Password has expired Please enter a new password The password is expired Enter a ne
261. ht saver is disabled For the procedure see section 5 14 IM 04L05A01 01E SUO I IUNY JO M IM AQ p 1 4 Measured Computed Data Save Function Data Type The types of measured computed data that can be saved to the external storage medium are as follows Type Description Display data Waveform data displayed on the trend display The data is managed using batch lot numbers or a file name Mddhhmma DBD Data format BINARY Undisclosed Event data Measured computed data instantaneous value that have been continuously sampled at a specified sampling interval The data is managed using batch lot numbers or a file name Mddhhmma DBE Data format BINARY Undisclosed Manual sampled data Measured computed data instantaneous value at an arbitrary point File name Mddhhmma DMN Data format ASCII TLOG data M1 Option Measured computed data instantaneous value at intervals set using a timer File name Mddhhmma DTG Data format BINARY Undisclosed Report data M1 Option Hourly daily weekly and monthly report data File name Mddhhmma DHR hourly Mddhhmma DDR daily Mddhhmma DWR weekly Mddhhmma DMR monthly Data format ASCII Display Data and Event Data The measured computed data is written to the internal memory of the DX100P ata specified interval as display data or event data from the time Memory Start is executed to the time Memory Stop is executed and au
262. ht sides IM 04L05A01 01E 11 21 suoneoyioeds Ey 11 9 Dimensional Drawings Panel Cutout Single Unit Mounting 137 3 5 39 Yo s 5 e ve Side by Side Mounting horizontally 175Min 6 89 137 6 5 39 Units Ls mm 282 426 570 714 858 1002 1146 1290 1434 144xn 6 OJIN AJOJN o 5 Unit mm approx inch The dimensional tolerance is 3 unless otherwise specified However the tolerance for dimensions less than 10 mm is 0 3 mm Side by Side Mounting vertically max 3units 137 5 39 o I 175Min Fe a0 6 89 11 22 IM 04L05A01 01E 11 9 Dimensional Drawings Desktop type 138 8 Unit mm approx inch The dimensional tolerance is 3 unless otherwise specified However the tolerance for dimensions less than 10 mm is 0 3 mm IM 04L05A01 01E 11 23 suoneoyioeds Ey Appendix Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings Engineering Mode Initial settings are thick framed Parameters Menu Notes Range 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV Oth
263. ial settings engineering mode a Initial settings system mode 0 0 ee eee eee eee eeeeeeeee initial settings Of the groups 0 0 ee eee eee eeeeeeeeeteeeeees initialize bes input specifications remote control 0 00 eee eee eee 2 15 input terminals harner aueia ia dandi ewiti 2 5 input type i insert and remove the external storage medium 3 2 installati n einir aeaa aaa integration time interval rate of change alarm sesesseessesseeriereerreerrerreens 1 40 K KOY E E E A key operations engineering mode i key operations system mode bs key panel COVER ceecseeeeseseeeseeseseeesceseseessaneeeeseneesseeseaeens L VAIS G EEA PAE AAA A T E E E A E A 2 3 LOD ue 1 6 LOD screen 00 eeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeetaeenees 2 3 loading setup data engineering mode we 5 44 loading setup data system mode ceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeteee 4 26 eo EAE EE TEE E EEE E EA OE log communication command te log emal ose eaea ananas nesre a n n ARSA a 8 15 log error message sssesssssissrrssrsrrreesrrnreesrrusensrnneenernneen 8 14 log FTP a log operation iiniu iandien neidet 8 14 log setting change e sssesseseesieeriesresirerresinerrerrnrrnsrrnrrnere 8 14 log web operation Pr log in via the Ethernet cee ssseeesseseseesseeseseessseeeseeseaes 1 34 HOG SCIOSN i caasusbesssceedesSuctetsceastseencedstcdenscausdigeesesseadatdestouesees 1 55 logging in
264. ical trend displays 1 Press the up right arrow key to display the waveform of the entire data range at the top section right side of the screen Display reference position Time at the upper end of the frame Screen switch display The icon indicating the display range of the displayed screen is highlighted Upper end of the frame corresponds to the display reference position Cursor position Move the frame indicating the display range using the arrow keys All data display All data display 2 Set the display position by moving the frame using the left and right up and down arrow keys 3 Press the down left arrow key to display the historical trend with the waveform display position changed Displaying Clearing the Memory Information 1 Select INFORMATION ON according to the procedure described in Changing the Display and press the DISP ENTER key to display the memory information You can use the left and right arrow keys to switch the memory information display Internal memory Data type Comments date and time user name Basic information DISP Display data EVENT Event data Serial number of the DX100P that acquires data JL Date amp time and the user 4 gt name at Memory Start Stop Headers 2 Press the DISP ENTER key to clear the memory information window Expanding Reducing the Time Axis Expand or reduce the time axis according to the procedure de
265. ical trend for when the message selected using the cursor was written When memory summary is displayed Displays the historical trend for the data selected using the cursor JUMP TO REPORT Only when memory summary is displayed Displays the most recent report data 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to execute the display To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key IM 04L05A01 01E 7 9 Ae HA LNA dSIG pue s y moy ay Bursn suonesado SU9919S uopesado Bulyd yIMS 7 4 Using the Information Screen Alarm Summary and Memory Summary Alarm Summary Procedure Recalling the Historical Trend for When the Alarm Occurred The operation described here is for the alarm summary 1 Move the cursor using the up and down arrow keys and select the alarm 016016 Channel Tare Alarm IN Time Alam OUT Time Select the alarm 2 Display the historical trend according to the procedure described in Changing the Display The data of the following type is displayed e When configured to acquire the display data to the internal memory Display data e When configured to acquire the event data to the internal memory Event data Alarm ACK Summary Procedure Date and time when the alarm ACK operation is executed and the name of the user who executed is displayed When alarm ACK operation is executed the time of execution T FI a2 09 09 23 FI 16 09 09 29 an
266. ils SOCKET Failed to create a socket for the transfer connection BIND Failed the transfer connection command CONNECT Failed the transfer connection LISTEN Failed the transfer connection reception ACCEPT Failed to accept the transfer connection SOCKNAME Internal processing error RECV Failed to receive data over the transfer connection SEND Failed to send data over the transfer connection 287 FTP is failed because of file acquirement from external media 2 Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer when the messages is displayed 3 These errors may occur if the network experiences trouble during the data transmission bad cable connection duplicate addresses network equipment failure Note For information regarding the FTP client function of the DX100P see the DX100P DX200P Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L05A01 17E IM 04L05A01 01E 9 7 Bunooyseqnol el 9 1 A List of Messages Errors Related to SNTP Client 290 SNTP access failure Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 290 Character String and Details DORMANT Internal processing error LINK The link is dropped Check the cable connection 291 SNTP server does not respond Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 291 Character String and Details TIMEOUT Confirm the SNTP server is in s
267. inal Do not use this terminal as a protective ground terminal Protective ground terminal Ne AC ON power O OFF power Safety Precautions Make sure to comply with the following safety precautions Failure to comply may result in injury or death electric shock hazard Power Supply Before connecting the power cord ensure that the power supply voltage matches the voltage rating for the instrument and for desktop types that it is within the maximum rated voltage for the power cord itself Power Cord and Plug Desktop Type To prevent an electric shock or fire be sure to use the power cord supplied by YOKOGAWA The main power plug must be plugged into an outlet with a protective grounding terminal Do not invalidate protection by using an extension cord without protective grounding Protective Grounding Make sure to connect the protective grounding to prevent electric shock before turning ON the power IM 04L05A01 01E Safety Precautions Necessity of Protective Grounding Never cut off the internal or external protective grounding wire or disconnect the wiring of the protective grounding terminal Doing so poses a potential shock hazard Defect of Protective Grounding Do not operate the instrument when the protective grounding or the fuse might be defective Also make sure to check them before operation Fuse To prevent fire only use a fuse that has a rating voltage current and type that is spe
268. ing the alarm occurrence is displayed on the screen In addition a signal can be output from the relay output terminals AR1 AR2 or A3 option on the rear panel of the DX100P Number of Alarms You can set up to four alarms for each channel Alarm Conditions The following eight conditions are available e Upper Limit Alarm H An alarm occurs when the measured value exceeds the alarm value e Lower Limit Alarm L An alarm occurs when the measured value falls below the alarm value Upper limit alarm Lower limit alarm Measured Alarm occurrence alarm value computed data Alarm release j z Alarm release A alarm value Measured computed data Alarm occurrence e Delay Upper Limit Alarm T An alarm occurs when the measured value remains above the alarm value for the specified time period delay period Delay Lower Limit Alarm t An alarm occurs when the measured value remains below the alarm value for the specified time period delay period Delay upper limit alarm example T is the specified delay period Measured computed data X X4 Alarm value f t Alarm occurrence Alarm release Alarm does not occur at T1 because the time period is shorter than the specified delay period T e The input exceeds the alarm value at X2 but the alarm occurs at X3 at which the specified delay period elapses the time when the alarm occurs is the time at X3 e The input falls below the alarm value at
269. ion while data acquisition is in progress is possible Register administrators and users set the calibration correction CC1 option change the time e Detailed display of the operation logs e Calibration correction CC1 option e Settings can ne changed while data acquisition is in progress e A message is written when calibration correction settings is changed while data acquisition is in progress Consecutive channels can be set at once e User settings related to the calibration correction is revised Setup file and setting change log file can be transferred to an FTP server An e mail message when a user is locked due to password failure can be transmitted e System relay Can output the user locked condition e Can output the presence of login users e Cyclical use of the storage area of the external storage medium Media FIFO is possible App 20 IM 04L05A01 01E Appendix 6 Style Numbers and Functions Operation screen can be switched when logged out Registration of administrators and users e Registeration is enable while data acquisition is in progress Up to 90 users can be registered Time change while data acquisition is in progress e Time on the DX100P is adjusted by 1 64 s for each second Data in the internal memory can be saved to a external storage medium using key operations when data acquisition is stopped Opearions when the login function is not used e Setup data in the engineering mode can be cha
270. ires on which a voltage of more than 30 VAC or 60 VDC is to be applied For all other wires use basic insulated wires dielectric strength of 1350 VAC To prevent electric shock attach the terminal cover after wiring and make sure not to touch the terminals AN CAUTION To prevent fire use signal wires having a temperature rating of 70 C or more Wiring Procedure 1 Turn OFF the power switch of the DX100P and remove the cover for the option terminal 2 Connect the alarm output cables to the terminal The terminal arrangement will be one of the figures shown on the next page depending on the alarm output relay option number of outputs and the F1 option 3 Replace the terminal cover and fasten it with screws 2 12 IM 04L05A01 01E 2 5 Alarm Output Wiring AR1 AR2 A3 Option Alarm Terminal Position Enclosed in parentheses are the relay numbers assigned to each option terminal Option terminal 101 to 106 Terminal Arrangement Only the position of the alarm output terminals is indicated When the relay is not energized NC is closed and NO is open C is the common terminal e AR1 AR1 F1 Option Terminal e AR2 AR2 F1 Option Terminal A3 A3 R1 Option Terminal Contact Specifications Item Specificati
271. itched using the arrow keys and the DISP ENTER key N DXIZOP YOKOGAWA rs RTTE ET Screen menu f KeA 2 l Displayed when the DISP ENTER key is pressed Sub menu Displayed when the right arrow key is pressed p vy Ty a 1 al E Arrow keys 4 keys DISP ENTER key IM 04L05A01 01E 7 1 Ae HA LNA dSIG pue s y moy ay Bursn suonesado SU9919S uopesado Bulyd yIMS 7 1 Displaying and Switching Operation Screens Procedure Switching the Screen Carry out the following procedure to switch the displayed screen 1 Press the DISP ENTER key to display the screen menu 2 Select the type of screen to be displayed using the up and down arrow keys 3 For items with ap mark you can display the sub menu by pressing the right arrow key 4 Select the screen to be displayed using the up and down arrow keys 5 Press the DISP ENTER key to display the screen 2 fw TREND gt EEE DIGITAL gt file E OVERVIEW izg INFOR p A TNEORE FER HaTion FSA HATTON zep TREND x sn TREND Z HISTORY E TREND HISTORY 7 HISTORY GROUP 6 fee TREND 7 HISTORY 7 2 IM 04L05A01 01E 7 2 Using the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens Trend Screen Procedure Changing the Display 1 Press the DISP ENTER key to display
272. ium is not inserted an error message Media has not been inserted appears and the DX100P cannot proceed to the system mode The error message is cleared by pressing the ESC key Insert an external storage medium into the drive and carry out the procedure again No Does not save the settings and proceeds to the system mode The settings of the engineering mode remain the same as those before the setting change operation Cancel Cancels the operation to proceed to the system mode and returns to the engineering mode menu screen The setting changes made up to that point are retained Copying and Clearing Character Strings Procedure When entering character strings you can copy and paste preexisting strings or clear them The soft keys used to perform these operations appear only when these operations are possible For example if you wish to set the string Process1 Start to message 1 you can copy the group name Process1 and add the string Start Copying Character Strings 1 Move the cursor to the group name box and press the Copy soft key The Paste soft key appears 2 Move the cursor to the message 1 box and press the Paste soft key Process1 is pasted Group number 2 Group name Piprocess oanrnn hwo ne Input Copy Paste Clear Copy Paste Clearing Character Strings 1 Move the cursor to the string you wish to clear and press the Clear soft key IM 04L05A01 01E 3 15
273. l Select Tag or Channel Tag Display tag names Channel Display channel numbers Note Even if Tag is selected the channel number display will be used for the channels that tag names are not entered 2 Memory alarm Select the remaining write time of the internal memory at which the relay should be activated from 1 h 2 h 5 h 10 h 20 h 50 h 100 h and Off The initial setting is 1 h Off Memory end output function is disabled the free space of the external storage medium is not checked either see section 1 8 3 Language Select the display language 4 Partial Use Use the partial expanded display The partial expanded display can be set in the engineering mode Not Do not use the partial expanded display 4 22 IM 04L05A01 01E 4 9 Setting the Auxiliary Functions 5 Remote Controller ID This item is for the easy text entry option KB and KB2 Select the remote controller ID from 0 to 31 or Off Off Do not operate the DX100P using the remote control terminal Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key IM 04L05A01 01E 4 23 apo wa sAs oy u UONesNBYyUOD 4 10 Setting the Time Zone Procedure Set the time difference from GMT Greenwich Mean Time If y
274. l trend 234 The specified channel is not assigned to the display group This message may appear when switching to trend or bar graph from overview See section 5 9 e Errors Related to Sign Record Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 240 You cannot sign this record because a signature is already present Sign at the same authority level is allowed once 243 This file is not allowed to sign record Only files created at Memory Stop can be signed 244 Data is damaged or changed You cannot sign this file 245 This function cannot be used in the record signature display Exit from the sign record screen See section 6 3 246 This function cannot be used due to no data file saved in media Insert a storage medium If a storage medium is already present replace with a formatted medium 247 This function cannot be used in the engineering mode display End the engineering mode See section 3 5 248 Signature function cannot be performed Insert a normal storage medium containing the data to be signed IM 04L05A01 01E 9 3 Bunooyselqnol el 9 1 A List of Messages e Errors Related to E mail and Web Server Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 260 IP address is not set or ethernet function is not available The IP address is not specified Check the IP address 261 SMTP server is not found Occurs when the SMTP server is
275. l of the DX100P as necessary make sure you are not grounding at two points e To minimize noise caused by electromagnetic induction twist the measurement circuit wires at short equal intervals e Make sure to earth ground the protective ground terminal through minimum resistance less than 100 Q When using internal reference junction compensation on the thermocouple input take measures to stabilize the temperature at the input terminal e Always use the input terminal cover e Do not use thick wires which may cause large heat dissipation cross sectional area 0 5 mm or less recommended e Make sure that the ambient temperature remains reasonably stable Large temperature fluctuations can occur if a nearby fan turns ON or OFF Connecting the input wires in parallel with other devices can cause signal degradation affecting all connected devices If you need to make a parallel connection then e Turn the burnout function OFF See section 4 2 e Ground the instruments to the same point Do not turn ON or OFF another instrument during operation This can have adverse effects on the other instruments e RTDs cannot be wired in parallel IM 04L05A01 01E 2 4 Input Signal Wiring To prevent electric shock ensure the main power supply is turned OFF CAUTION e Do not apply input signals that exceed the following values This can damage the DX100P e Maximum input voltage Voltage range of 2 VDC or less or ther
276. lay the setting screen press the soft key ox A D Integrate oo Scan interval is ENA 2 First CH a1 Last CH 61 Burnout set off 4 RIC External 5 Volt uly 4 a G Temperature t E_T Setting the Integration Time of the A D Converter 1 Note Integrate Select the integration time of the A D Converter DX102P DX104P Select Auto 50 Hz or 60 Hz DX106P DX112P Select Auto 50 Hz 60 Hz or 100 ms Auto automatically switches 20 ms and 16 7 ms fixed to 20 ms on models that use the DC power supply 50 Hz fixed to 20 ms 60 Hz fixed to 16 7 ms 100 ms fixed to 100 ms the scan interval is 2 s If the power supply frequency is different between the DX100P and the item being measured set the integration time of the A D converter to match the power supply frequency of the instrument that is generating more noise Setting the Scan Interval 2 Scan interval Input signals are scanned at every scan interval For the models with computation function M1 the computation carried out at every scan interval DX102P DX104P Select 125 ms or 250 ms DX106P DX112P Select 1 s or 2 s when the A D integration time is 100 ms the scan interval is fixed to 2 s Setting the Burnout Function for Thermocouple Input and Setting the Reference Junction Compensation This setting is void for all input settings other than the TC 3 4 First channel and last channel
277. lays remote control Alarm output relay 6 relays RS 232 interface RS 422 A 485 interface FAIL memory end output relay Clamped input terminal Desktop type Computation function report function included Cu10 Cu25 RTD input 3 terminal isolated RTD 3 terminal isolated RTD 24 VDC AC power supply Remote control 24 VDC Power supply for transmitter 2 loops 24 VDC Power supply for transmitter 4 loops Easy Text Entry with remote control Easy Text Entry without remote control 4 2 3 5 6 7 8 Calibration Correction AR1 AR2 and A3 cannot be specified simultaneously C2 and C3 cannot be specified simultaneously If F1 is specified A3 cannot be specified H5 Can only be specified when P1 is simultaneously specified H5D UL CSA cable H5F VDE cable H5R SAA cable H5J BS cable N2 can only be specified on DX106 and DX112 models If TPS2 is specified TPS4 AR2 A3 and F1 cannot be specified If TPS4 is specified TPS2 AR1 AR2 A3 and F1 cannot be specified KB1 and KB2 cannot be specified simultaneously IM 04L05A01 01E Checking the Contents of the Package NO Serial No When contacting the dealer from which you purchased the DX100P please quote the serial No Standard Accessories The following standard accessories are supplied with the DX100P Make sure that all
278. les to the external storage medium This method enables a single storage medium to be used continuously e Operation When the free space on the external storage medium becomes small the oldest file in the save destination directory is deleted and the newest file is saved This operation is referred to as FIFO First In First Out Save destination directory Retains the newest n files Popen 2 Ep The oldest file is deleted first e FIFO Operation in the Data Save Destination Directory Retains up to the newest 1000 files e FIFO Operation in the SETO Directory Retains up to the newest 100 files 1 28 IM 04L05A01 01E 1 4 Measured Computed Data Save Function Note If the free space on the storage medium after saving the file is less than 1 MB the oldest files are deleted in order from the save destination directory before saving the file A free space of at least 1 MB is available after saving the file All the files in the save destination directory are applicable to be deleted If enough free space cannot be obtained even when the files are deleted the data is not saved FIFO operation is carried out even when more than 1000 files exists in the data save destination directory from the beginning If directories other than the data save destination directory are created on the storage medium the area that can be used for the data save destination directory is reduced It is recommended that a storage medium dedicat
279. limit lower limit must be greater than or equal to 5 IM 04L05A01 01E apo Burssourbuy ay ul uoeIn yuo a 5 11 Setting Zone Displays Partial Expanded Displays Trend Partial Expanded Display 3 Partial When On is selected the Expand and Boundary boxes are displayed On Use the partial expanded display Off Not use the partial expanded display Expand Set the position to which a particular value the boundary see step 4 in the display span is to be moved as a percentage of the display span Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter the position and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see section 3 6 Entering Numbers and Characters The range for the position 1 to 99 Boundary Set the boundary value within the display span By moving the value within the display span to another position see step 4 the area on either side of the boundary is expanded or compressed Enter the boundary using the same method as step 4 The range for the boundary The minimum value of the span 1 digit to the maximum value of the span 1 digit when the range is not set to scaling The minimum value of the scale 1 digit to the maximum value of the scale 1 digit when the range is set to scaling Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the E
280. m the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Registering an Administrator Note It is recommended that two or more administrators be registered If one administrator fails to log in due to erroneous input of the password the other administrator can fix the registration Display the Admin tool menu see the previous page To display the setting screen press the soft key Oon Admin settings Number Ee 1 Login method Key Com 2 User name i User ID o 4 Password 2277777 E 5 Password expire off 6 1 Number Select the number used to identify the administrator from 1 2 and 3 2 Login method Off Disables the administrator Key Enables to login through key operations on the DX100P Key Com Enables to login through key operations on the DX100P and via communications 4 10 IM 04L05A01 01E 4 4 Registering Users and Setting the Login Function and Electronic Signature Function 3 Note User name Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a string Enter the user name up to 20 characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedure related to entering values and strings see section 3 6 Entering Numbers and Characters ROGGSeGeon BORGO a ERCEL a 4 5 6 7 8 9 Sp A a l Del Bs Ins You cannot register user names that are already registered You cannot specify quit as a user name In addition character strin
281. mation user name user ID and password to log in in the following cases e When the DX100P is turned On When the system mode is ended When you log in after logging out Power On For the detail of the operation engineering and system modes see section 3 3 Logged out Setting changes are cancelled Log out operation Auto logout see below Operation Mode Key operation Log in operation Key operation Key operation Engineering Mode System Mode Key operation Administrators only Auto Logout You can set the DX100P so that users are logged out automatically if there is no key operation for a specified time see section 4 4 If a user is logged out automatically from the engineering and system modes the setting changes are cancelled Operations That Can Be Carried Out When Logged Out When logged out the operation screen can be switched using the DISP ENTER key and arrow keys However alarm ACK operation on the overview screen and changing of the screen when displaying the sign record screen see section 4 4 for the setup procedure are not possible Types of Users A user can be an administrator or a user For details on the settings see section 4 4 For details on the operating procedure see section 6 1 e Administrator Administrators can perform all operations on the DX100P Item Description Number of administrators 3 that can be registered Range of op
282. mmary for a display example see Message Summary in section 1 3 Canceling the Approval Information Once approval information is added it cannot be cancelled or changed Note If the data is damaged you cannot sign the data An error message is displayed Signing Using DAQSIGNIN See the DAQSIGNIN User s Manual IM 04L05A01 61E Function for Handling Changes Made to the Display Data Event Data Display data event data is in BINARY format and the format is not disclosed If the data is altered the status of the file is set to damaged see section 8 7 and cannot be signed Functions When the Login Function Is Not Used Below are the operations when the login function is not used when an administrator is not registered There is no login operation Operation mode is enabled when the power is turned ON and when system mode is ended The electronic signature function cannot be used You can enter the engineering mode and change settings when data acquisition is in progress However you cannot change the range computation batch and display update rate settings In addition you cannot enter the system mode The setup file is not saved to the external storage medium even when settings are changed in the engineering mode 1 38 IM 04L05A01 01E 1 6 Alarm Function Alarm Type This function generates an alarm when the measured computed data meets a certain condition When an alarm occurs information notify
283. mocouples 10 VDC Voltage range between 6 and 50 VDC 60 VDC e Maximum common mode noise voltage 250 VACrms 50 60Hz e The DX100P is an INSTALLATION CATEGORY II product Wiring Procedure 1 Turn OFF the power switch of the DX100P and remove the input terminal cover 2 Connect the input signal wires to the input terminals 3 Replace the input terminal cover and fasten it with screws Note Input signal wires of diameter less than or equal to 0 3 mm may not be secured firmly for clamped input terminals Fold over the conducting section of the wire for example to make sure that the wire is securely connected to the clamped input terminal IM 04L05A01 01E 2 9 dO0OLXG 24 usn 310439 2 4 Input Signal Wiring e Input Terminal Position e Terminal Arrangement DX102 DX104 Standard Input Terminals CH4 CH2 CH3 CH1 BOIS 8 8 EVE DX106 Standard Input Terminals CH2 DX112 Standard Input Terminals CHi2 CH10 CH8 CH6 CH4 CH11 CH9 CH7 CH5 Note Input terminal Clamped Input Terminals H2 Clamped Input Terminals H2 CH5 CH3 CH1 CH 6 CH2
284. month Login mode No Admin tool Login mode settings Number Sign record sign3 Key Alarm ACK Media Batch Message Snapshot Math Save data Load data E mail Other AUX Tag Channel Memory alarm 100h Language French Partial Remote Controller ID Media FIFO On Off Save Load Initialize Save settings Load settings Load login settings Initialize Clear 1 Clear 2 Option Report Report set Hour Day Hour Day Day Week Day Month Date Numerical value Date of the week SUN MON TUE WEN THU FRI SAT Time hour Numerical value Report CH R02 R03 R04 R05 R06 R07 R08 R09 R10 R11 R12 On Off Off Channel Up to model types Sum scale Off min wy App 6 IM 04L05A01 01E Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings System relay Parameters Menu Notes Option Action NO 1 to NO 8 Start Stop Alatm ACK Time adj Remote Math Math rst M sample Message 1 Message 2 Message3 Message4 Message 5 Message 6 Message7 Message 8 _ Snapshot Op
285. moving the External Storage Medium Explanation 2 Open the front cover by pressing down on the knob that is located in the center of the upper section of the cover and pulling forward Push the eject button to remove the storage medium 3 Close the front cover If the DX100P is turned ON the external storage medium icon in the status display section disappears Zip disk Flash memory card Note e You cannot eject the Zip disk unless you log in using key operations as a user who is permitted to eject the Zip disk see section 4 4 e The Zip disk can be removed from the time the power is turned ON until the DX100P boots up Procedure When the Zip Disk Cannot Be Ejected If the Zip disk cannot be removed by performing the steps given in the Removing the storage medium section carry out the following steps to remove it 1 Open the front cover by pressing down on the knob that is located in the center of the upper section of the cover and pulling forward 2 Inserta pin of approx 1 mm in diameter into the eject button hole and press slowly This will cause the Zip disk to be ejected Zip disk eject hole Eject button Format Type of the External Storage Media Use a formatted storage medium on the PC Zip disk FDISK 1 partition hard disk format Flash memory card FDISK 1 partition hard disk format IM 04L05A01 01E suoeado uowwoy eo 3 3 Run Mode Mode Types The DX100P has three run modes operati
286. mpling Interval and the Speed of Movement of Waveforms along the Time Axis The following table shows the display update rate display data sampling interval and the speed of movement of waveforms along the time axis Display Update Rate div 15s 30s 1min 2min 5min 10 min 15 min 20min 30min 1h 2h 4h 10h IDisplay data 05 1 2 4 10 20 30 40 60 120 240 480 1200 sampling interval s Speed of movement of waveforms 2376 1188 594 297 119 59 40 30 20 10 5 2 5 1 0 approximate value mm h for DX102P and DX104P only 5 10 IM 04L05A01 01E 5 6 Setting the Display Update Rate and Auto Save Interval Choices for the Auto Save Interval The maximum auto save interval varies depending on the display update rate sampling interval is determined from the display update rate and the number of measurement and computation channels to be stored see section 4 3 The available choices for the auto save interval from the table below are displayed on the soft key Display update 15s 30s 1min 2min 5min 10min 15min 20min 30min 1h 2h 4h 10h rate DIV Sampling 0 5 1 2 4 10 20 30 40 60 120 240 480 1200 interval s Auto save 10min 10min 10min 10min 10min 10min 10min interval choices 20 min 20 min 20min 20min 20min 20min 20min 30 min 30 min 30min 30min 30min 30min 30min 1h 1h th 1th 1h 1h th 1h 1h 1h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6
287. n max min max min max min max 8 bytes WY 2 bytes binary data Event data 1st scan CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH31 Date amp Time i 8 bytes 2nd scan CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH31 Date amp Time i 8 bytes to nth scan CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH31 Date amp Time i 8 bytes WN 2 bytes binary data App 16 IM 04L05A01 01E Appendix 4 Time for Acquiring Display Data Event Data to the Internal Memory Internal Memory Size The size of the internal memory for acquiring display data or event data is fixed to 5 MB Maximum Sampling Count When the type of data the number of measurement channels and the number of computation channels that are to be acquired to the internal memory are determined the maximum number of times data can be acquired can be derived from the internal memory size This value is called the maximum sampling count The maximum sampling count can be derived from the equations in the following table Data to Be Saved Maximum Sampling Count Display data 5 000 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 4 number of computation channels x 8 8 Event data 5 000 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 2 number of computation channels x 4 8 Maximum Sampling Length The maximum sampling length can be determined from the time it takes to acquire the maximum sampling count of data to the internal memory using the following equati
288. n see the explanation in the TLOG Computation section on the next page For details on the timer settings see section 4 7 Note TLOG computed data and TLOG data are not the same TLOG computed data refers to the result of the TLOG computation TLOG data refers to the measured computed data of all channels acquired at specified intervals IM 04L05A01 01E 1 45 1 7 Computation Function and Report Function M1 Option TLOG Computation Determines the sum maximum minimum average and maximum minimum P P values of the specified channel at specified time intervals The interval is set by timers The example shown in the following figure indicates the case in which the average value of channel 1 over each interval TLOG AVE 01 is determined Channel 31 Equation TLOG AVG 01 Average value Average value Scan interval Interval set by a timer TP SEE EEE EERIE EB EH ime Sampling Timer Mode There are two timer modes absolute mode and relative mode e Absolute Mode Timer expires at times determined from the reference time and the interval The reference time is specified by the hour 00 to 23 Example 1 Reference time 14 00 Interval 12 h The expiration time is set to 2 00 2 00 AM and 14 00 2 00 PM Example 2 Reference time 00 00 Interval 10 min The expiration time is set to 0 00 0 10 0 20 23 40 and 23 50 For example if the computation is started at 9 36 the time expiration
289. n lugs designed for 4 mm screws for power and ground wiring termination See section 2 4 Input Signal Wiring e To prevent electric shock make sure to attach the transparent terminal cover e Make sure to provide a power switch double pole type on the power supply line in order to separate the DX100P from the main power supply Put an indication on this switch as the breaker on the power supply line for the DX100P Switch Specification Rated power current 1 Aor more except P1 model 3 A or more P1 model Rated rush current 60 A or more except P1 model 70 A or more P1 model Use a switch complied with IEC60947 1 3 e Connect a fuse between 2 A and 15 A to the power line The power switch and fuse used on the power supply line should be e CSA approved for the use in North America or e VDE approved for the use in Europe Do not add a switch or fuse to the ground line Use a power supply that meets the following conditions Item except P1 model P1 model Rated power supply 100 to 240 VAC 24 VDC AC Allowable power supply voltage range 90 to 132 or 180 to 264 VAC 21 6 to 26 4 VDC AC Rated power supply frequency 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz for AC Allowable power supply frequency range 50 60 Hz 2 50 60 Hz 2 for AC Maximum power consumption 45 VA 100 V 30 VA for DC 62 VA 240 V 45 VA for AC Note Do not use a supply voltage in the range 132 to 180 VAC as this may have adverse effects on the measur
290. nding time of data acquisition user name batch information and sign record Sign record screen Enables you to sign display data and event data e Displays the historical trend of the display data or event data on the external storage medium e Can display the operation log alarm summary alarm ACK summary and message summary that accompany the data e Can display the file information Log screen Displays logs of operation errors operations communication commands file transfers via FTP Web operations e mail transmissions access to the SNTP server and setting changes System screen Displays the number of input points capacity of the internal memory options remote controller ID KB1 KB2 options MAC address and firmware version number Backlight saver function The LCD backlight automatically dims if no key is pressed for a certain preset time can be set from 1 2 5 10 30 and 60 minutes Display language Selectable from English German French and Japanese Temperature unit C or F selectable 11 4 IM 04L05A01 01E 11 3 Data Storage Specifications External storage medium Selectable from e PCMCIA ATA flash memory card 4 to 440 MB or CF card 32 to 512 MB adapter required e Zip disk 100 MB or 250 MB File types The following two file types can be created Event data file stores instantaneous values acquired periodically at a specified sampling interval e Display data file stores th
291. ndow appears for you to enter the user name 2 Enter the user name and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures for entering values and strings see section 3 6 Entering Values and Strings If the use of the user ID is enabled a window appears for you to enter the user ID Proceed to step 3 If the use of the user ID is disabled a window appears for you to enter the password Proceed to step 4 AOR BRaRRG lt TTT EEE E _ 0 1 2 3 415617819 Sp Over 3 Enter the user ID in the same fashion as step 2 and press the DISP ENTER key A window appears for you to enter the password User name ABC2081 User ID Ea ABCDEFGHIJ KLHNOPQRST UVWKY2RH a A RE 2 BI T2138 d 5 6 i 8 Sl A Sp A Over 6 2 IM 04L05A01 01E 6 1 Login Logout Logging Out Procedure 4 Enter the password in the same fashion as step 2 and press the DISP ENTER key The window disappears and you are logged in User locked and corrective action If you repeat the operation of entering a wrong password and pressing the DISP ENTER key three times the user is invalidated and can no longer log in The status display section shows a User Locked icon User Locked icon T P gr Ruy ole dh 416 5 P 4 e Clearing the User Locked Icon Executable Only by the Administrator 1 Log in as an administrator 2 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 3 Press the User Locked ACK soft key to
292. nel 11 Lime 12 Cyan Background White or black selectable Trend screen Direction vertical or horizontal selectable Number of indication channels 6 channels per screen maximum All channels indication 24 channels maximum including computation channels Number of screens 6 screens 6 group Line width 1 2 and 3 dots selectable Display update rate Waveform One division has 30 dots e DX102P DX104P 15 s 30s 1 2 5 10 15 20 30 min 1 2 4 10 hours div selectable e DX106P DX112P 1 2 5 10 15 20 30 min 1 2 4 10 hours div selectable Numerical value 1 s 2 s when the scan interval is 2 s Contents Waveform Numerical value numerical display section can be turned ON OFF scale scale display can be turned ON OFF grid lines number of divisions selectable from 4 to 12 times on time axis trip lines line widths are selectable from 1 2 and 3 dots messages up to 32 characters for each alarm indication Zone display and partial expanded display are available Digital screen Number of indication channels 6 channels per screen maximum Number of screens 6 screens 6 group Display update rate 1 s 2 s when the scan interval is 2 s Contents Numerical value unit alarm indication Bar graph screen Direction Vertical or horizontal selectable Number of indication channels 6 channels per screen maximum Number of screens 6 screens 6 group Scales 4 to 12 divisions selectable Base position of ba
293. ng the Computed Result The computed result of computation channels can be displayed on each operation screen See section 1 3 1 44 IM 04L05A01 01E 1 7 Computation Function and Report Function M1 Option Numerical Display The range of displayed values of computed data is from 9999999 to 99999999 excluding the decimal point The decimal point position corresponds to the position of 2 the decimal point of the upper and lower limit span of the computation channel lt However special displays are used for cases given in the table below 2 Data Condition Computation Display a The computed result exceeds 99999999 positive over display range XXXXXXX The computed result is below 9999999 negative over display range XXXXXXX gt The value exceeds 3 4E 38 or is below overflow XXXXXXX or a 3 4E 38 in the middle of computation XXXXXXX An error is detected error XXXXXXX When the following computation is specified a computation error occurs e X 0 SQR X e LOG X e When a skipped channel No is entered in the equation The number of stacks see section 5 18 error XKXKKKKK in the equation exceeds 17 Rolling Average The moving average of the computed result of the equation specified for the computation channel is determined and the result is displayed as computed data for that channel The sampling interval and the number of samples can be specified for each channel
294. ng the Method of the Display Event Data Acquisition and Saving Set the method of the display event data acquisition The waveforms of the specified channels can be displayed on the trend screen For the procedure of setting the cyclic use Media FIFO of the storage area of the external storage medium see section 4 16 Procedure Enter the system mode Setting the Type of Process Action to Clear Waveform Display at Memory Start To display the menu screen press the soft key OB To display the setting screen press the soft key al Application Type of process 1 Trend clear off 2 1 Application Type of process Select Batch or Continuous For information on Batch and Continuous see section 1 4 2 Application Trend clear Sets whether to clear the displayed waveform at Memory Start On Start after clearing the waveform display Off Start without clearing the waveform display Setting the Data Type to be acquired and saved To display the menu screen press the soft key OB To display the setting screen press the soft key ar l Hemory Data Event Sample rate ls 2 Data length 4h 3 1 Data Select data type to be acquired If Event is selected Sample rate and Data length appears Display Acquire and save the display data Event Acquire and save the event data Note If you set the type of process to Continue and the Data to Display set the auto
295. nged while data acquisition is in progress e ACK operation of individual alarms and write operation of free messages are possible on the operator page Communication interface SNTP server and SNTP client functions e Operates as an SNTP server e Synchronizes to the time of an SNTP server on the network e Users can use a portion of the control commands logging into the setting function A portion of the control commands can be used via the serial interface logging into the setting function Output commands can be executed using the barcodes e Operation logs that meets specified conditions can be output e Login status is added to the status informatiom e New commands RG XC RC WA WB WC CL LO FI e LL for the serial interface DAQSIGNIN Data files saved using key operations are so indicated e Parameters for revised functions are added e New messages are added IM 04L05A01 01E App 21 xipueddy Ey Index A abnormality in the data cece eee eee eee 1 47 1 49 absol te MOG iespaida daaar sa araara aO oE absol tg ValUC iassceiics cesittinstecseeictieeriastincsis sect anitastinecte access indicator accessories Sold separately oo eee eee eee eeeee ree eeeeeee vi accessories Standard ec eee eeeeeeee tee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee v acquiring data ACqUISIHOM MO scciscciccsivetvessncsstesces cee astinecisasctanannarsdee App 16 active storage Change eee eee ceeeeeeeeseeeeee
296. ngs 4 Key panel cover Open this cover to access the keys besides the arrow keys and the DISP ENTER key Open the cover by pulling the tab on the upper left corner of the cover toward you 5 Front cover Open the front cover when turning ON OFF the DX100P or inserting or removing the external storage medium Open the cover by pushing down on the tab located at the center of the top edge of the cover and pulling it forward Keep the cover closed at all times except when accessing the power switch and the external storage medium Note For DX100Ps which are side by side mounted vertically when a front panel is opened the down arrow key may interfere the upper front panel IM 04L05A01 01E 2 3 d00LXd 24 Bulsp 310499 2 2 Names of Parts and Functions 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 START key Press this key to execute Memory Start The data acquisition to the internal memory starts and the waveform is displayed on the trend screen If the model has the optional computation function M1 computation and report also starts simultaneously STOP key Press this key to execute Memory Stop The data acquisition to the internal memory stops The updating of the waveform on the trend display also stops If the model has the optional computation function M1 the report is stopped ESC key Used to cancel an operation Also used to return to the menu screen from the setting screens MENU key Used to enter the en
297. nnection to the setting function via the Ethernet see IM04L05A01 17E Connection from the DAQSIGNIN via the Ethernet belongs to this type see IM04L05A01 61E Serial communication PC PC DAQSIGNIN 1s DX100P Setting function 4 x Setting function Simultaneous connection is not possible only one type of connection Login using keys Ethernet You can add batch information to the display data event data file Batch Number and Lot Number Batch numbers and lot numbers can be added to display data event data files The file name can be identified using batch number lot number Batch number up to 32 characters Lot number up to 8 numbers The lot number does not have to be specified Automatic Increment of the Lot Number The lot number can be automatically increased by one at Memory Stop For the setting procedure see section 5 17 Other Batch Information The following information can be added to the display data event data files For details on the settings see section 5 17 6 2 and 8 1 e Header 1 up to 64 characters e Header 2 up to 64 characters e Header 3 up to 64 characters e Comment information e Comment 1 up to 32 characters e Comment 2 up to 32 characters e Comment 3 up to 32 characters e Date and time when the comment was written and user name The following information is automatically added to the display data
298. nnel Te AXK Time User Name TI FI e2 Tag Channel no Space Key operation R Operation via remote control R1 option M Operation via Ethernet communications S Operation via serial communications C2 C3 option Mark indicates the alarm status IM 04L05A01 01E 1 13 SUOI DUNY JO M Q 1 3 Display Function Message Summary The messages and the times when they were entered are displayed in a list Up to 250 messages can be stored to the internal memory When this number is exceeded data are overwritten from the oldest data By scrolling the screen using arrow keys the messages stored in the internal memory can be displayed e By selecting a message from the list using arrow keys the historical trend of the display data or event data containing the message can be recalled For a description on the historical trend see Historical Trend in this section For the operating procedure see section 7 4 Number of the message displayed at the bottom of the screen Number of the messages in the internal memory Message Date and time the message was written User name G44 Messaze Time Batch Start Now 26 2001 15 26 26 mb Material Now 26 2001 13 59 45 Materiall Now 26 2001 13 58 38 STERT Nov 25 2001 13 46 19 User Name Fecal PEC2001 R Fecal PEc2201 Cursor Space Key operation R Operation via remote control R1
299. nputs besides the standard input types A B and b terminals are of isolated input type for DX106P and DX112P Input type Measuring range Cu10 GE Cu10 L amp N RTD Cu10 WEED measurement Cu10 BAILEY 200 to 300 C current i 1 25 mA Cu10 0 00392 at 20 C _ 828 0 to 572 0 F Cu10 a 0 00393 at 20 C Cu25 o 0 00425 at 0 C Measuring accuracy For measuring accuracy of other input types see section 11 8 Input type Accuracy guaranteed range Measuring accuracy Cu10 GE 70 to 170 C Cu10 L amp N 75 to 150 C Cu10 WEED 200 to 260 C Cu10 BAILEY Cu10 a 0 00392 at 20 C 200 to 300 C Cu10 a 0 00393 at 20 C Cu25 0 00425 at 0 C 0 3 of rdg 0 8 C Pt100 Jpt100 0 4 of rdg 1 0 C Measuring range 0 3 of rdg 0 6 C 3 terminal Isolated RTD Input N2 A B and b terminals are of isolated input type Can be specified only for DX106P and DX112P A B and b terminals of DX102P and DX104P are isolated as standard 24 VDC AC Power Supply P1 Powered by 24 VDC or 24 VAC For related specifications see Power Supply Normal Operating Conditions Effects of Operating Conditions and Other Specifications in section 11 8 Rated power supply 24 VDC AC Allowable power supply voltage range 21 6 to 26 4 VDC AC Dielectric strength Power supply to ground terminal 500 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 minute
300. ns Alarms and Constants for Computation Channels M1 Option Procedure Twice press the soft key Net To display the setting screen press the soft key 10 1 First CH Last CH Bi 2 Hath on Calculation expression 3 l 4 Span Lower Span Upper Unit 200 00 200 004 f N e alara Type Value Rly 1 fon H 4 00 off 2 ort 3 off 4 off Turning On Off the Computation Setting Equations Note When computation is turned On Off or when equations and span settings are changed the alarm setting for that channel is turned Off 1 First CH Last CH Select the desired channels 2 Math Turn On or Off the computation of the selected channel If On is selected a box for the equation will appear On Use the computation channel Off Do not use the computation channel 3 Calculation expression Set the equation for the selected channel Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter an equation Enter the equation up to 40 characters and press the DISP ENTER key 5 30 IM 04L05A01 01E 5 18 Setting Equations Alarms and Constants for Computation Channels M1 Option Use the following keys Cursor blue Shifts the cursor m Select numbers or the computing elements using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key sant ABSO LOG EXPO INEGI TT 111 e To shift the cursor to the left GT LT GE Le TET Ta or right select lt
301. o 42 12 channels DX112P Channel 31 to 42 12 channels Types of Computations In the table below y represents the computed result X and n generally represent the measured data and aconstant For details see Data that can be used in equations Type Description Four arithmetical operations Addition subtraction multiplication x and division xx Determines the power y X SQR Determines the square root ABS Determines the absolute value LOG Determines the common logarithm y logiox EXP Determines the exponent y e Relational computation Determines lt lt gt 2 of two elements and outputs 0 or 1 Logical computation Determines the AND logical product OR logical sum XOR exclusive logical sum of two elements NOT negation of an element and outputs 0 or 1 TLOG computation Determines the sum maximum minimum average and maximum minimum P P values at specified time intervals over the time interval There are three timers used to set the time interval For detail see page 1 43 Data That Can Be Used in Equations For TLOG computation only measured and computed data can be used For all other computations all types of data can be used Measured Data The data are specified using channel numbers in computing equations If scaling is in effect the scaled values are used in the computation Computed Data The
302. o the nearest hour Example 10 hr 59 min 50 s becomes 11 hr 00 min 00 s Operation when data acquisition is in progress If the signal input time is within the specified time deviation from the nearest hour the time is gradually corrected Otherwise the time is not corrected For details on the behavior see section 1 10 Starts Stops Computation option Math Remote input Edge Rising start falling stop e Starts stops the computation This is valid only on models with the computation function M1 option e Ifthe computation is started applying a rising signal produces no effect If the computation is stopped applying a falling signal produces no effect IM 04L05A01 01E 1 53 SUO I IUNY JO M IM AQ a 1 9 Remote Conirol Function R1 Option e Clears Computed Results option Math rst e Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more e Resets the data on all computation channels This is valid only on models with the computation function M1 option and while the computation is stopped For all other cases applying the remote signal produces no effect e Manual Sampling M sample e Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more e The instantaneous values of all measurement and computation channels excluding the measurement channels that are set to Skip and the computation channels that are turned Off can be stored to the internal memory e Writing Messages Message1 to Message8 e Remote input Trigger
303. oeu05 uonesqued Te 1s yn Teos yen TL 38S yen 91 0 OL suogeiodo peones 7 0 s1 pe H qunu ZVS 40 JO JUBWAJOU ONY aqw u JO ON 2SN yes yeg 6 GIS Sul PUB ep OU 18S Sw 8 Peres aq 0 ase erep yM 0 AJOJOSJIP Jo OWEN Z S l 0 UBHUM aq 0 Buys Japeay alld 9 YB y9eq y 810 S91 JEU SUO PUCD pue Janes jYybIyOeq q97 24 104 SUI UONISUBL Janes 1y6Iy9eq GOT 24 HO UO WNL vis sseulybug GOT aol 5p jeos aw 019S s ejds p dnou Bury ms JO jem U ejds p pua OY JO PUD YIPIM aull d y p m Sul PUL 10 09 punosByoeg Ers ydesB seq pua uonoap Aejdsiq Mel p G Ae dsip p puedx jenued y 10 Aepunoq pue uolsod LES _ejdsip pepuedxe jeed 40 UO uan L emed spu 10 uoisod ejds p ayeos uolsod seq yde1p seg ydes6 seq ZLS pue PUA y JO SUOISIAIP B edS Jo JOqUINN yde LEGS sw 42m0 pue iddn uoz uoz CH GH OLS 10 09 Aejdsip jauueyo juawainsean JO OD ZH G 4o 09 Aejdsip uolisod aul dup 6S sdnou6 0 sjauueyo ubissy eweu dnog aul du jes dnog L GH Ke dsiq GH OLS sBuujs ebessaw pue eweu dnog abessoy pH 8S Kay YASN y 0 uoHOe ue UB ssy fey YISN g g emau aves O NY 31 eyepdn Aeidsip puai JEAJO U BABS PUSI c GG atu Aejap Wwiely dZb LXG d901XQ v S HO eBesane Buou y JO sajdwes jo JAquINN eabeuene BUON VS dv0LXC dZ01Xd HOAUE SUOD aly 1944 JOyl4 es aweu Bey peL ZH Joquuinu Aejas jndino ZG HO UC
304. of administrator 4 4 Login method user name user ID password password expiration duration 4 3 User settings Registration of user 4 4 Specifiable only when logged Login method user name user ID password in as an administrator password expiration duration Login mode No Enable disable calibration correction settings 4 4 Login mode settings Login mode number 4 4 Specifiable only when logged Sign authority level or no authority in as an administrator Enable disable key operations Enable disable alarm ACK operation Enable disable Zip disk removal Enable disable other functions 5 Aux Tag display or channel number display 4 9 Minimum remaining amount of internal memory at which to generate the alarm Displayed language Use Not use partial expanded display Remote controller ID Media FIFO Turn ON OFF the FIFO operation of the storage 4 16 medium 6 Save Load Initialize 6 1 Save settings Save setup data to the external storage medium 4 11 6 2 Load settings Load setup data from the external storage medium 4 11 6 3 Load login settings Load login settings from the external storage medium 4 12 6 4 Initialize Initialize the setup data in the internal memory and 4 13 clear measured computed data and logs Setup data that belongs to Admin tool IM 04L05A01 01E 3 11 suoljesodgQ uowWwoy eo 3 5 Setting the Functions System Mode and Engineering Mode
305. of set points Select the number of points that make up the segments 2 to 16 including the start and end points or Off Off Do not perform calibration correction 5 40 IM 04L05A01 01E 5 21 Setting the Calibration Correction CC1 Option Explanation 3 MES val When directly entering numeric values Press the Input soft key to display a window used to enter the value Enter the value and press DISP ENTER e Selectable range for measured value Channels set to scaling or square root computation 30000 to 30000 The decimal point position is the same as for the scale lower limit Other channels Measurable range of the selected range Example 2 000 to 2 000 for Volt 2V When entering current measured values Press the Measure soft key to set the measured value at that point Note If the measured value is less than or equal to the previous value you cannot confirm the setting An error message is displayed e If you change the following items the Measure soft key cannot be used on the channel unless the changes are activated save the settings and exit the engineering mode Otherwise an error message is displayed e Input filter or moving average setting Mode Type or Range on the measurement channel The upper or lower limits of span the upper or lower limits of scale or the decimal point position on a measurement channel whose Mode is set to Scale or Sqrt e If you press the Measur
306. ogged in user a logged in user 1 52 IM 04L05A01 01E 1 9 Remote Control Function R1 Option When a contact or open collector signal is applied to the remote control terminal a predetermined action is carried out Arbitrary actions can be assigned to the eight remote control terminals For the setting procedure see section 4 5 DX100P E Dry contact i lt Open collector Actions That Can Be Assigned Enclosed in parentheses are soft key expressions None None No action is assigned Memory Start Memory Stop StartStop e Remote input Edge Rising start falling stop e Executes Memory Start and Memory Stop After Memory Start is executed applying a rising signal produces no effect After Memory Stop is executed applying a falling signal produces no effect Acknowledge alarms AlarmACK Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more e Acknowledges all alarms Adjusting the Internal Clock Time adj Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more e Adjusts the internal clock of the DX100P to the nearest hour depending on the time when the remote signal is applied Operation when data acquisition is stopped Time of signal input New time 00 min 00 s to 01 min 59 s Adjusts the internal clock down to the nearest hour Example 10 hr 01 min 50s becomes 10 hr 00 min 00 s 02 min 00 s to 57 min 59 s Time is unchanged 58 min 00 s to 59 min 59 s Adjusts the internal clock down t
307. old produces no effect When the alarm output relay option is not installed these settings are void IM 04L05A01 01E 4 1 apo wWa shs oy u UONesNBYyUOD e 4 1 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function Setting the Alarm Indication Operation Hold Non hold 5 Indicator non hold Release the alarm indicator in sync with the alarm release hold Hold the alarm indicator till an alarm acknowledge operation is executed Note If the output relay operation is set to hold the alarm indication operation is hold non hold cannot be specified Setting the Interval for the Rate of Change Alarm 6 Set the Increase upper limit alarm and Decrease lower limit alarm intervals for calculating the rate of change The interval is the product of the setting value and the measurement interval Select the limit from 1 to 15 using the soft key Setting the Alarm Hysteresis 7 Hysteresis Select On or Off using the soft key On The hysteresis is 0 5 of the display span or scale Off No hysteresis Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key IM 04L05A01 01E 4 2 Setting the A D Integration Time Scan Interval Burnout Reference Junction Compensation and Temperature Unit Procedure Enter the system mode To disp
308. omputation Channels M1 Option OR Logical Sum Syntax e10Re2 Condition If both e1 and e2 are 0 the operation results in 0 otherwise in 1 Status e1 0 e2 0 e10Re2 0 e1 0 e2 0 e10Re2 1 e1 0 e240 e10Re2 1 e1 0 e2 0 e10Re2 1 XOR Mutually Exclusive Logical Sum Syntax e1XORe2 Condition If e1 and e2 have different values the operation results in 1 otherwise in 0 Status e1 0 e2 0 e1XORe2 0 e1 0 e2 0 e1XORe2 1 e1 0 e240 e1XORe2 1 e1 0 e2 0 e1XORe2 0 NOT Logical Negation Syntax NOTe1 Condition Reverses the value of data e1 Status e1 0 NOTe1 1 e140 NOTe1 0 Example 01 020R03 GT 04 Determines the OR of the computed results of 01 02 and 03 GT 04 5 36 IM 04L05A01 01E 5 18 Setting Equations Alarms and Constants for Computation Channels M1 Option TLOG Computation MAX MIN AVE SUM MAX MIN Only measured data and computed data can be used in the TLOG computation In the explanation below e1 is used to represent a measurement or computation channel You cannot specify an equation that contains a computing element inside e1 In addition only one TLOG computation can be specified in a single computing equation TLOG MAX Syntax TLOG MAX e1 Result Computes the maximum value of channel e1 TLOG MIN Syntax TLOG MIN e1 Result Computes the minimum value of channel e1 TLOG AVE Syntax TLOG AVE e1 Re
309. omputed Data at Arbitrary Times Manual Sampling Procedure The instantaneous values of the all measurement and computation channels excluding the measurement channels that are set to Skip and the computation channels that are turned Off can be saved to the external storage medium with a key operation For actions related to saving manual sampled data see section 1 4 The data format of the manual sampled data is explained in appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files Operation Using the FUNC Key This operation is carried out in the operation mode 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 2 Press the Manual sample soft key to execute the manual sampling Hanual sample eS Operation Using the USER Key This is an operation carried out only when the manual sampling is assigned to the USER key 1 Press the USER key to execute the manual sampling IM 04L05A01 01E 8 5 suoneisdo Asay 19410 e 8 4 Starting Stopping Computation Resetting Computation Releasing Computation Dropout Display M1 Option Starting Stopping Computation Procedure Operations Using the START STOP Key e Starting Stopping the Computation Simultaneously with Memory Start Stop See section 6 2 e Stopping the Computation When Memory Start Is Not Executed 1 Press the STOP key A confirmation window is displayed Yes No 2 Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Operation Using t
310. on Hour Saves the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium every hour on the hour Day Saves the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium every day at the hour on the hour specified by Time hour Week Saves the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium at the day specified by Day of the week at the hour on the hour specified by Time hour Month Saves the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium at the date specified by Date at the hour on the hour specified by Time hour 5 Date or Day of the week When Timeup type is set to Hour Day or Month Date is displayed However the Date setting is valid only when Timeup type is set to Month Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter the value Enter the date 1 28 and press DISP ENTER For the procedures related to entering numerical values see section 3 6 Entering Numbers and Characters You cannot specify 29 30 or 31 When Timeup type is set to Week Day of the week is displayed Enter the day of the week using the soft key 6 Time hour Set the time when data is to be saved This is invalid when Timeup type is set to Hour Enter the hour 00 23 using the same method as step 5 Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm
311. on Maximum sampling length maximum sampling count x sampling interval Calculation Example of Maximum Sampling Count and Maximum Sampling Length e Display Data Measurement channels 2 computation channels none Maximum sampling count 5 000 000 2CH x 4 bytes 0 x 8 bytes 8 bytes 312 500 When the display update rate is 30 min div 60 s sampling interval Maximum sampling length 312 500 data points x 60 s 18 750 000 s approx 217 days Measurement channels 12 computation channels 6 Maximum sampling count 5 000 000 12CH x 4 bytes 6 x 8 bytes 8 bytes 48 076 When the display update rate is 30 min div 60 s sampling interval Maximum sampling length 48 076 data points x 60 s 2 884 560 s approx 33 days e Event Data Measurement channels 4 computation channels none Maximum sampling count 5 000 000 4 CH x 2 bytes 0 x 4 bytes 8 bytes 312 500 When the sampling interval of event data is 1 s Maximum sampling length 312 500 data points x 1 s 312 500 s approx 86 hours Measurement channels 12 computation channels 6 Maximum sampling count 5 000 000 12 CH x 2 bytes 6 x 4 bytes 8 bytes 89 285 When the sampling interval of event data is 1 s Maximum sampling length 89 285 data points x 1 s 89 285 s approx 24 hours IM 04L05A01 01E App 17 xipueddy Ey Appendix 5 Operation Log Contents and Display Each operation is displayed in the operation log as follows
312. on Output type Relay transfer contact energize de energize switchable Output capacity 250 VAC 50 60 Hz 3A 250 VDC 0 1 A resistive load Dielectric strength 1500 VAC 50 60 Hz for one minute between output terminals and the ground terminal For details related to the switching of energized de energized state of the alarm relays see section 4 1 IM 04L05A01 01E 2 13 dOOLXG eu Buisp asojag 2 6 FAIL Memory End Wiring F1 Option A AN Wiring Procedure To prevent electric shock ensure the main power supply is turned OFF e lf a voltage of more than 30 VAC or 60 VDC is to be applied to the FAIL Memory End output terminal use ring tongue crimp on lugs with insulation sleeves on all terminals to prevent the wires from slipping out when the screws become loose Furthermore use double insulated wires dielectric strength of 2300 VAC or more for the signal wires on which a voltage of more than 30 VAC or 60 VDC is to be applied For all other wires use basic insulated wires dielectric strength of 1350 VAC To prevent electric shock attach the terminal cover after wiring and make sure not to touch the terminals CAUTION To prevent fire use signal wires having a temperature rating of 70 C or more 1 Turn OFF the power switch of the DX100P and remove the cover for the option terminal 2 Connect the FAIL Memory End output cables to the terminal The terminal arrangement for the FAIL Memory
313. on correction using measured values and corresponding true values Only allowed users can use this function see section 4 4 Note If you change the Mode Type or Range of the measurement channel see section 5 1 the calibration correction setting is reset e If you change the upper or lower limit of span or the upper or lower limit of scale on a measurement channel whose Mode is set to Scale or Sart the calibration correction setting is reset e The calibration correction cannot be set to the channels that are set to Skip Procedure Press f Models without the computation function M1 option Twice press the soft key Next To display the setting screen press the soft key 10 Models with the computation function M1 option Three times press the soft key Next To display the settinf screen press the soft key 13 1 First CH 61 Last CH 81 Number of set points jlo 2 MES val True val HES val True val 4 2 000 2 000 g 2 2 000 2 000 18 2 000 2 000 2 000 2 000 11 2 000 2 000 2 000 2 000 12 2 000 2 000 1 2 3 4 5 2 000 2 000 13 2 000 2 000 6 a 8 2 000 2 000 14 2 000 2 000 2 000 2 000 15 2 000 2 000 2 090 2 000 16 2 000 2 000 1 First CH Last CH Set the target channels You can set consecutive channels whose range is set to the same value as the first channel 2 Number
314. on mode engineering mode and system mode The function and relationship of each mode is described below Power ON END soft key DISP ENTER Logged out t Login Logout operation operation Operation mode Store or cancel the configuration Operation screens MAHAN D REDARE END soft key DISP ENTER Engineering mode Y System mode soft key DISP ENTER Adiministrators only Menu screen Menu screen Soft key ESC ESC Soft key MENU or Setting screens Setting screens Operation Mode This is the mode you enter when you turn ON the power and log in This mode is used to acquire measured computed data to the internal memory and save the data to the external storage medium The operation screen is displayed Engineering Mode The DX100P enters this mode when the MENU key is pressed in the operation mode The DX100P cannot enter this mode when Memory Start is executed Settings such as input range and alarms are entered Input scan is being executed Alarm detection is also in operation System Mode This mode can be entered only when you logged in as an administrator This mode is entered by pressing the system mode soft key on the engineering mode menu screen Sets the basic environment of the DX100P such as the input format and the save format of measure
315. onal Functions Alarm Output Relays AR1 AR2 A3 An alarm signal is output from the rear panel as a relay contact signal AR1 and AR2 includes remote control functions R1 Number of output relays 2 4 or 6 Relay contact rating 250 VAC 50 60 Hz 3 A 250 VDC 0 1 A for resistance load Terminal configuration SPDT NO C NC Energized at alarm de energized at alarm AND OR hold non hold and reflash actions are selectable Serial Communication Interface C2 C3 Allows communications using one of four protocols Connection EIA RS 232 C2 or RS 422A 485 C3 Protocols Normal setting measurement function Modbus master slave protocol and bar code protocol C2 Synchronization method Start stop asynchronous transmission Connection method RS 422A 485 4 wire half duplex multi drop connection 1 N where N 1 to 31 Transmission speed 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bps Data length 7 or 8 bits Stop bit 1 bit Parity Odd even or none Communication distance RS 422A 485 Up to 1200 m Application Setting measurement function A proprietary protocol is used For details see Setting measurement server section 11 6 Modbus Mode RTU SLAVE RTU MASTER Data type SLAVE Data read and data write by the master device MASTER Data read from the slave device Computation function M1 is necessary Bar code input A proprietary protocol is used Reads bar codes to operate the DX100P
316. op is executed without alarm ACK operation the alarm ACK operation is not recorded in the batch file If the alarm ACK operation is performed after Memory Stop the operation is recorded in the next batch file For models with the computation function M1 option Yes No Hemory Cancel Header 1 Header 2 Header 3 Batch number Lot number Comments 1 to 3 2 Confirm the batch information such as the header batch number lot number and comments 3 Select an item using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key For Models without the Computation Function M1 Option or When a user who is not allowed to start stop computation logged into a model with the Computation Function Yes Acquisition of the display event data to the internal memory stops The icon of the status display section changes to indicate data acquisition to the internal memory is stopped No Acquisition of the display event data to the internal memory continues For Models with the Computation Function M1 Option Mem Math Acquisition of the display event data to the internal memory and computation stop If the report function is being used it is also stopped The icon of the status display section changes to indicate data acquisition to the internal memory is stopped Memory Acquisition of the display event data to the internal memory stops If the report function is being used it is also stopped The icon of the status display s
317. ormat ASCII Max number of data sets internal memory can hold 50 TLOG data M1 option Trigger Timeout of the timer Data format Binary Max number of data sets or data divisions internal memory can hold 400 data sets or 16 divisions number of computation start stop operations Report data M1 option Types Hourly daily hourly daily daily monthly and daily weekly Data format ASCII Max number of report data internal memory can hold 50 Screen image data Trigger Key operation communication command or remote input signals R1 option Data format png format Output To external storage medium 11 6 IM 04L05A01 01E 11 4 Alarm Function Specifications Number of alarms Up to four alarms for each channel Alarm types Upper and lower limits delay upper and lower limits difference upper and lower limits and upper limit and lower on rate of change Alarm delay time Selectable from 1 s to 3600 s for each channel Interval time of rate of change alarms The scan interval times 1 to 15 common to all channels Display The alarm status type is displayed in the numerical value display area upon occurrence of an alarm A common alarm indication is also displayed in the status display section The alarm indication behavior non hold or hold type can be selectable for common to all channels Only hold type is selectable when output relay action is set to hold Hysteresis On 0 5 of display
318. ort At the specified time of the specified date every month the average maximum minimum and sum values of the specified channels are determined from a month of data up to the specified time and stored to the internal memory Report Data Display For a display example of report data see section 1 3 Combinations of Reports That Can be Created The reports created by the DX100P can be set to hourly only daily only hourly and daily daily and weekly or daily and monthly Number of Measurement and Computation Channels That Can Be Assigned to the Report Up to 12 channels can be assigned to one report The report data are not created for channels that are set to Skip or those that have the computation turned Off About the Sum Scale In the sum computation data are summed over the scan interval However for flow values that have units s min h or day a simple summation results in the actual value not matching the computed result because the scan interval and the unit of the input values are different In these cases the unit of the data measured over the scan interval is converted to match the unit of the input values and the computation is performed 1 48 IM 04L05A01 01E 1 7 Computation Function and Report Function M1 Option For example if the scan interval is 2 s and the input value is 100 m min a simple summation would add 100 every 2 s resulting in 3000 after one minute However
319. ou use the DST function or the Web server function make sure to set this parameter Enter the system mode Twice press the soft key Next To display the setting screen press the soft key 11 Date amp Time Time deviation limit 18s Time zone Difference from GHT iz 1 1 Difference from GMT Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the time difference Enter the value 1200 to 1200 upper two digits hours lower two digits minutes and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see 3 6 Entering Numbers and Characters Example If the local time leads 9 hours to GMT set 900 Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 4 24 IM 04L05A01 01E 4 11 Saving Loading Setup Data Saving Setup Data Saves the setup data of the engineering and system modes including the login information to the external storage medium Procedure Enter the system mode Press the soft key Next Press x soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen 1 Press a soft key to display the Save settings screen System Node Save settings File name a File name Time SETIP2 PPL 2081 11 11 20
320. p and down arrow keys move the cursor to TREND HISTORY Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu 1 2 4 Sub menu of TREND HISTORY Feee TREND HISTORY LLL GROUP 1 Displays group 1 GROUP 2 Displays group 2 GROUP 3 Displays group 3 GROUP 4 Displays group 4 GROUP 5 Displays group 5 GROUP 6 Displays group 6 ALL CHANNEL Displays the waveform of all the channels See Explanation in section 7 2 GROUP CHANNEL Displays the waveforms of the channels registered to groups MESSAGE DISP 2 Switches to message display 2 MESSAGE DISP 1 Switches to message display 1 see Explanation in section 7 2 CURSOR TIME ON Displays the time at the cursor position CURSOR TIME OFF Displays the time at the display reference position Select the sub menu item using the up and down arrow keys Press the DISP ENTER key to execute the display To close the menu without switching the screen press the Confirming the Information Press the DISP ENTER key to display the screen menu Using the up and down arrow keys move the cursor to INFORMATION Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu 1 2 3 4 Sub Menu of INFORMATION ESC key OPERATION LOG Displays the operation log ALARM SUMMARY Displays the alarm summary ALM ACK SUMMARY Displays the alarm ACK summary MESSAGE SUMMARY Displays the message summary INFORMATION O
321. played 3 Interval Set the interval the timer expires Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter the time Enter the time 00 01 to 24 00 and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see 3 6 Entering Numbers and Characters 4 Reset For the computation channel that TLOG computation is set select whether or not to reset the computed data at every interval On Reset the computed data at every interval Off Do not reset the computed data 5 Action DataSave The measured computed data instantaneous values of all measurement computation channels is acquired to the internal memory and saved to the external storage medium at specified intervals TLOG data saving Off TLOG data is not saved IM 04L05A01 01E 4 19 4 7 Setting the Timer for TLOG Data Acquisition and TLOG Computation Setting the Absolute Timer 2 Mode Select Absolute Interval Reset Ref time and Action are displayed 6 Interval Select the interval to determine the time the timer expires from 19 choices below 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 6 min 10 min 12 min 15 min 20 min 30 min 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12h 24h 7 Ref time Set the reference time to determine the time the timer expires Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the time Enter the time on the hour 00 to 23 and press the DISP ENTER key
322. played alternately every 5 s ta Accessing the external storage medium Taa J z Batch number lot number B X ia Waiting If the batch number lot number exceeds 20 characters the date and time position E Storage medium error Displayed only when is used to display the batch number lot number the cyclical use of the storage area Media FIFO is specified see section 1 4 The green level display indicates the amount of external storage medium used When the free space on the external storage medium falls below 10 of the external storage medium capacity or 6 Mbytes the indicator turns red 1 18 IM 04L05A01 01E 1 3 Display Function Setting the Display Conditions of the LCD The display conditions of the LCD can be configured LCD Environment Setting Background color of the operation screen The background color of the screen can be set to white or black The initial setting is white For the procedure see section 5 13 LCD brightness The brightness of the LCD can be set between eight levels The initial setting is 4 For the procedure see section 5 14 Backlight saver The lifetime of the LCD backlight can be extended by automatically dimming the light when there is no key operation for a certain amount of time The screen returns to the original brightness with a key operation or an alarm occurrence The initial setting is set so that the backlig
323. po Burssourbuy ay ul uoneIn yuo a 5 6 Setting the Display Update Rate and Auto Save Interval The time period corresponding to 1 division on the time axis on the trend display is specified The sampling interval of the display data is also determined by the display update rate The auto save interval is the interval at which the display data residing in the internal memory are delimited and stored to the external storage medium If the type of process is set to Batch see section 4 3 it cannot be changed Press ew To display the setting screen press the soft key OB Procedure Time div 1 Auto save interval lh 2 1 Time div Display update rate Select the display update rate from 15 s 30 s 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min 15 min 20 min 30 min 1h 2h 4h and 10h for DX102P and DX104P only 2 Auto save interval Select the auto save interval from the choices shown on the soft keys see Explanation Note e The selectable values for Auto save interval vary depending on the Time div setting e Ifthe type of process is set to Batch see section 4 3 the Auto save interval is set to the maximum possible value and cannot be changed Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Explanation The Display Data Sa
324. power switch Turn on the power properly work properly See section 3 1 Is the power supply connected properly Connect properly See section 2 10 Supply the power at the specified Is the power supplied properly voltage and frequency See section 11 8 Contact your nearest Sales amp Service Center Is the fuse blown YES Replace the fuse See section 10 2 Does the fuse stay intact when the power is turned on again Contact your nearest Sales amp Service Center Bunooysejqnol Contact your nearest Sales amp Service Center IM 04L05A01 01E 9 13 9 2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart e The reading error is large e The digital indication or trend trace waveform is unstable e The trend trace waveform stays at 0 or 100 Does the input meet the specifications signal source resistance etc YES Are the span and range settings correct YES Is the input free of noise YES Is the environmental temperature kept constant for temperature measurement YES Is the input wiring correct YES Is the input wiring parallel with other equipment NO Is the RJC setting correct for TC input YES Contact your nearest Sales amp Service Center NO NO NO NO NO YES NO Change the input to meet the specifications See section 11 1 Adjust the span and range See section
325. put type when Delta or Scale is selected for Mode Volt DC voltage TC Thermocouple RTD Resistance temperature detector DI Digital input Range Select the input range corresponding to the selected Mode or Type Span_L Span_U Set the upper and lower limits of the display span Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see section 3 6 Entering Numbers and Characters Span lower limit and span upper limit cannot be set to the same value For the difference computation Delta is selected for Mode refer to the following notes For TC or RTD input the display span cannot exceed the difference between the maximum and the minimum of the input range Example For TC type L the measurable range is 200 0 to 900 0 C The range of display span is calculated as 200 0 900 0 to 900 0 200 0 namely 1100 0 to 1100 0 C For DC voltage input the display span cannot exceed the measurable range Ref CH Set the reference channel when Delta is selected for Mode see Explanation Scale_L Scale_U Set the upper and lower limits of the scale Enter a value in the allowed range using the same method as step 5 Allowed range 30000 to 30000 Decimal position The decimal can be set in the following positions
326. quare root SQR SQR 01 Returns the square root of the measured value of channel 1 Absolute value ABS ABS 01 Returns the absolute value of the measured value of channel 1 Logarithm LOG LOG 01 Returns the common logarithm of the measured value of channel 1 Exponent EXP EXP 01 Raises e to the power of the measured value of channel 1 Note The natural logarithm is not directly provided but can be obtained by using the following lOgeX logiox logioe as logpx logax logab Therefore to calculate the natural logarithm of the value of channel 01 set KO1 1 Then the expression will become LOG 01 LOG EXP K01 5 34 IM 04L05A01 01E 5 18 Setting Equations Alarms and Constants for Computation Channels M1 Option Relational Computation The types of data that can be used in equations are measured data computed data constants K01 to K12 communication interface data C01 to C12 and the remote control terminal conditions D01 to D08 You can specify a computing equation that performs relational computation on a computing element Example 01 LT ABS 02 Example 02 LT 03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value of channel 2 is less than the measured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be 0 02 GT 03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value of channel 2 is greater than the measured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be 0 02 EQ 03
327. r Left right or center only for horizontal display Display update rate 1 s 2 s when the scan interval is 2 s Contents Bar graph numerical value unit scale alarm indication IM 04L05A01 01E 11 3 suoneoyioeds Ey 11 2 Display Specifications Automatic display switching The displayed group can be automatically changed on the trend digital and bar graph screens The display switching interval is selectable from 5 s 10 s 20s 30 s and 1 min Overview screen Displays measured values and alarm status of all channels Alarm ACK for individual alarms can be executed Information screen Alarm summary Displays the list of alarms Capable to switch to historical trend screen by cursor pointing Alarm ACK summary Display the list of alarm ACK operations Message summary Display the list of messages and time Capable to switch to historical trend screen by cursor pointing Memory summary Display the file list in internal memory Capable to switch to historical trend screen by cursor pointing Report data display M1 option Display the report data in internal memory Tags Number of characters 16 characters maximum Historical trend screen Displays the retrieved data from internal memory Time axis operation Can be expanded reduced and scrolled Memory information The following information of the retrieved data are displayed Data type serial number of the DXP which is used to acquire data starting and e
328. r P1 model LCD 5 years Back light module 1 Battery 10 years Lithium battery 1 Rubber strip 5 years Dust and water proof for front panel for front 1 each rubber strip cover Zip drive 5 years 1 PWB assembly 5 years Power Assy 1 5 years Sub Power Assy 1 5 years AD Assy Up to models Replacement Period at the Upper Limit of the Normal Operating Temperature 50 C The replacement period varies depending on the temperature in which the instrument is operated and the instrument s specifications If the instrument is used in a 30 C environment it may be operational for 10 years or more Note The recommended replacement period for the back light module is the period when the brightness falls to half The speed of degradation of the brightness varies depending on the operating conditions and the judgement is subjective These factors should be considered when determining the actual replacement period aoueudjUleW IM 04L05A01 01E 10 5 Chapter 11 Specifications 11 1 Number of inputs Scan interval Inputs Input type Input Specifications DX102P 2 channels DX104P 4 channels DX106P 6 channels DX112P 12 channels DX102P DX104P 125 ms or 250 ms DX106P DX112P 1sor2s 2s when an A D integration time is set to 100 ms Volt DC voltage TC thermocouple RTD resistance temperature detector DI digital input DC current with external shunt resistor attached Input Type and
329. r and Moving Average Procedure Set the input filter for DX102P DX104P low pass filters or the moving average of the input for DX106P DX112P Press rw To display the setting screen press the soft key 1 1 l mooo m First CH fal Last CH far First CH fal Last CH far Tag Tag m Filter Off 2 Hoving average Count Off 3 Alarm Delay Time 10 s Alarm Delay Time 10 s 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels For the channels set here other parameters shown in the above figure are also simultaneously set Input Filter Setting for DX102P DX104P 2 Filter Select the time constant of the filter Off Do not use the filter 2s Filter time constant 2 s 5s Filter time constant 5 s 10s Filter time constant 10 s Moving Average Setting for DX106P DX112P 3 Moving Average Count Select the number of data points 2 to 16 for the moving average Off Do not use moving average Note Regardless of this setting filter and moving average operations are not performed for the digital inputs DI Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key IM 04L05A01 01E 5 5 Setting the Alarm Delay Period Procedure Set the alarm delay period for delay upper lower limit alarm Press
330. r is possible e Outputs logs setup data screen image data status info and login info E mail transmission function Web server function E mail is automatically transmitted at the following times Alarm occurrence release recovery from a power failure memory end detection occurrence of error related to the external storage medium and FTP client occurrence of locked user at the specified time and report creation Destination Specify two groups of destinations Displays the DX100P screen on the Internet Explorer browser Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 to 5 5 e Monitor page For monitoring e Operator page Switches the screen on the DX100P from the browser When the login function is not used writing meassage and alarm ACK operation are possible e Access control user name up to 8 characters and password up to 20 characters on each page is available Maintenance Test server Registered users can log in via Ethernet Setting function e Outputs connection information and network information e Closes other connections Setting function e Outputs connection information and network information Instrument information server SNTP server SNTP client Outputs the serial number and model of the DX100P Operates as an SNTP server Time resolution is 15 625 miliseconds Synchronizes to the time of the SNTP server on the network 11 10 IM 04L05A01 01E 11 7 Specifications of Opti
331. r less Maximum common mode noise voltage 250 Vrms AC 50 60 Hz Maximum noise voltage between channels 250 Vrms AC 50 60 Hz Interference between channels 120 dB when the input source resistance is 500 Q and the inputs to other channels are 60 V Common mode rejection ratio 120 dB 50 60 Hz 0 1 500 Q imbalance between the minus terminal and ground Normal mode rejection ratio 40 dB 50 60 Hz 0 1 Rated power supply 100 to 240 VAC automatic switching except P1 model 24 VDC AC P1 model Allowable power supply voltage range 90 to 132 or 180 to 264 VAC except P1 model 21 6 to 26 4 VDC AC P1 model Rated power supply frequency 50 60 Hz automatic switching for AC Rated Power consumption 62 VA except P1 model 30 VA P1 model DC 45 VA P1 model AC IM 04L05A01 01E 11 17 suoneoyioeds Ey 11 8 General Specifications Power consumption Normal Operating Conditions Power supply voltage Power supply frequency Ambient temperature Ambient humidity Vibration Shock Magnetic field Noise Mounting position Warm up time Altitude Effects of Operating Conditions Ambient temperature Power supply Magnetic field Except P1 model Supply voltage Backlight saving mode Normal Max 100 VAC 30 VA 32 VA 45 VA 240 VAC 42 VA 47 VA 62 VA P1 model Supply voltage Backlight saving mode Normal Max 24 VDC 17 VA 19 VA 30 VA 24 VAC 50 60Hz 28 VA 32 VA 45
332. rder 1 3 Weekday SUN 4 Hour of the day 2 5 End Time Month 10 Day order Last Weekday SUN Hour of the day 1 1 Use Not Set whether to use DST If Use is selected the time entry boxes appear Start time The DST start time Set as in 2nd hour on the first Sunday in April 2 Month Select the month between January 1 and December 12 3 Day order Set the number of the week in the month in which the day specified by Weekday falls Select from 1 1st 2 2nd 3 3rd 4 4th and Last 4 Weekday Set the day of the week Select from SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI and SAT 5 Hour of the day Set the hour Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter the value Enter the hour as in 1 hour 2 hour 23 hour and press DISP ENTER For the procedures for entering values see section 3 6 Entering Numbers and Characters End time The DST end time Set as in 1st hour on the first Sunday in October The method of setting Month Day order Weekday and Hour of the day are the same as with Start time Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Explanation Start time and End time You cannot set the same value to Start time and End time 5 42 IM 04L05A01
333. re discarded when MAX and MIN are determined Measurement computation errors over range and computation overflow are discarded when determining AVE and SUM The report output values of AVE MAX MIN and SUM vary depending on the data condition of the measurement and computation channels as shown in the table below Item Data Condition of Measurement Channels Report Output Value AVE When all data are measurement errors or over range Blank Average value MAX MIN When all data are measurement errors Blank Maximum value Positive over range 99999 minimum value Negative over range 99999 SUM e When all data are measurement errors or over Blank Sum value range e When the sum value exceeds 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 e When the sum value is below 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 Item Data Condition of Computation Channels Report Output Value AVE When all data are computation errors or over range Blank Average value MAX MIN e When all data are computation errors Blank Maximum value When the maximum value exceeds 99999999 999999999 minimum value When the minimum value is below 9999999 99999999 The decimal position that was specified when the span for the equation was specified is reflected in the maximum and minimum values For example if the span setting of the equation is 200 0 then 99999999 is output when the value exceeds 99999999 9 and 99999999 is output wh
334. record On 22 Sign record UserID Use 23 9 3 Use Not 3 e Setting Administrator See section 4 4 Q System Mode tink 9 Admin settings o Nunber Em Login method Key Com 1 Q User name fBc2001 2 a User ID 6555 _ _ 3 Password 222722 4 22222222 denauts the default password Password expire off 5 1 2 3 e Setting Users See section 4 4 System Node User settings thernet Number a Login method Key 6 User name bpel 7 User ID ess 8 Password 2222277 9 denoutes the default password Password expire 1month 10 Losin mode No 1 Number of the login mode applied 1 2 3 4 Next 1 8 e Setting Login Mode for Users See section 4 4 Setting Data Saving See section 4 3 tetra System Mode Link Number Application Sign record Signature 12 Type of process Batch 40 Key Trend clear on 38 START Free Batch Free STOP Free Message Free HENU Lock Snapshet Free 11 USER Free Math Free DISP ENTER Free Save data Free Load data Free Alarm ACK Free E mail Free Hedia eject Free Other Free 1 2 E q Next 1 8 Setting Data Saving See section 4 3 ettin i Hemory Hemory and trend Data e 39 Heas CH Math CH Display data is set First CH Last CH 39 On Off on CH1 is set Memory timeup Timeup type Off Display Event IM 04L05A01 01E 3 19 3 5 Setting the Functions System Mode and Engineering Mode
335. reens soft key Soft keys fese oF oft keys tesc DISP ENTER key ys ESC key End soft key DISP ENTER key When logged in as a registered administrator the system mode can be entered Setting screens Setting screens IM 04L05A01 01E Foreword Notes Trademarks Revisions Disk No RE33 4th Edition August 2004 YK Thank you for purchasing the YOKOGAWA DAQSTATION DX100P This User s Manual contains useful information about the functions installation wiring operating procedures and troubleshooting of the DX100P To ensure correct use please read this manual thoroughly before operation Keep this manual in a safe place for quick reference in the event a question arises In addition a quick reference is provided on the previous page This reference briefly explains operations that are used frequently Separate this reference from the manual for use The following four manuals including this one are provided as manuals for the DX100P Manual Name Manual No Description DX100P User s Manual IM 04L05A01 01E This manual Explains all functions and procedures of the DX100P excluding the communication functions DX100P DX200P IM 04L05A01 02E Briefly explains basic operations of the Operation Guide DX100P DX200P DX100P DX200P IM 04L05A01 17E Explains the communication functions of Communication Interface the Ethernet serial
336. related to entering numerical values see section 3 6 Entering Numbers and Characters 6 Color Select the color of the trip line from 16 colors Red green blue blue violet brown orange yellow green light blue violet gray limes cyan dark blue yellow silver and purple Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Initial Settings of the Groups Group Name Group 1 GROUP 1 Group 2 GROUP 2 Group 3 GROUP 3 Group 4 GROUP 4 Group 5 GROUP 5 Group 6 GROUP 6 The initial setting varies depending on the models the number of installed channels Group Number DX102P DX104P DX106P DX112P 01 02 01 02 01 02 01 02 01 02 01 02 onhWD 01 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 05 06 01 02 03 04 05 06 01 02 03 04 05 06 01 02 03 04 05 06 01 02 03 04 05 06 01 02 03 04 05 06 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 Initial Colors of the Trip Lines Trip line No 1 Red Trip line No 2 Green Trip line No 3 Blue Trip line No 4 Yellow IM 04L05A01 01E apo Burssourbuy y ul uoneIn yuo a 5 10 Setting the Channel Display Colors Trend Bar Graph Procedure
337. ress the DISP ENTER key A window appears for you to enter a comment Pass Fail 6 10 IM 04L05A01 01E 6 3 Signing Display Data Event Data Note After confirming the data select Pass if it is OK or Fail if it is not Define the pass fail criteria for each application and for each user 8 Enter a comment up to 32 characters and press the DISP ENTER key A confirmation window opens 9 Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key The approval information is added to the data file on the external storage medium The operation screen is displayed Note While the DX100P is writing the approval information to the data file in the external storage medium and the file is being transferred using FTP when the file transfer function through FTP is used the keys on the DX100P do not operate If a remote control singal is received the action is executed after the above mentioned processing ends Exiting from the Sign Record Screen without Signing 1 Press the DISP ENTER key to display the screen menu 2 Move the cursor to ESC using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key to return to the original operation screen Select to exit from the sign record display without signing IM 04L05A01 01E 6 11 uoljeiado oiseg l Chapter 7 Switching Operation Screens Operations Using the Arrow Keys and DISP ENTER Key 7 1 Displaying and Switching Operation Screens The screen is sw
338. ribes a number which defines a transient overvoltage condition It implies the regulation for impulse withstand voltage Il applies to electrical equipment which is supplied from the fixed installation like distribution board 2 Pollution degree describes the degree to which a solid liquid or gas which deteriorates dielectric strength or surface resistivity is adhering 2 applies to normal indoor atmosphere Normally only non conductive pollution occurs 3 Applies to measuring circuits connected to low voltage installation and electrical instruments supplied with power from fixed equipment such as electric switchboards 11 20 IM 04L05A01 01E 11 9 Dimensional Drawings Unit mm approx inch The dimensional tolerance is 3 unless otherwise specified However the tolerance for dimensions less than 10 mm is 0 3 mm 23 4 218 8 58 Min SPACE FOR 0 92 165 5 6 52 Min MOUNTING PANEL THICKNESS 2 TO 26 9 3 0 37 144 5 67 151 5 6 96 5 37 af DIMENSIONS 144 5 67 N 2 AFTER MOUNTING 151 5 5 96 Note When mounting to a panel use two brackets one each of the top and bottom of the DX100P or on the left and rig
339. rip Line 5 Trip line Select the width of the trip line as 1 2 or 3 dots Setting the Number of Grids on the Waveform Display Area 6 Grid Select the number of grids from 4 to 12 and Auto Auto Display the same number of grids as the number of scale divisions of the first assigned channel of the group Setting the Interval at Which the Displayed Group is Automatically Switched 7 Scroll time Select the interval from 5 s 10 s 20 s 30 s and 1 min Setting the Number of Displayed Digits of the Scale Value 8 Scale digit Normal See the explanation given in Scale values in section 5 12 Fine The number of displayed digits of the scale value is increased by one See the explanation given in Scale values in section 5 12 Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Grid on the Waveform Display Area 2 8 a ya o 1 8 z 2 5 71 5 es 888 5 2 Poti thy hr eee eee ree 3 0 2 8 ue 1 8 2 0 3 PT ET eT Pn PTE a a 3 5 2s m s u e5 NSZ as I Al ir l ili idar PA at i vi ae 81 Grid The number of grid is 10 in this example IM 04L05A01 01E 5 25 apo Burseourbuy y ul uoneIn yuo a 5 14 Setting the Brightness of the Screen and the Backlight Saver Function There
340. rmined by the display update rate The relationship between the display update rate and the sampling interval of display data is as follows Display Update 15s 30s 1min 2min 5min 10min 15 min 20 min 30 min 1h 2h 4h 10h Rate div Sampling interval 0 5 1 2 4 10 20 30 40 60 120 240 480 1200 of display data s for DX102P and DX104P only Display data can be likened to the conventional recording on the chart sheet and are useful for long term data acquisition Event data are instantaneous values of the measured computed data at specified sampling intervals The sampling interval can be selected from the selections below You cannot specify a sampling interval that is faster than the scan interval For the setting procedure see section 4 3 DX102P DX104P 125 ms 250 ms 500 ms 1 s 2 s 5s 10 s 30 s 60 s 120 s 300 s and 600 s DX106P DX112P 1s 2s 5s 10 s 30 s 60 s 120 s 300 s and 600 s By setting the sampling interval equal to the scan interval all measured computed data sampled at the scan interval can be saved This is useful when you wish to acquire the measured computed data in detail Channels for Saving the Display Data Event Data You can specify the channels to save the display data or event data For the procedure see section 4 3 By default the data of all measurement computation channels is set to be saved Acquiring Display Data Event Data to the Internal Memory The size of the internal memory
341. rsor position Del soft key Deletes the character at the cursor position A a 1 soft key Each time the key is pressed the character type assigned to the character input keys switches A upper case alphabet characters numbers and symbols a lower case alphabet characters numbers and symbols 1 numbers IM 04L05A01 01E 3 23 suoneado uowwo eo 3 7 Using the Remote Controll Terminal Handling Precautions If the infrared signal output section of the remote control terminal or the light receiving section on the DX100P becomes dirty or receives scratches it can hinder the transmission reception of the infrared signal Clean the infrared signal output section of the remote control terminal or the light receiving section on the DX100P as necessary e When cleaning wipe using a dry soft cloth Do not use volatile chemicals since this might cause discoloring and deformation Do not apply shock to the remote control terminal Do not operate the remote control terminal with wet hands The transmission reception sensitivity of the infrared signal may deteriorate if used in the following types of locations e Location where the light receiving section of the DX100P is exposed to direct sunlight or fluorescent lamp e Near magnetic field sources such as a transceiver e If you carry the remote control unit in your pocket for example keys may be pressed unintentionally and cause the DX100P or DX200P herein after
342. s seconds minutes O J Time to be corrected Deviation between the time of the DXP and the set time Error Error operation Warning Warning Messages are displayed Error 210 Media has not been inserted Warning 601 Measured data have been initialized IM 04L05A01 01E App 19 xipueddy Ey Appendix 6 Style Numbers and Functions This section describes the relationship between the style numbers and the functions that have been added or changed The style number S1 is not applied to the DX100P Style Number S3 e Easy text entry KB1 KB2 options e Key operations to enter characters is changed Style Number S4 e Calibration correction CC1 option Ethernet communications e Registered users can logs into the DX100P e Setting measurement server setting function and the monitor function e FTP client Transfers screen image data files at snapshot e Maintenance test server setting function and the monitor function e Serial communications C2 C3 options Setting measurement function e Barcode input e Display update rate e 15 min is added e Administrator User e Login method key operations or via the Ethernet e Password 6 to 8 alphanumeric characters e Historical trend screen e Displays time at the cursor position e DAQSIGNIN e Communicator is added Receives the setup data from and sends the setup data to the DX100P via the Ethernet communications Style Number S5 e Setup operat
343. s the 50 most recent operations A log of access to the SNTP server the 50 most recent operations For details related to the display format see section 8 9 Error Log Example The number of the log displayed on the last line Total number of logs 012 050 Time No Message Nov 19 2081 10 50 18 111 The login user ID is inc Nov 19 2881 10 48 08 612 Please acknowledge all a Nov 19 2081 18 13 36 889 Press FUNC key to logi Nov 19 2001 18 13 62 661 Measured data have been Nov 19 2881 18 12 38 613 You can t sign this reco Nov 19 2081 87 15 51 245 This function cannot be Nov 19 2081 07 15 05 152 This action is not possi Nov 19 2881 07 14 50 218 Media has not been inser Nov 19 2081 07 08 46 152 This action is not possi Nov 19 2081 07 08 46 152 This action is not possi Nov 19 2081 07 07 50 612 Please acknowledge all a Nov 19 2001 07 07 46 612 Please acknowledge all a Error message Error code see chapter 9 Date and time of occurrence IM 04L05A01 01E 1 55 SUOI DUNY JO M Q a 1 10 Other Functions Time Change Function The time of the DX100P internal clock can be changed using keys remote control function R1 option or SNTP client function e Key Operation The DX100P internal clock is set to the specified time e Remote Control Function The DX100P internal clock is adjusted to the nearest hour See section 1 9 e SNTP Client Function The DX100P internal clock is set to th
344. s 5 1 e Separate the input wiring from the noise source e Ground the recorder properly e Ground the measuring object properly e Insulate the TC from the measured object e Use shielded cable for input e Correct the A D integration frequency See section 4 2 e Use the input filter See section 5 4 e Use the cover for the input terminal e Protect the input terminal from wind or fans e Keep the room temperature constant around the input terminal e Wire correctly See section 2 4 e Fix the terminal block properly e Fasten the terminal screws e Insulate the RTD from ground e If burnt replace the TC e Stop the TC burnout upscale downscale function of other equipment e Ground the recorder and other equipment at the same grounding pole e Disconnect parallel wiring Use a double element TC for instance Set the RJC correctly See section 4 2 9 14 IM 04L05A01 01E 9 2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart Display and other functions do not work properly e Separate the input and communication wiring from the noise source e Ground the recorder properly e Use shielded cables for input and communication wiring e Insert an isolation transformer into the power line e Insert a power line filter into the power line e If an inductive load is connected to an alarm contact output use a surge suppresser on that line Is the input free of noise Contact your nearest Sales
345. s Specified Alarm ACK Media Batch Message Snapshot Math Data save Data load E mail Others Alarm ACK operation on the overview screen and Alarm ACK operation by the USER key are not allowed Zip disk eject operation is not allowed on the models with the Zip disk drive Batch soft key is not displayed Message soft key is not displayed Message writing by the USER key does not operate Snapshot soft key is not displayed Snapshot by the USER key does not operate Math START Math STOP Math reset and Math ACK soft keys are not displayed Math START Math STOP and Math reset operations by the USER key do not operate Display data save Event data save and Manual Sample soft keys are not displayed Manual sampling by the USER key does not operate Display data load Event data load soft keys are not displayed Mail START Mail STOP Mail transmission test soft keys are not displayed 4 screen Log FTP test MODBUS master and File list soft keys are not displayed Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 4 14 IM 04L05A01 01E 4 4 Registering Users and Setting the Login Function and Electronic Signature Function Registering Users When Data Acquisition
346. s per a second The time can be adjusted by a remote contact with the remote control option Automatically sets the internal clock ahead by 1 hour during the specified period in the year 100 ppm excluding a delay of 1 second maximum caused each time the power is turned on A built in lithium battery backs up the setup parameters battery life approximately ten years at room temperature Each terminal to ground terminal 20 MQ or greater at 500 VDC Power supply to ground terminal 1500 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 minute except P1 model Power supply to ground terminal 500 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 minute P1 model Contact output terminal to ground terminal 1500 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 minute Measuring input terminal to ground terminal 1500 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 minute Between measuring input terminals 1000 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 minute except for b terminal of RTD input of DX106P and DX112P Between remote control terminal to ground terminal 500 VDC 1 minute IM 04L05A01 01E 11 19 suoneoyioeds Ey 11 8 General Specifications Safety and EMC Standards CSA UL CE Certified by CSA22 2 No 1010 1 Installation category Overvoltage category II Pollution degree 2 Certified by UL61010B B CSA NRTL C EMC Complies with EN61326 1 Complies with EN61000 3 2 Complies with EN61000 3 3 Low voltage Complies with EN61010 1 Measurement category II 1 Installation category Overvoltage category desc
347. s set to Batch 1 The selections vary depending on the number of channels of data that is saved and the sampling interval 2 The value varies depending on the number of channels of data that is saved and the sampling interval Specified time You can specify a time to save the data as follows This operation is called data saving through memory timeup Batch data file saved using memory timeup cannot be signed on the DX100P see page 1 37 e Every hour on the hour e Specified hour on the hour every day e Specified hour on the hour on the specified day every week e Specified hour on the hour on the specified day every month When the acquisition to the memory is stopped Examples of data save operation to the external storage medium Example 1 Auto save interval or data length 1 day Date and time when data is saved to the external storage medium Not use After starting at 13 10 data is saved every 24 hours after at 13 10 everyday 7 19 13 10 7 20 13 10 7 21 13 10 7 22 13 10 5 Memory start Saved to the aviainall ional medium Example 2 Auto save interval or data length 1 day Date and time when data is saved to the external storage medium 0 hour every day After starting at 13 10 on July 19th data is saved at 0 hour on July 20th and then every day after and at 0 hour every day the same time for both in this example 7 19 13 10 7 20 0 00 7 21 0 00 7 22 0 00 gt Memory start
348. save interval of the display data see section 5 6 IM 04L05A01 01E 4 5 apo wa shs oy u UONesNBYyUOD a 4 3 Setting the Method of the Display Event Data Acquisition and Saving 2 Event Sample rate Select the sampling interval for the event data You cannot specify a sampling interval that is faster than the scan interval DX102P DX104P 125 ms 250 ms 500 ms 1s 2s 5s 10 s 30s 60 s 125 300 s and 600 s DX106P DX112P 1 s 2s 5s 10 s 30 s 60 s 120 s 300 s and 600 s 3 Event Data length This is the interval for delimiting the event data in the internal memory and saving to the external storage medium Use the soft key to select the interval see Explanation If Type of process is set to Batch the Data length is fixed to the maximum possible value You cannot change this value Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Setting the Channels to Display the Trend and Acquire the Data Setting the Data Saving Time Memory Timeup To display the menu screen press the soft key To display the setting screen press the soft key Hemory and trend Heas CH Math CH _ First CH I Last CH a1 2 On Off On 3 Hemory timeup Timeup type Hour 4 Date 1 5 Time ho
349. scribed in Changing the Display The time axis can be expanded or reduced with respect to the display reference position Display data 2 times the trend display to 1 60 minimum Event data Reduction only up to 1 60 minimum The minimum magnification and the factor by which the display can be expanded or reduced with one operation vary depending on the display update rate for the display data and on the sampling interval for the event data 7 14 IM 04L05A01 01E Chapter 8 Other Key Operations 8 1 Setting the Batch Number Lot Number and Comment Procedure These procedures are carried out in the operation mode Opening the Batch Screen 1 Press the FUNC key The soft key menu is displayed 2 Press the Batch soft key to display the batch screen Batch e OOOO O Ol 4 es n arrow Changing the Batch Number 3 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the Batch No box Press the Input soft key The other items are dimmed and the batch number can be entered Change the batch number up to 32 characters and press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the change For the procedures for entering strings see section 3 6 Entering Values and Strings Changing the Lot Number 4 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the Lot No box Press the Input soft key The other items are dimmed and the lot number can be entered Change the lot number up to 8 digits and press t
350. sesorar teiar aaa MeEaASUr Ng range eeeeeeeeeseceeeeseteeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaees media FIFO tasoero rn g r E memory alarm time sir Message SHIN eeseseseesieeeesiesirererinrrrerinrinernnrinerenreenn MOVING AVETAGE sessssssisssesrnsseerrnrinsennrensrntrearrnsrearensteee number of digits of the Scale c ceeeeeeeeeteeeeeseeeeees 5 24 partial expanded display c eee eeeeeee 4 22 5 17 reference junction compensation remote Control FUNCTIONS 0 0 eee eeeeteeeeeeteeteeereeteeeeeeaees 4 16 remote controller id lee seeteceseeeseeeseeeeseeseaneeeeeees 4 22 report function rolling average communication Ethernet c cece eeeeeeneeeeees 11 10 computation functions Cu10 Cu25 RTD input ee cece eeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 11 13 data management cceeeeeteeeeeeeeteeteeeesteees 11 8 11 9 data Storage ccccscisacecctseccctecserestceeeeeteersceesonastceestsereceses 11 5 desktop type 11 12 dimensional drawings 11 21 display wo we 11 3 CASY 1OXt CNTY nc cccs cn EEEE E E 11 15 FAIL memory end Output eee cece tenet eeeeeee 11 11 GENEL ee eeeeeeeeseeseeeseeeeees 11 16 input 11 1 normal operating conditions 11 18 POWEF SUPPLY si eccccitecsdivteervadtanecevceceesdsecuecubecevertebatuadves 11 17 remote control 0 ees seeeeseecsseeeneessaeeeseessseseneeseaeees 11 14 serial communication interface
351. span off selectable applied to upper and lower limits alarms common to all measurement channels Relay outputs option Number of points 2 4 or 6 points Relay action Energized de energized hold non hold AND OR reflash actions selectable The alarm relay condition is held even in the system mode Alarm information Alarm types date and time of alarm occurrences releases Up to 240 latest alarms are stored in the internal memory Displayed on the alarm summary screen Alarm ACK information Alarm types date and time of alarm ACK operation user name Up to 240 latest alarms are stored in the internal memory Displayed on the alarm ACK summary screen IM 04L05A01 01E 11 7 suoneoyioeds Ey 11 5 Specifications of the Function Used to Manage the Data Supports 21 CFR Part 11 of the FDA Food and Drug Administration Login Function Users enter identification information The user can operate the DX100P when the user is confirmed as a registered user User types Administrator 3 administrators Able to perform all operations Login method Key only or Key and via communications User 90 users Set the range of operations allowed for each user System mode operations are not allowed Time set operation is not allowed Login method Key only via communications only or Key and via communications User identification User name user ID and password are used Combinations of user ID and password that have been used in the past
352. specified time is between 10 hours 21 minutes 5 seconds and 10 hours 21 minutes 25 seconds Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key IM 04L05A01 01E 4 31 apo wa shs oy u UONesNBYyUOD a 4 16 Using the Storage Area of the External Storage Medium Cyclically FIFO Operation of the Storage Media Procedure Set the storage method that retains the specified number of the newest files in the storage area of the external storage medium For a description of this function see section 1 4 Enter the system mode Press the soft key Next Press the AUX Media FIFO soft key The setup screen is displayed AUX Tag Channel Channel Hemory alarm lh Language English Partial Not Remote Controller ID Off Hedia FIFO On Off kia 1 Media FIFO On Uses the storage area of the external storage medium cyclically Off Does not use the storage area of the external storage medium cyclically Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 4 32 IM 04L05A01 01E Chapter 5 Configuration in the Engineering Mode 5 1 Setting
353. splay the Load settings screen thernet nil Link Load settings Directory File name Time 1 Using the up and down arrow keys select the directory root directory or SETO containing the setup file shown in the Directory name box A list of files in the selected directory is displayed in the right column 2 Press the right arrow key to move the cursor on to the file list Press the up or down arrow key to select the setup file to be loaded Press the ESC key to cancel the operation and return to the Save Load Initialize menu 3 Press the Details soft key to view the information about the file File name jaged Damage check nae settings Damaged File damaged data tampered etc Dec 28 20 k k 11 88 Save type ABC2081 Save settings File saved through save settings operation r Change settings File saved when settings File number F were changed A sequence number assigned inthe Date and time the file was saved order of occurrence when Save type is Change settings identical tothe Name of the user who saved the file number in the setting change log file See Audit Trail Function in section 1 5 4 26 IM 04L05A01 01E 4 11 Saving Loading Setup Data 4 Press the DISP ENTER key The loaded setup data is activated and the user is logged out When the loaded setup data is different from the setup data of the DX100P the setup file is saved to the external stor
354. ssigned Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Explanation Actions That Can Be Assigned and the Reference Sections for Operation For details of actions see section 1 10 Soft Key Ref section Note None 7 No operation AlarmACK 8 12 Math 8 4 When computation function M1 is equipped Math rst 8 4 When computation function M1 is equipped M sample 8 3 Message 1 to 8 8 2 Messages 1 to 8 of the message group 7 can be assigned Snapshot 8 5 IM 04L05A01 01E 5 13 apo Buissourbuy y ul uoneIn yuo a 5 9 Setting Groups and Trip Lines Procedure Trend digital and bar graph screens are displayed in groups Channels can be assigned to each group and the group name can be registered Number of groups 6 Number of channels Up to 10 channels group A line to indicate a particular value of interest trip line can be displayed on the trend display The maximum number of trip lines that can be displayed in one group is four e You can specify the thickness of the trip lines see section 5 13 Press the soft key Next Press the soft key as To display the setting screen press the soft key Group number fi 1 Group set Group name GROUP 1 ___ 2 CH set 01 02 03 04 E 3
355. stering Users and Setting the Login Function and Electronic Signature Function Explanation Setting the Login Mode 8 Calibration correction set This item is displayed when the calibration correction CC1 is equipped Use You can change the segments for calibration correction Not You cannot change the segments for calibration correction or the range of the measurement channel 1 Items in section 5 21 2 Items in section 5 1 Cannot be changed because changing the range of the measurement channel may affect the calibration correction Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Calibration correction set Sets whether to allow the changing of the segments for calibration correction when the calibration correction CC1 option is installed Below are the items that can be specified depending on this setting and the MENU setting in the next section Setting the Login Mode Calibration correction set MENU Login mode Lock Free You can only specify calibration You can specify all Engineering Use correction settings Mode settings You can specify Engineering Mode Not You cannot specify Engineering settings excluding the range setting Mode settings of the measurement channel and the c
356. string 3 To confirm the string that you entered press the DISP ENTER key To cancel press the ESC key Note e When entering a string the up and down arrow keys are disabled On DX100P with the computation option M1 use the keys on the DX100P to enter the computing equation of the computation channel Computing elements such as SQR and TLOG are not assigned to the keys on the remote control terminal When a character input window is displayed on the DX100P screen pressing the A a 1 key switches the character type assigned to the character input keys as shown in the following figure Uppercase alphabet Lowercase alphabet characters and symbols characters and symbols Numbers Uppercase alphabet characters and symbols lowercase alphabet characters and symbols Alphabet A to Z or a to z Each time the MARK key is pressed the displayed symbol switches in the following order The display switches in a cyclic pattern MARK key Number of times the key is pressed 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Symbol s l e Numbers Number 1 to 9 and 0 Decimal point However when setting a constant to be used in the computation on the DX100P with the computation option M1 the display switches in the order and E each time the key is pressed The display switches in a cyclic pattern Minus sign IM 04L05A01 01E 3 27 suoeado uowwoy el 3 7 Using the R
357. sult Computes the average value of channel e1 TLOG SUM Syntax TLOG SUM e1 Result Computes the summation of channel e1 TLOG P P Syntax TLOG P P e1 Result Computes the maximum value minimum value of channel e1 An Example of Computing Equations TLOG MAX 01 K01xSQR 02 Examples of Computing Equations That are Not Allowed TLOG AVE 01 TLOG AVE 02 Reason TLOG appears twice in one equation TLOG AVE ABS 01 Reason A computing element is used inside the parentheses Rules for Writing an Equation Common Items Follow the rules below in writing the computing equations e Use up to 40 characters to write equations The precedence of computing terms can be specified using parentheses e Specify the channels in the equation using channel numbers You can use 01 or 1 for example to specify one digit numbers for channels constants communication input data and conditions of the remote control terminals in equations Example 01 1 K01 K1 C01 C1 D01 D1 The data value for the channel used in the equation and for all channels greater in number than that channel are substituted with data from the previous scan Do not use more than 16 stacks channel KO1 to K12 C01 to C12 D01 to D08 in one equation Otherwise a computation error may occur The computed result is set to positive overflow displayed as xxxxxx in this case Example The number of stacks in the equation 01 K01x 03 04
358. t P1 model A1352EF 4 250 V 4A time lag P1 model Mounting bracket B9900BX 2 Remote control terminal 438227 1 Validation Document 438221 1 Electronic file for DX100P 438222 1 A4 size paper 438223 1 Letter size paper vi IM 04L05A01 01E How to Use this Manual Structure of the Manual This user s manual consists of the following sections For details on the communication functions and DAQSIGNIN provided with the package see the respective manuals IM 04L05A01 17E and IM 04L05A01 61E Chapter Title and Description 1 Overview of Functions Describes the functional overview of the DX100P 2 Before Using the DX100P Describes the names of each part of the DX100P and how to install and wire the DX100P 3 Common Operations Describes how to use the storage medium drive run mode and common key operations 4 Settings in the System Mode Describes how to set various items in the system mode 5 Settings in the Engineering Mode Describes how to set various items in the engineering mode 6 Basic Operation Operation Mode Describes the procedures from logging in and recording measured data to adding approval information to the recorded result 7 Switching Operation Screens Describes how to use the operation screen such as the trend screen and digital screen Describes the operations that can be performed using the arrow keys and the DISP ENTER key on the front panel 8 Other Operations Opera
359. t carrying handle cautions MESSAGES 00 cece eee eee eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeseeeeatenaes CelSIUS eaten MASS asia dane a changing the password 5 channel display color sesssssseessssiesrersrsrisesrerinenserrseneerrrense channel number display esssssessessseserrssrnerierrnsrnerrnsrnerrerns channels for saving the display data event data 3 channels to acquire the data cece eeeeceeeeeeteeeeees ClO al sir sea cinanitavsig AE RESE A 3 15 clear computed results remote control 1 54 clearing the computation dropout display ceeeeee 8 7 COMMON EE PEE covedice E TATT 8 2 common logarithm 1 43 communication FUNCTION ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeteeneeeeetaeeess 1 1 communication input data 1 43 computation channels sesesssereeseesresrsrresrrerrerinrrrerrnrrnes 1 43 computation data dropout 1 44 8 7 COMPUTATION FUNCTION 0 0 eceecece cee eeeeceeseeeteseeeeeseeeteeeeees 1 43 computation operators conditions of the remote control terminals ta CONSTAMS ics a veessie ld edea cial etatawisiiielavenss 1 43 contact specifications alarm 2 13 contact specifications FAlL memory end i 2 14 COMMUMUGUS arseisccsdsascesssteeisataszcxsasadessensctbsanaeni 1 22 D daily TODOM sii tea ts stiicsittiosnunaieuaendiesamceciiincaes DAQSIGNIN Software ccceeeeceeeeeceeeeee
360. t passwords for three consecutive times the user registration becomes invalid D Logout 6 1 Enclosed in parentheses are reference sections To avoid injury death of personnel or damage to the instrument the operator must refer to the explanation in the User s Manual or Service Manual ene key function see section 3 4 Logs out Writes messages Stops computation Saves the display data Manual Math Snap Save Date Logout Batch Message sample STOP shot Display Load Enters the batch number Executes manual Savesascreen Load the display event data and lot number sampling image data in the external storage medium Lists files in the external storage medium Changes pssword Startss computation Saves the event data l l l Password E Mail Hath Hath Save change START START reset Event l Displays the log Starts the e mail Resets computation screen Performs the e mail Retrieves time information transmission test from a SNTP server Release the User locked icon FiPtest 8 snip Modbus test master Performs the FTP test Displays the MODBUS STATUS screen Locked ACK Swtiching the Mode see section 3 3 Power ON End soft key DISP ENTER key Login OPeration mode menu key Operation lt Menu screen Engineering mode System mode Menu screen System mode sc
361. t the remote terminal 0 Computation Data Dropout Computation data dropout occurs when the computation is not completed within the scan interval The computation icon displayed in the status display section turns yellow see page 1 18 and section 8 4 When computation data are acquired to the internal memory the data immediately before a computation drop out are substituted for the computation data at the time of the dropout e When this occurs frequently lower the CPU load by reducing the number of computation channels or making the scan interval longer How to Write Equations Unit Handling See section 5 18 The unit corresponding to the measured computed data in the equation is not compensated In computations measured and computed data are handled as values without units For example if the measured data from channel 01 is 20 mV and the measured data from channel 02 is 20 V the computed result of 01 02 is 40 Order of Precedence of the Operators The order of precedence of the operators in the equation is as follows Type Operator higher precedence Functions ABS SQR LOG EXP TLOG MAX TLOG MIN TLOG P P TLOG SUM TLOG AVE Power XxX Logical negation NOT Multiplication and division x Addition and subtraction Greater than less than GT LT GE LE Equal not equal EQ NE Logical AND AND Logical OR exclusive OR OR XOR lower precedence Displayi
362. tal or vertical For details related to the display method see section 7 2 Trend Vertical F2 0 1 2 4 Fark are NENE Faridi OO Br 2 5 1 5 ad EP Es 1 8 2 6 amp Scale rales titi tii tir 3 5 2 1 7 rii PEENE Fark a Fidi Display update rate Time div wv Message Trip line Tag Channel no 8 abs Measured computed value 051H 8 052 0 0501 Y Y Y Numerical display section Trend Vertical All channel display AIRT A ATAA iO EA 2A P O A N e A AEA 3 0 1 8 L6 U 8 9 1 8 m E re E A e Clwivalls A AAA 16344 i p Lman di ait Does FF H SS Waveform for all channels that are v 05 42 ROWER k 3 A eee registered to display the trend i 7 2 3 6 961 H B 988 H B 961 H B 968 Data from selected group BEES B EE Trend Display Horizontal Type 1 Trend pisphy Horizontal Type 2 5 02 52 o spa gz E E E E E 81 5 1 2 ag Lsi 1 2 Bas a 33 1 6 0 5 0 4 m EEE ea Se a4 Es i nit fey a RA T N T TIT T on i p oo j f Updating the Waveform and Updating the Numerical Display One division along the time axis consists of 30 dots on the LCD The displayed waveform is updated at an interval corresponding to one dot This interval is determined by the
363. tblue Violet Gray Lime Cyan Darkblue Yellow Lightgray Purple Math Zone Lower lofto 95 Numerical value Upper 5 tol 100 Math partial On Off On Expand 1 to 99 Numerical value Boundary App 2 IM 04L05A01 01E Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings Parameters Menu Notes Math Graph Division 4 5 6 7 8 9 io 12 C10 Bar graph Norma Center Scale position off aO 2 3 4 5 6 File Header Character string Initial setting is all space Directory name Character string Initial setting is DATA 0 Save Load Save settings Load settings Save data to media Time set YY MM DD HH MM SS Numerical value DST Summer Winter Batch set Lot number Use Not lUse si Not Auto increment ions Off Header 1 Character string 2 3 Math set 1 Math range On Off On S Equation for computation Span Lower Numerical value Span Upper Unit Character string Math alarm On Off On Type H L T t Value Numerical value Relay On Off On Off Number 101 to 106 Up to model types Math set 2 Constant K01 to K30 Numerical value Initial setting is 1 Math set 3 Tag Tag Character string Initial setting is all space TLOG Timer No 2 3 Sum scale min Ih Rolling On Off average Interval is 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s 10s 12s 15s 20s 3
364. ted appears and the DX100P cannot end the system mode The error message is cleared by pressing the ESC key Insert an external storage medium into the drive and carry out the procedure again If you end the system mode you are logged out No Does not save the settings and you are logged out The settings of the system mode remain the same as those before the setting change operation Cancel Cancels the operation to end the system mode and returns to the system mode menu screen The setting changes made up to that point are retained IM 04L05A01 01E suoeado uowwoy eo 3 5 Setting the Functions System Mode and Engineering Mode Function Setup Example The function setup items and values for the case of a batch process when setting the users that can log in and batch conditions and recording the measured data of input channel CH1 as shown in the figure below are described Bold characters indicate items set in the system mode thin characters indicate items set in the engineering mode or input items in the operation mode The numbers inside the parentheses correspond to the numbers assigned to the items of the setup screen on the succeeding pages Login conditions Adminstrator Login method Key operations and via the Ethernet User name ABC2001 User ID 5555 Password AAAAAA Password expire Off User Login method Key operations User name ope1 User ID 6666 Password yvspmj Password expire 1 month Lo
365. ted Energize or de energize applies to all alarm output relays IN LA NILA De energize NO NO c NC Energize When power is turned OFF When no alarm occurs When an alarm occurs NO Normally opened C common NC normally closed Hold Non Hold Operation of the Alarm Output Relay There are two methods in operating the alarm output relay Turns OFF the output relay when the cause of the alarm is no longer met non hold e Holds the output relay ON until the alarm acknowledge operation is executed hold Non hold Hold Alarm ACK Alarm ACK Occurrence Release i Alam Activated Output Relay Released Note When the system mode is entered the activated released condition of the previous alarm output relay is held Alarm detection is not carried out in the system mode and you cannot release the alarm output relay 1 42 IM 04L05A01 01E 1 7 Computation Function and Report Function M1 Option Equations can be written to computation channels by using the measured data or computed data as variables The result of the computation can be displayed or stored For report functions see page 1 48 Computation Channels and Execution of Equation Number of the computation channels varies as shown in the table below Computation is performed at the scan interval Model Computation channels DX102P Channel 31 to 38 8 channels DX104P Channel 31 to 38 8 channels DX106P Channel 31 t
366. tension is created in the SETO directory of the external storage medium and the logs are added For details on the file name see appendix 3 Displaying the Setting Change Log Displayed through FUNC key operation see section 8 9 The numbers that are assigned in the order of occurrence are not displayed This number can be confirmed using the DAQSIGNIN that came with the package The number of the log displayed on the last line Total number of logs 812 616 Time File Name User Name Nov 19 18 49 25 Y1918491 ABC201 Nov 19 10 25 03 1918251 ABC2001 Nov 19 10 12 33 1918121 ABC2001 Nov 19 7 4 44 Y1907041 ABC2001 Nov 19 07 01 39 Y1907011 ABC2 1 Nov 19 06 55 06 Y1906551 ABC2 1 Nov 16 14 44 27 Y1614441 ABC2001 Nov 16 14 35 07 Y1614351 ABC2 1 Nov 16 14 28 00 Y1614281 ABC2 1 Nov 16 13 16 84 Y1613161 ABC2 1 Nov 16 12 36 56 Y1612361 ABC2001 Nov 16 12 33 35 Y1612331 ABC2 1 Name of the user who changed the settings Setup file name that was saved Date and time when settings were changed e Clearing the Setting Change Log The setting change log in the internal memory is cleared when initialization clear 1 is executed in the system mode 1 36 IM 04L05A01 01E 1 5 Function for Managing Measured Computed Data Electronic Signature Function This function is used to add the following approval information to the displayed data event data files that are saved on the external storage medium
367. ter converting the current to the voltage signal A 250 Q shunt resistor for example is used to convert a4 to 20 mA to a 1 to 5 V Name Model Code Specification Shunt resistors 4159 20 250 Q 0 1 for screw terminals 4159 21 100 Q 40 1 4159 22 10 Q 0 1 Shunt resistors 4389 20 250 Q 40 1 for clamped terminals 4389 21 100 Q 0 1 4389 22 10 Q 0 1 Input Range and Measurable Range You can select the Input range that is appropriate for the input signal for DC voltage TC RTD and DI for example R S B K E J T N W L and U are available input ranges for TC For each Input range a measurable range is defined for example the measurable range for R of TC is 0 0 C to 1760 C For details see section 5 1 You can specify an arbitrary range within the measurable range as a display span Measurable range Example TC Type R 1760 0 C Display span g 1500 0 C Upper limit of the display span gt 300 0 C Lower limit of the display span 0 0 C IM 04L05A01 01E 1 2 Functions of the Input Section Computation You can also perform computation on the input values such as the difference square root and scaling For the setting procedure see section 5 1 Difference Computation The value obtained by subtracting the measured value of another channel this channel is called a reference channel from the input
368. ternal storage medium e View the operation log alarm summary alarm ACK summary and message summary and confirm the information e Select an alarm on the alarm summary and display the waveform around the point where the alarm occurred Select a message on the message summary and display the waveform around the point when the message was written The following functions are the same as those for the historical trend Measured computed values and the date and time at an arbitrary position can be read by moving the cursor using the arrow keys The waveform can be scrolled along the time axis using the cursor keys The time axis can be expanded or reduced The file information of the loaded file can be displayed You can display all the data points of the loaded file in a section of the screen all data display and specify the range of data to be displayed on the historical trend using a frame IM 04L05A01 01E 1 17 1 3 Display Function Status Display Section The following information is displayed in the status display section during operation mode or engineering mode Usage condition of the internal memory see section 1 4 DISP Indicates display data EVENT Indicates event data Indicates the usage condition of the data acquisition area When the data storage area in the internal memory becomes full Overwrite is displayed Indicates the remaining time allowed for data acquisition l i The unit v
369. the operating procedure see section 8 5 Easy Text Entry KB1 KB2 Option You can control the DX100P using the keys on the remote control terminal Set the remote controller ID on the DX100P and the ID number on the remote control terminal to the same value You can set a value between 0 and 31 for the remote controller ID and ID number For the setting procedure see section 4 9 Light receiving section Note The remote control terminal can be used to control both the DX100P and the DX200P Using a single remote control terminal you can control DX100Ps or DX200Ps with different remote controller IDs by changing the ID number on the remote control terminal 1 58 IM 04L05A01 01E Chapter 2 Before Using the DX100P Precautions on the Use of the DX100P 2 1 Read the following precautions before using the DX100P and the external storage medium Zip disk flash memory card Handling Precautions e Use care when cleaning the DX100P especially any plastic parts When cleaning wipe with a dry soft cloth Do not use chemicals such as benzene or thinner since these may cause discoloring and deformation Keep electrically charged objects away from the DX100P as this may cause malfunction Do not apply volatile chemicals to the LCD monitor or panel keys Do not allow rubber and vinyl products to remain in contact with the DX100P for long periods of time This may damage the DX100P Do not apply shock to the DX10
370. the screen menu 2 Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu 3 Select the sub menu item using the up and down arrow keys Sub menu of the trend screen Aw TREND gt GROUP 1 Displays group 1 GROUP 2 Displays group 2 GROUP 3 Displays group 3 GROUP 4 Displays group 4 GROUP 5 Displays group 5 GROUP 6 Displays group 6 ALL CHANNEL Displays the waveform of all the channels See Explanation GROUP CHANNEL Displays the waveforms of the channels registered to groups SCALE ON Displays the scale SCALE OFF Clears the scale DIGITAL OFF Clears the numerical display section DIGITAL ON Displays the numerical display section AUTO SCROLL ON Automatically switches the displayed groups see Explanation AUTO SCROLL OFF Cancels the auto switching of the displayed groups MESSAGE DISP 2 Switches to message display 2 MESSAGE DISP 1 Switches to message display 1 see Explanation LiL TLL LL Si i Ls 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to execute the display To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key Starting the Waveform Display of the Trend Display Stopping the Waveform Update The operation for starting and stopping the waveform display of the trend display is the same as the operation for Memory Start and Memory Stop When Memory Start is executed waveforms are displayed when Memory Stop is ex
371. the setup data on the DX100P the setup file is saved to the external storage medium and the log of setting change is saved to the setting change log audited trail function see section 1 5 Note If damage check indicates damaged the setup data cannot be loaded If the loaded setup data are void check the error log For the procedure for displaying the error log see section 8 9 5 44 IM 04L05A01 01E 5 24 Saving the Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium Using Keys Procedure Explanation Save the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium when data acquisition is stopped This operation can be carried out only by an administrator Press The engineering mode menu screen appears Press the soft key The menu screen is displayed Save Load 1 Save settings 2 Load settings 3 Save data to media Press the soft key The data in the internal memory is saved to the external storage medium Data That Are Saved The display data event data manual sampled data TLOG data and report data in the internal memory are saved For details see section 1 4 Save Destination Directory The data saved using this method is saved to the following directory The specified directory name A where is a sequence number The sequence number of the directory name is incremented by 1 each time the data save operation is carried out Example If the specified directory n
372. the table below For the procedure related to setting the scan interval see section 4 2 Model Number of Measurement Channels Scan interval DX102P 2 channels 125 ms or 250 ms DX104P 4 channels 125 ms or 250 ms DX106P 6 channels 1sor2s DX112P 12 channels 1sor2s Input Type and Computation You can select the input type of a measurement channel from DC voltage thermocouple resistance temperature detector RTD and digital input contact signal or voltage signal For the setting procedure see section 5 1 Input type Description DC voltage Measures a DC voltage in the range 20 mV to 50 V DC current See the explanation below Thermocouple TC Measures the temperature corresponding to the appropriate range for R S B K E J T N W L and U Resistance temperature Measures the temperature corresponding to the appropriate range for detector RTD Pt100 JPt100 Cu10 and CU25 Digital input DI Displays the contact input or voltage input signals by correlating them to 0 or 100 of the display range Contact input Closed contact is 1 Open contact is 0 Voltage input Less than 2 4 V is O Greater than or equal to 2 4 V is 4 Cu10 and CU25 are optional N1 DC Current Input A shunt resistor is attached to the input terminal The current signal is converted to a voltage signal and measured The measurable range is the range equivalent to the DC voltage range indicated above af
373. time until overwriting starts is less than or equal to the specified time memory alarm time if an external storage medium is not inserted in the drive For details on setting the memory alarm time see section 4 9 e Relay Operation Lf NO Cc NC NO Cc NC NO Cc NC During normal operation When a failure occurs When power is turned OFF Memory Start Stop Output The relay is energized when Memory Start operation is executed and is de energized when Memory Stop operation is executed You cannot change this behavior e Relay Operation NO c NC NO c NC During Memory Stop During Memory Start suolpun4 JO M IM AQ a IM 04L05A01 01E 1 51 1 8 FAIL Memory End Output Function F1 option Outputting the User Locked Condition If a wrong password is entered three consecutive times when logging in or signing the user is locked At this point the relay is energized When the operation of acknowledging the user lock see section 6 1 is executed the relay is de energized You cannot change this behavior e Relay Operation NO c NC NO c NC During normal operation When user lock occurs Outputting the Presence of Login Users The relay is energized when there is a user logged into the DX100P Otherwise the relay is de energized You cannot change this behavior Login using keys and login to the setting function via the Ethernet or serial interface e Relay Operation NO c NC NO c NC When there is When there is no l
374. tion Background color white or black Trend line width Trip line width Grid for the trend display Group display switching interval Scroll time Scale digit LCD LCD brightness Turn On Off the LCD backlight 5 14 saver Transition time for the LCD backlight saver and conditions that restore the backlight 5 5 Math Color Computation channel display color 5 10 5 6 Math Zone Zone upper and lower limits 5 11 Math Graph Number of scale divisions for the trend and bar 5 12 graph displays Bar graph base positions Specify the scale display position for trends Math Partial Turn On Off partial expanded display 5 11 Position and boundary for the partial expanded display 6 File Header string to be written to file 5 7 A name of directory to which data are to be saved 7 Save Load 7 1 Save settings Save setup data to the external storage medium 5 23 7 2 Load settings Load setup data from the external storage medium 5 23 7 3 Save data to media Save data to the external storage medium 5 24 8 Time Enter the current time 5 15 9 Batch set Use do not use lot number Auto increment of lot 5 17 number Headers 1 to 3 10 Math set1 Expression Computing equations display span and unit for 5 18 computation channels Math set1 Alarm Alarm type Alarm value Output relay number 5 18 11 Math set2 Constant Constants K01 to K12 5 18 12 Math set3 Tag Tag names of the computation channels 5 3 Math set3 TLOG Timer number used in
375. tion Mode Off Relative Absolute Initial setting Timer 1 Absolute Timer Timer 2 3 Off TLOG No 1 2 3 Interval Absolute 1 min 2 min 3 min 4min 5 min 6 min 10 min 12 min 15 min 20 min 30 min fins 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12h 24h Relative Numerical value Ref time Numerical value Initial setting is 0 00 Reset Action Option 1 User locked User locked Communication Ethernet IP address Subnet mask Default gateway DNS On Off Numerical value Server search order Primary Secondary Numerical value Host name Domain name Character string Domain suffix search order Primary Secondary Communication Serial Baud rate 4800 Data length Character string Memory out FTP transfer file FTP connection Disp amp Event data Parity None RS 232 Handshaking Off Off XON XON XON RS CS RS RS 422A Address 3 4 1485 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Protocol Normal Modbus Modbus M Barcode Off Serial Report Snapshot FTP server name on lor Character string Port number Numerical value Password Login name Account PASV mode Character string On Initial pass Character string
376. tions Using the FUNC and USER Keys Describes the operations that can be performed using the FUNC and USER keys 9 Troubleshooting Describes the error messages and the troubleshooting measures of the DX100P 10 Maintenance Describes fuse replacement and other information 11 Specification Describes the specifications of the DX100P Appendix Describes the parameters and initial values of the engineering mode and system mode data formats of ASCII files types of data that the DX100P generates and the time for acquiring display data and event data to the internal memory Index Note e a a M This manual covers information regarding DX100Ps that have a suffix code for language 2 English For details on setting the displayed language see section 4 9 IM 04L05A01 01E vii How to Use this Manual Conventions Used in This Manual Unit Kissi Denotes 1024 Example 768 KB File capacity Kedecsit Denotes 1000 M Denotes 1024K Example 100 MB Bie Bytes Example 100 MB Symbols The following symbols are used in this manual A Improper handling or use can lead to injury to the user or damage to the instrument This symbol appears on the instrument to indicate that the user must refer to the user s manual for special instructions The same symbol appears in the corresponding place in the user s manual to identify those instructions In the manual the symbol is use
377. tomatically saved to the external storage medium at a specified interval You can select whether to save the measured computed data as display data or event data see section 4 3 a ee rocco Display Data and Event Data For details on the file name Mddhhmma extension see appendix 3 For details on Memory Start and Memory Stop see section 1 5 Maximum value Display data e vO Minimum value e i f H e i n i e Event data a i I i f H i i J a L L E t ant _ E are T ee T E T E T Measured computed _ fie 8 7 8 b ej i H i i i gees i mes H data at scan intervals i i i A Le ame or pee j eart l i T E Saas 4 Time ig Scan interval lt Sampling inteval of event data Sampling inteval of display data Time corresponding to one dot on the screen Display data are used to display waveforms on the DX100P s screen Display data consists of maximum and minimum values of the measured or computed data sampled at the scan interval within the time period corresponding to one dot on the time axis on the screen 1 20 IM 04L05A01 01E 1 4 Measured Computed Data Save Function The time period corresponding to one dot is called the sampling interval of display data cn The sampling interval of display data is dete
378. tseeeeaeenees 4 30 adjusting the internal clock remote control 2 administrator sash dicirian aaar eaa EENET alarm computation alarm ack ou alarm ack remote control alarm ack summary alarm hysteresis alarm icon alarm indication alarm output relay alarm summary all channel display AND OR application 200 arithmetical operations eee cece eeee eee ects tee eeeeeeee PS GUNG aiaia aeeai enS aE SAE A RAEE audit trail function auto LOGOUT 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeseaeeeeseaeeeeetaeeeseeeess AUTO SAVO eiie riiinig iniaiaiai deiet auto switching of groups automatic increment of the lot NUMDer 0 eee automatic switching of displayed group sses background Color wiccccccecscsesicsccctsscerasessssscscesssecsseceessttsterasess 1 19 backlight SAVEM sincicccssiivecds sattececessvevesens cestscesessetauseeeennseedvests 1 19 bar graph screen as base position DLC E TE e E R batch function 7 batchi information 2 sevice ctses cheeeesevs cnt cns seathessecnsacders ria batch NUMbDer venian rsr ai aeni aE EE ia Ea batch Screen sic2ctassete scat avatec ceteersieebiese batch start batch stop remote control DIIGMIMOSS ccsscesccacccsastestssheascsnnescessesuetasoacs 1010 iq 00 Pereenereer ner Rerrerr ae aAA EE a errr ayer rr C calibrat OMaria a R calibration correction calibration correction se
379. tting PASS Failed password verification Check the password setting ACCT Failed account verification Check the account setting TYPE Failed to change the transfer type Check that the server supports the binary transfer mode CWD Failed to change the directory Check the initial path setting PORT Failed to set the transfer connection Check that the security function is disabled PASV Failed to set the transfer connection Check that the server supports PASV commands SCAN Failed to read the transfer connection settings Check that proper response to the PASV command is received from the server 284 FTP transfer setting error Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 284 Character String and Details MODE Internal processing error LOCAL Internal processing error 2 REMOTE The destination file name is not correct Check that you have the authority to create or overwrite files ABORT File transfer abort was requested by the server Check the server for the reason for the abort request 1 See the DX100P DX200P Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L05A01 17E 2 Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer when the messages is displayed 9 6 IM 04L05A01 01E 9 1 A List of Messages Code Message 285 FTP data connection error Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 285 Character String and Deta
380. ttings excluding Login information Login Login information Sys Login System mode excluding the login information settings and Login information Eng Login Engineering mode setting change and login information setting change All All setting changes engineering mode system mode and login information File Output Example Setting Change Log File Model Serial No 12A338617 File Header Process1 Lot2 Date Time No File Name Operation User Name Changed Part 2001 06 15 01 23 45 1 61501231 PPL KEY ABC2001 Sys 2001 08 01 12 34 56 2 80112341 PNL KEY opel Eng 2001 08 01 12 40 56 2 80112400 PNL KEY A Sys Login App 14 IM 04L05A01 01E Appendix 3 Data Type Data Acquisition to When Saving to the External Storage Medium Display Using the Internal File Name Extension Format DAQSIGNIN Memory Display data Yes Mddhhmma DBD BINARY Undisclosed Yes Event data Yes Mddhhmma DBE BINARY Undisclosed Yes Report data Yes Mddhhmma DHR hourly ASCII see appendix 2 Mddhhmma DDR daily Mddhhmma DWR weekly Mddhhmma DMR monthly Manual sampled data Yes Mddhhmma DMN ASCII see appendix 2 TLOG data Yes Mddhhmma DTG BINARY Undisclosed Yes Setup data Yes Mddhhmma PPL BINARY Undisclosed Yes specified string PPL Setting change log Yes Mddhhmma DPL ASCII
381. u item using the up and down arrow keys Sub menu of the historical trend screen GROUP 1 Displays group 1 GROUP 2 Displays group 2 GROUP 3 Displays group 3 GROUP 4 Displays group 4 GROUP 5 Displays group 5 GROUP 6 Displays group 6 ZOOM Display by expanding the time axis ZOOM Display by reducing the time axis ALL CHANNEL Displays the waveform of all the channels see Explanation in section 7 2 GROUP CHANNEL Displays the waveforms of the channels registered to groups MESSAGE DISP 2 Switches to message display 2 MESSAGE DISP 1 Switches to message display 1 see Explanation in section 7 2 CURSOR TIME ON Displays the time at the cursor position CURSOR TIME OFF Displays the time at the display reference position INFORMATION ON Displays the memory information ATT 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to execute the display To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key 7 12 IM 04L05A01 01E 7 5 Using the Historical Trend Reading the Measured Computed Values Using the Cursor The measured computed values at the cursor position are displayed on the screen You can move the cursor by pressing the left and right arrow keys during horizontal display or up and down arrow keys during vertical display When the cursor reaches the end of the displayed waveform the display range of the waveform moves so that the cursor is at the center of the display
382. ual to the specified value 2 Can be specified only on measurement channels Upper limit on rate of change alarm Lower limit on rate of change alarm R alarm f a j 7 Measured Measured l value T2 value Pen Variation Variation T2 TeTil IT2 Til T 4 N r alarm t t2 Time gt t t2 Time gt a Interval Interval t2 t1 te ti The interval is defined by the following equation and is set in terms of the number of samplings Interval scan interval x number of samplings Alarm Hysteresis This applies to upper H and lower L limit alarms on measurement channels A width hysteresis can be specified on the value used to set or release the alarm This prevents the alarm from being set or released repetitively when the measured value is fluctuating around the alarm value The hysteresis is fixed to 0 5 of the display span display scale if the range is set to Scale For the setting procedure see section 4 1 Upper Limit Alarm H Alarm occurrence Alarm value 1V lt Hysteresis approx 0 5 Alarm release Measured value Lower Limidt Alarm L Alarm release Measured value 1V Hysteresis approx 0 5 Alarm value occurrence 1 40 IM 04L05A01 01E 1 6 Alarm Function Alarm Indication The alarm conditions are displayed as alarm icons in the status display section and through the trend
383. ue Measured value IM 04L05A01 01E 1 9 SUOI DUNY JO M Q E 1 3 Display Function Digital Screen The measured computed data are displayed using numerical values in large size See section 7 2 TI 881 FI 881 Tag Channel no 61 26 51 56 C l min H R TI 882 FI1 882 28 3 8 111 6 Measured computed value C m3 h Unit T H Alarm mark Updating of the Numerical Display Measured computed values are updated every second However when the scan interval on the DX106P DX112P is 2 s the update rate is also 2 s Note e Numerical Display of Measurement Channels Common to Trend Digital and Bar Graph Displays When the measured values of measurement channels are over range see below the measured values are indicated as XxXxXxX or KXxXxx Otherwise the numerical values are displayed Over Range of Measurement Channels For DC voltage input over range occurs when the measured value of the measurement channel exceeds 5 of the measurable range For example the measurable range when the measurement range is 2 V is 2 000 to 2 000 V If the measured value exceeds 2 200 V over range occurs if the measured value falls below 2 200 V over range occurs For thermocouple or RTD input over range occurs when the measured value exceeds approximately 10 C of the measurable range For example the measurable range when the measurement range is R is 0 0 to 1760 0 C If the measured
384. ues and store computed data Channels assignable to computed data DX102P DX104P Up to 8 channels DX106P DX112P Up to 30 channels Operation General arithmetic operations Four arithmetic operations square root absolute common logarithm exponential power relational operations lt lt gt gt logical operations AND OR NOT XOR Statistical operations TLOG computation Average maximum minimum summation and maximum minimum Special operations Rolling average moving average on computed results Constant Available Up to 12 constants Digital input data via communication Digital data via communication can be used in calculation expression Up to 12 data Remote input status R1 option Remote input status 0 1 can be used in calculation expression Up to 8 inputs TLOG data The instantaneous values of all channels excluding measurement channels set to skip and computation channels set to Off can be saved from the time computation is started to the time computation is stopped at intervals specified by a timer Report functions Report type Hourly daily hourly daily daily monthly and daily weekly Operation Average maximum minimum and summation Report channel Up to 12 channels per report Data format ASCII 11 12 IM 04L05A01 01E 11 7 Specifications of Optional Functions Cu10 Cu25 RTD Input 3 terminal isolated RTD Input N1 This option allows Cu10 and Cu25 i
385. unction Adds batch information to the display data file or event data file Information that can be added to the data DX100P serial No headers 1 to 3 batch number lot number date and time of Memory Start and user name date and time of Memory Stop and user name and comment Data format of measured computed data and setup data Display data event data TLOG data and setup data are in BINARY format undisclosed IM 04L05A01 01E suoneoyioeds Ey 11 6 Specifications of Communication Functions Connection Protocols FTP client functions FTP server functions Ethernet 10BASE T FTP TCP IP UDP ICPM ARP HTTP SMTP Automatic file transport from the DX100P FTP client protocol Files that can be transported Display data file event data file setup file setting change log file report data file and screen image data file Directory information output and file output on the external storage medium on request of FTP client Setting Measurement server Registered users can log in via Ethernet A proprietary protocol is used Setting function e Outputs measured data real time monitor is possible e Outputs logs setup data screen image data status info and login info e Outputs files on the external storage medium e Operates the DX100P e Configures the DX100P Real time monitor function Monitor the measured computed data of the DX100P Monitor function e Outputs measured data real time monito
386. unction conditions to be displayed on the soft key menu Logout 6 1 Log out only when logged in Batch 8 1 Display the batch screen Message 8 2 Write messages Manual sample 8 3 Saves the measured computed data instantaneous values once Math START Math STOP 8 4 Start stop computation only for models with the computation option M1 Math reset 8 4 Set the computed value of the computation channel to 0 only on models with the computation option M1 while the computation is stopped Math ACK 8 4 Set the icon indicating computation data dropout back to normal only on models with the computation option M1 when computation data dropout occurred Snapshot 8 5 Saves the current screen image data to the external storage medium Save Display Save Event 8 6 Saves the display data or event data to the external storage medium only when Type of process is set to Continue and Memory Start is executed Data Load 8 7 Loads the display data or event data from the external storage medium and displays the data on the sign record screen File list 8 8 Displays a list of files of the external storage medium Log 8 9 Displays the log screen system screen Password change 8 10 Changes the login password E Mail START E Mail STOP Enables disables the e mail transmission function FTP test Executes an FTP test E Mail test Transmit test mail messages to recipients 1 and 2 SNTP Adjusts the time to the time retrieved from an SNTP server
387. units of files to the server on the network FTP client function Load the measured data on the DX100P configure and operate the DX100P from a PC on the network setting measurement server function Retrieve the files on the external storage medium of the DX100P from a PC on the network FTP server function Display the screen of the DX100P on a Web browser on a PC Web server function Transmit e mail messages to preset recipients when events occur e mail transmission function Synchronize to the time on an SNTP server on the network SNTP client function Transmit time information to clients on the network as an SNTP server SNTP server function DX100P Time data EE u Configures and operates the DX100P Loads the measured data and files Primary Secondary SNTP server DAQSIGNIN See IM 04L05A01 61E By using the DAQSIGNIN that comes standard with the DX100P the following operations are possible e e e e Adding approval information to the measured data file Converting the measured data to ASCII Lotus or Excel formats Configuring the setup file for the DX100P Receiving the setup data from the DX100P sending the setup data to the DX100P via the Ethernet interface IM 04L05A01 01E 1 1 SUOI DUNY JO M Q a 1 2 Functions of the Input Section Number of Measurement Channels Scan Interval The number of measurement channels and scan intervals for different models are listed in
388. ur gt i 1 Meas CH Math CH To set the measurement channels select Meas CH To set the computation channels select Math CH Math CH appears only on models with the computation option M1 2 First channel and last channel Select the desired channel numbers 3 On Off On Display the trend acquire data Off Do not display the trend do not acquire data The initial setting is On for all channels Repeat step 1 through 3 if necessary Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 4 6 IM 04L05A01 01E 4 3 Setting the Method of the Display Event Data Acquisition and Saving Setting the Date Time When Data Is To Be Saved Memory Timeup When the date time set here comes the display data or the event data in the internal memory is delimited and saved to the external storage medium Note If the type of process is Batch and a single batch data is divided into multiple files you cannot sign the batch data using the DX100P Use the DAQSIGNIN that came with the package to sign the data 4 Timeup type Select the type of the time interval from Hour Day Week and Month If a setting other than Off is specified Date or Day of the week and Time hour are displayed Off Disable this functi
389. ur on the first Sunday of June The DX100P automatically sets the time ahead by 1 hour at the start time every year The DX100P automatically sets the time back by 1 hour at the end time Example If the DST start time is set to 2nd hour on the first Sunday in April the time on the DX100P is set to 8rd hour at that time Example If the DST end time is set to 1st hour on the last Sunday in October the time on the DX100P is set to 0 hour at that time The start and end of DST are recorded in the operation log For the setting procedure see section 5 21 Temperature Unit The temperature unit can be set to Celsius C or Fahrenheit F This applies to all channels For the setting procedure see section 4 2 IM 04L05A01 01E 1 57 SUOI OUNY JO M Q a 1 10 Other Functions 24 VDC Power Supply for Transmitter TPS2 TPS4 option Provides 24 VDC power to up to two TPS2 or four TPS4 transmitters As the output from the transmitter is a 4 to 20 mA signal on the same cable as for power supply the cable is connected to the input terminal of the DX100P and displayed on the DX100P s screen For the terminal arrangement see section 2 9 Snap Shot Saving the Screen Image Data The image data displayed on the screen can be saved to the external storage medium through key operation The data is in PNG format and can be pasted to commercially sold software programs such as document creation software For
390. val 3600 For the setting procedure see section 5 19 1 46 IM 04L05A01 01E 1 7 Computation Function and Report Function M1 Option Reset Action Whether or not to reset the computed result at every timeout is selectable The figure O below shows the action of TLOG SUM computation Example Result of the TLOG SUM computation s Interval 1 2 3 Q Reset Reset Reset n Reset On c A a 2 ae ne S5 o a gt ao Reset Off The summed value is reset to 0 at every interval when Reset is On or the summed value from the start of computation is derived when Reset is Off If Power is Lost While the TLOG Computation Was in Progress The TLOG computation is resumed when the power is restored The operation varies depending on whether power is restored before or after the scheduled time to create the TLOG data Time of Recovery TLOG Computation Operation After the time to create TLOG data are created immediately when power is the TLOG data restored The measured computed data up to the time of the power disruption are used At the next scheduled TLOG computation time data will be used from the point in time after the power was restored Before the time to create After power is restored TLOG data are created at the normally the TLOG data scheduled time to perform the TLOG computation All measured computed data excluding the power disruption period are used How the
391. value becomes a measured value of the channel Difference computation Input value n Measured value of the reference channel Note Even if the input type or the measurement range of the difference computation channel and the reference channel is not the same the difference computation is performed according to the following rules When the decimal position between the reference channel and the difference computation channel is different the measured value of the reference channel is adjusted to the decimal position of the measured value of the difference computation channel to make the computation Example When the measured value of the difference computation channel is 10 00 and the measured value of the reference channel is 100 0 the computation result becomes 10 00 100 0 90 00 When the units for the reference channel and the difference computation channel are different the measured value is not adjusted Example When the measured value of the difference computation channel is 10 00 V and the measured value of the reference channel is 5 00 mV the computation result becomes 10 00 V 5 00 mV 5 00 V e When the reference channel is set to Scale or Sqrt the computation uses the scaled values When the calibration correction see next page is applied to the channel values after correction is used for the computation Scaling When the input type is set to DC voltage thermocouple RTD or di
392. w password 408 Enter password again for confirmation Reenter the password for confirmation 409 This password is not correct or was already used The password is incorrect Or the password has been used in the past The combinations of user IDs and passwords that are identical to those specified by other users or those that have been registered in the past cannot be specified Enter the password using 6 to 8 alphanumeric characters Spaces cannot be used for the password 420 Connection has been lost The specified function name setting or monitor is incorrect Or quit was used for the user name Communication has been disconnected Enter the correct function name using lowercase letters You cannot use quit as a user name 9 10 IM 04L05A01 01E 9 1 A List of Messages Code Message and Description 421 The number of simultaneous connection has been exceeded Attempted to connect exceeding the maximum number of simultaneous connections Drop other connections first 422 Communication has timed out Connection has been dropped due to communication timeout Enter the function name user name user ID and password within two minutes 450 This entry is incorrect User information is incorrect Communication has been disconnected Check the user name user ID and password 451 Login prohibited because another user is logged in There is a user with the same user name already logge
393. xKO2 is five IM 04L05A01 01E 5 37 apo Burseourbuy y ul uoneIn yuo a 5 19 Setting the Timer Number and Sum Scale for TLOG Computation M1 Option Set the number of the timer used by the channel computing the TLOG Also set the sum scale that is used when determining the sum in TLOG SUM The timer specifications are set in the system mode see section 4 7 Twice press the soft key Next To display the setting screen press the soft key 12 Procedure 1 eT First CH 31 Last CH far Tag TLOG Timer No ba 2 Sum scale off 3 Rolling average off Alarm Delay Time 10 s 1 First CH Last CH Select the desired channels For the channels set here other parameters shown in the above figure are also simultaneously set 2 Timer No Select the number of the timer 1 2 or 3 specified in the system mode 3 Sum scale When the channel is computing TLOG SUM select the scale unit from Off s min or h See section 1 7 You do not have to set this for channels that are not computing TLOG SUM leave it Off Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 5 38 IM 04L05A01 01E 5 20 Setting the Rolling Average M1 Option Procedure Press rw Twice press the soft
394. y 5 16 IM 04L05A01 01E 5 11 Setting Zone Displays Partial Expanded Displays Trend Procedure For details on the zone display function and the partial expanded display function see section 1 3 To use the partial expanded display first set the partial expanded display to Use in the system mode see section 4 9 If not a partial expanded display setting box in the engineering mode will not be displayed Press rw Press the soft key Net Press the soft key 5 Setting on a Measurement Channel To display the setting screen press the soft key 3 To display the setting screen press the soft key 6 1 Setting on a Computation Channel Option First CH jar Last CH far 2 Zone Partial 3 Lower og Expand 50 4 Upper 100 8 Boundary 8 888 5 Graph Division Em 4 Bar graph Normal Scale position 1 1 First CH Last CH Select the desired channels For the channels set here other parameters shown in the above figure are also simultaneously set Zone Displays 2 Zone Lower Upper Set the waveform display zone from Lower to Upper Lower 0 to 95 Upper 5 to 100 Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see section 3 6 Entering Numbers and Characters Note Lower must be a smaller value than Upper e The width of the zone upper
395. y u UONesNBYyUOD a 4 14 Setting Items That Are Allowed to Be Changed While Data Acquisition Is in Progress Procedure Enter the system mode Twice press the soft key Next Press the 10 Active storage change soft key The menu screen is displayed Active storage changes Time change EM User change On 2 Cal correct change n 3 Text message on cal correct On 4 1 Time change On The time on the DX100P can be changed while data acquisition is in progress Off The time cannot be changed while data acquisition is in progress 2 User change On Users can be registered while data acquisition is in progress Off Users cannot be registered while data acquisition is in progress 3 Cal correct change On The segments for calibration correction can be specified while data acquisition is in progress Off The segments for calibration correction cannot be specified while data acquisition is in progress 4 Text message on cal correct Displayed only when Cal correct change is set to On in step 3 On A message is written when there is a change in the calibration correction setting while data acquisition is in progress see Explanation Off A message is not written even when there is a change in the calibration correction setting while data acquisition is in progress Confirming Operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key
396. y Stop T1 T2 g ti t2 tn tn 1 Time _ l t Y to 4 The average maximum minimum and sum for the specified channels stored to the internal memory and saved to the external storage medium Up to 50 data sets can be stored to the internal memory When this number is exceeded data are overwritten starting with the oldest data When daily and monthly reports is specified for example the total number of daily and monthly reports that can be stored in the internal memory is 50 The first time report computation is executed a report data file is created on the external storage medium A file is created for each type of report such as hourly daily weekly and monthly reports The data are appended to this file at each time interval Dividing Report Files The report files are divided at the following times e When the data acquisition is stopped Memory Stop e For hourly reports When the 0 00 report is created every day When the number of data sets in the file reaches 25 e For daily reports When the report for the first day of the month is created every month When the number of data sets in the file reaches 32 For the setting procedures see section 4 6 Note The number of report data sets in the internal memory can be confirmed on the memory summary see section 1 3 e When there is no medium in the drive at the time when data are supposed to be saved all unsaved data

Model DX102P/DX104P/DX106P/DX112P

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents